initial

thirdparty/clang/include/llvm/IR/Argument.h

@@ -0,0 +1,100 @@
+//===-- llvm/Argument.h - Definition of the Argument class ------*- C++ -*-===//
+//
+//                     The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure
+//
+// This file is distributed under the University of Illinois Open Source
+// License. See LICENSE.TXT for details.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+//
+// This file declares the Argument class.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+
+#ifndef LLVM_IR_ARGUMENT_H
+#define LLVM_IR_ARGUMENT_H
+
+#include "llvm/ADT/Twine.h"
+#include "llvm/ADT/ilist_node.h"
+#include "llvm/IR/Attributes.h"
+#include "llvm/IR/Value.h"
+
+namespace llvm {
+
+template<typename ValueSubClass, typename ItemParentClass>
+  class SymbolTableListTraits;
+
+/// \brief LLVM Argument representation
+///
+/// This class represents an incoming formal argument to a Function. A formal
+/// argument, since it is ``formal'', does not contain an actual value but
+/// instead represents the type, argument number, and attributes of an argument
+/// for a specific function. When used in the body of said function, the
+/// argument of course represents the value of the actual argument that the
+/// function was called with.
+class Argument : public Value, public ilist_node<Argument> {
+  virtual void anchor();
+  Function *Parent;
+
+  friend class SymbolTableListTraits<Argument, Function>;
+  void setParent(Function *parent);
+
+public:
+  /// \brief Constructor.
+  ///
+  /// If \p F is specified, the argument is inserted at the end of the argument
+  /// list for \p F.
+  explicit Argument(Type *Ty, const Twine &Name = "", Function *F = 0);
+
+  inline const Function *getParent() const { return Parent; }
+  inline       Function *getParent()       { return Parent; }
+
+  /// \brief Return the index of this formal argument in its containing
+  /// function.
+  ///
+  /// For example in "void foo(int a, float b)" a is 0 and b is 1.
+  unsigned getArgNo() const;
+
+  /// \brief Return true if this argument has the byval attribute on it in its
+  /// containing function.
+  bool hasByValAttr() const;
+
+  /// \brief If this is a byval argument, return its alignment.
+  unsigned getParamAlignment() const;
+
+  /// \brief Return true if this argument has the nest attribute on it in its
+  /// containing function.
+  bool hasNestAttr() const;
+
+  /// \brief Return true if this argument has the noalias attribute on it in its
+  /// containing function.
+  bool hasNoAliasAttr() const;
+
+  /// \brief Return true if this argument has the nocapture attribute on it in
+  /// its containing function.
+  bool hasNoCaptureAttr() const;
+
+  /// \brief Return true if this argument has the sret attribute on it in its
+  /// containing function.
+  bool hasStructRetAttr() const;
+
+  /// \brief Return true if this argument has the returned attribute on it in
+  /// its containing function.
+  bool hasReturnedAttr() const;
+
+  /// \brief Add a Attribute to an argument.
+  void addAttr(AttributeSet AS);
+
+  /// \brief Remove a Attribute from an argument.
+  void removeAttr(AttributeSet AS);
+
+  /// \brief Method for support type inquiry through isa, cast, and
+  /// dyn_cast.
+  static inline bool classof(const Value *V) {
+    return V->getValueID() == ArgumentVal;
+  }
+};
+
+} // End llvm namespace
+
+#endif

thirdparty/clang/include/llvm/IR/Attributes.h

@@ -0,0 +1,498 @@
+//===-- llvm/Attributes.h - Container for Attributes ------------*- C++ -*-===//
+//
+//                     The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure
+//
+// This file is distributed under the University of Illinois Open Source
+// License. See LICENSE.TXT for details.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+///
+/// \file
+/// \brief This file contains the simple types necessary to represent the
+/// attributes associated with functions and their calls.
+///
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+
+#ifndef LLVM_IR_ATTRIBUTES_H
+#define LLVM_IR_ATTRIBUTES_H
+
+#include "llvm/ADT/ArrayRef.h"
+#include "llvm/ADT/FoldingSet.h"
+#include "llvm/Support/PointerLikeTypeTraits.h"
+#include <bitset>
+#include <cassert>
+#include <map>
+#include <string>
+
+namespace llvm {
+
+class AttrBuilder;
+class AttributeImpl;
+class AttributeSetImpl;
+class AttributeSetNode;
+class Constant;
+template<typename T> struct DenseMapInfo;
+class LLVMContext;
+class Type;
+
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+/// \class
+/// \brief Functions, function parameters, and return types can have attributes
+/// to indicate how they should be treated by optimizations and code
+/// generation. This class represents one of those attributes. It's light-weight
+/// and should be passed around by-value.
+class Attribute {
+public:
+  /// This enumeration lists the attributes that can be associated with
+  /// parameters, function results, or the function itself.
+  ///
+  /// Note: The `uwtable' attribute is about the ABI or the user mandating an
+  /// entry in the unwind table. The `nounwind' attribute is about an exception
+  /// passing by the function.
+  ///
+  /// In a theoretical system that uses tables for profiling and SjLj for
+  /// exceptions, they would be fully independent. In a normal system that uses
+  /// tables for both, the semantics are:
+  ///
+  /// nil                = Needs an entry because an exception might pass by.
+  /// nounwind           = No need for an entry
+  /// uwtable            = Needs an entry because the ABI says so and because
+  ///                      an exception might pass by.
+  /// uwtable + nounwind = Needs an entry because the ABI says so.
+
+  enum AttrKind {
+    // IR-Level Attributes
+    None,                  ///< No attributes have been set
+    Alignment,             ///< Alignment of parameter (5 bits)
+                           ///< stored as log2 of alignment with +1 bias
+                           ///< 0 means unaligned (different from align(1))
+    AlwaysInline,          ///< inline=always
+    ByVal,                 ///< Pass structure by value
+    InlineHint,            ///< Source said inlining was desirable
+    InReg,                 ///< Force argument to be passed in register
+    MinSize,               ///< Function must be optimized for size first
+    Naked,                 ///< Naked function
+    Nest,                  ///< Nested function static chain
+    NoAlias,               ///< Considered to not alias after call
+    NoBuiltin,             ///< Callee isn't recognized as a builtin
+    NoCapture,             ///< Function creates no aliases of pointer
+    NoDuplicate,           ///< Call cannot be duplicated
+    NoImplicitFloat,       ///< Disable implicit floating point insts
+    NoInline,              ///< inline=never
+    NonLazyBind,           ///< Function is called early and/or
+                           ///< often, so lazy binding isn't worthwhile
+    NoRedZone,             ///< Disable redzone
+    NoReturn,              ///< Mark the function as not returning
+    NoUnwind,              ///< Function doesn't unwind stack
+    OptimizeForSize,       ///< opt_size
+    ReadNone,              ///< Function does not access memory
+    ReadOnly,              ///< Function only reads from memory
+    Returned,              ///< Return value is always equal to this argument
+    ReturnsTwice,          ///< Function can return twice
+    SExt,                  ///< Sign extended before/after call
+    StackAlignment,        ///< Alignment of stack for function (3 bits)
+                           ///< stored as log2 of alignment with +1 bias 0
+                           ///< means unaligned (different from
+                           ///< alignstack=(1))
+    StackProtect,          ///< Stack protection.
+    StackProtectReq,       ///< Stack protection required.
+    StackProtectStrong,    ///< Strong Stack protection.
+    StructRet,             ///< Hidden pointer to structure to return
+    SanitizeAddress,       ///< AddressSanitizer is on.
+    SanitizeThread,        ///< ThreadSanitizer is on.
+    SanitizeMemory,        ///< MemorySanitizer is on.
+    UWTable,               ///< Function must be in a unwind table
+    ZExt,                  ///< Zero extended before/after call
+
+    EndAttrKinds           ///< Sentinal value useful for loops
+  };
+private:
+  AttributeImpl *pImpl;
+  Attribute(AttributeImpl *A) : pImpl(A) {}
+public:
+  Attribute() : pImpl(0) {}
+
+  //===--------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+  // Attribute Construction
+  //===--------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+
+  /// \brief Return a uniquified Attribute object.
+  static Attribute get(LLVMContext &Context, AttrKind Kind, uint64_t Val = 0);
+  static Attribute get(LLVMContext &Context, StringRef Kind,
+                       StringRef Val = StringRef());
+
+  /// \brief Return a uniquified Attribute object that has the specific
+  /// alignment set.
+  static Attribute getWithAlignment(LLVMContext &Context, uint64_t Align);
+  static Attribute getWithStackAlignment(LLVMContext &Context, uint64_t Align);
+
+  //===--------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+  // Attribute Accessors
+  //===--------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+
+  /// \brief Return true if the attribute is an Attribute::AttrKind type.
+  bool isEnumAttribute() const;
+
+  /// \brief Return true if the attribute is an alignment attribute.
+  bool isAlignAttribute() const;
+
+  /// \brief Return true if the attribute is a string (target-dependent)
+  /// attribute.
+  bool isStringAttribute() const;
+
+  /// \brief Return true if the attribute is present.
+  bool hasAttribute(AttrKind Val) const;
+
+  /// \brief Return true if the target-dependent attribute is present.
+  bool hasAttribute(StringRef Val) const;
+
+  /// \brief Return the attribute's kind as an enum (Attribute::AttrKind). This
+  /// requires the attribute to be an enum or alignment attribute.
+  Attribute::AttrKind getKindAsEnum() const;
+
+  /// \brief Return the attribute's value as an integer. This requires that the
+  /// attribute be an alignment attribute.
+  uint64_t getValueAsInt() const;
+
+  /// \brief Return the attribute's kind as a string. This requires the
+  /// attribute to be a string attribute.
+  StringRef getKindAsString() const;
+
+  /// \brief Return the attribute's value as a string. This requires the
+  /// attribute to be a string attribute.
+  StringRef getValueAsString() const;
+
+  /// \brief Returns the alignment field of an attribute as a byte alignment
+  /// value.
+  unsigned getAlignment() const;
+
+  /// \brief Returns the stack alignment field of an attribute as a byte
+  /// alignment value.
+  unsigned getStackAlignment() const;
+
+  /// \brief The Attribute is converted to a string of equivalent mnemonic. This
+  /// is, presumably, for writing out the mnemonics for the assembly writer.
+  std::string getAsString(bool InAttrGrp = false) const;
+
+  /// \brief Equality and non-equality operators.
+  bool operator==(Attribute A) const { return pImpl == A.pImpl; }
+  bool operator!=(Attribute A) const { return pImpl != A.pImpl; }
+
+  /// \brief Less-than operator. Useful for sorting the attributes list.
+  bool operator<(Attribute A) const;
+
+  void Profile(FoldingSetNodeID &ID) const {
+    ID.AddPointer(pImpl);
+  }
+};
+
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+/// \class
+/// \brief This class holds the attributes for a function, its return value, and
+/// its parameters. You access the attributes for each of them via an index into
+/// the AttributeSet object. The function attributes are at index
+/// `AttributeSet::FunctionIndex', the return value is at index
+/// `AttributeSet::ReturnIndex', and the attributes for the parameters start at
+/// index `1'.
+class AttributeSet {
+public:
+  enum AttrIndex {
+    ReturnIndex = 0U,
+    FunctionIndex = ~0U
+  };
+private:
+  friend class AttrBuilder;
+  friend class AttributeSetImpl;
+  template <typename Ty> friend struct DenseMapInfo;
+
+  /// \brief The attributes that we are managing. This can be null to represent
+  /// the empty attributes list.
+  AttributeSetImpl *pImpl;
+
+  /// \brief The attributes for the specified index are returned.
+  AttributeSetNode *getAttributes(unsigned Index) const;
+
+  /// \brief Create an AttributeSet with the specified parameters in it.
+  static AttributeSet get(LLVMContext &C,
+                          ArrayRef<std::pair<unsigned, Attribute> > Attrs);
+  static AttributeSet get(LLVMContext &C,
+                          ArrayRef<std::pair<unsigned,
+                                             AttributeSetNode*> > Attrs);
+
+  static AttributeSet getImpl(LLVMContext &C,
+                              ArrayRef<std::pair<unsigned,
+                                                 AttributeSetNode*> > Attrs);
+
+
+  explicit AttributeSet(AttributeSetImpl *LI) : pImpl(LI) {}
+public:
+  AttributeSet() : pImpl(0) {}
+
+  //===--------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+  // AttributeSet Construction and Mutation
+  //===--------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+
+  /// \brief Return an AttributeSet with the specified parameters in it.
+  static AttributeSet get(LLVMContext &C, ArrayRef<AttributeSet> Attrs);
+  static AttributeSet get(LLVMContext &C, unsigned Index,
+                          ArrayRef<Attribute::AttrKind> Kind);
+  static AttributeSet get(LLVMContext &C, unsigned Index, AttrBuilder &B);
+
+  /// \brief Add an attribute to the attribute set at the given index. Since
+  /// attribute sets are immutable, this returns a new set.
+  AttributeSet addAttribute(LLVMContext &C, unsigned Index,
+                            Attribute::AttrKind Attr) const;
+
+  /// \brief Add an attribute to the attribute set at the given index. Since
+  /// attribute sets are immutable, this returns a new set.
+  AttributeSet addAttribute(LLVMContext &C, unsigned Index,
+                            StringRef Kind) const;
+
+  /// \brief Add attributes to the attribute set at the given index. Since
+  /// attribute sets are immutable, this returns a new set.
+  AttributeSet addAttributes(LLVMContext &C, unsigned Index,
+                             AttributeSet Attrs) const;
+
+  /// \brief Remove the specified attribute at the specified index from this
+  /// attribute list. Since attribute lists are immutable, this returns the new
+  /// list.
+  AttributeSet removeAttribute(LLVMContext &C, unsigned Index, 
+                               Attribute::AttrKind Attr) const;
+
+  /// \brief Remove the specified attributes at the specified index from this
+  /// attribute list. Since attribute lists are immutable, this returns the new
+  /// list.
+  AttributeSet removeAttributes(LLVMContext &C, unsigned Index, 
+                                AttributeSet Attrs) const;
+
+  //===--------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+  // AttributeSet Accessors
+  //===--------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+
+  /// \brief Retrieve the LLVM context.
+  LLVMContext &getContext() const;
+
+  /// \brief The attributes for the specified index are returned.
+  AttributeSet getParamAttributes(unsigned Index) const;
+
+  /// \brief The attributes for the ret value are returned.
+  AttributeSet getRetAttributes() const;
+
+  /// \brief The function attributes are returned.
+  AttributeSet getFnAttributes() const;
+
+  /// \brief Return true if the attribute exists at the given index.
+  bool hasAttribute(unsigned Index, Attribute::AttrKind Kind) const;
+
+  /// \brief Return true if the attribute exists at the given index.
+  bool hasAttribute(unsigned Index, StringRef Kind) const;
+
+  /// \brief Return true if attribute exists at the given index.
+  bool hasAttributes(unsigned Index) const;
+
+  /// \brief Return true if the specified attribute is set for at least one
+  /// parameter or for the return value.
+  bool hasAttrSomewhere(Attribute::AttrKind Attr) const;
+
+  /// \brief Return the attribute object that exists at the given index.
+  Attribute getAttribute(unsigned Index, Attribute::AttrKind Kind) const;
+
+  /// \brief Return the attribute object that exists at the given index.
+  Attribute getAttribute(unsigned Index, StringRef Kind) const;
+
+  /// \brief Return the alignment for the specified function parameter.
+  unsigned getParamAlignment(unsigned Index) const;
+
+  /// \brief Get the stack alignment.
+  unsigned getStackAlignment(unsigned Index) const;
+
+  /// \brief Return the attributes at the index as a string.
+  std::string getAsString(unsigned Index, bool TargetIndependent = true,
+                          bool InAttrGrp = false) const;
+
+  typedef ArrayRef<Attribute>::iterator iterator;
+
+  iterator begin(unsigned Slot) const;
+  iterator end(unsigned Slot) const;
+
+  /// operator==/!= - Provide equality predicates.
+  bool operator==(const AttributeSet &RHS) const {
+    return pImpl == RHS.pImpl;
+  }
+  bool operator!=(const AttributeSet &RHS) const {
+    return pImpl != RHS.pImpl;
+  }
+
+  //===--------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+  // AttributeSet Introspection
+  //===--------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+
+  // FIXME: Remove this.
+  uint64_t Raw(unsigned Index) const;
+
+  /// \brief Return a raw pointer that uniquely identifies this attribute list.
+  void *getRawPointer() const {
+    return pImpl;
+  }
+
+  /// \brief Return true if there are no attributes.
+  bool isEmpty() const {
+    return getNumSlots() == 0;
+  }
+
+  /// \brief Return the number of slots used in this attribute list.  This is
+  /// the number of arguments that have an attribute set on them (including the
+  /// function itself).
+  unsigned getNumSlots() const;
+
+  /// \brief Return the index for the given slot.
+  uint64_t getSlotIndex(unsigned Slot) const;
+
+  /// \brief Return the attributes at the given slot.
+  AttributeSet getSlotAttributes(unsigned Slot) const;
+
+  void dump() const;
+};
+
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+/// \class
+/// \brief Provide DenseMapInfo for AttributeSet.
+template<> struct DenseMapInfo<AttributeSet> {
+  static inline AttributeSet getEmptyKey() {
+    uintptr_t Val = static_cast<uintptr_t>(-1);
+    Val <<= PointerLikeTypeTraits<void*>::NumLowBitsAvailable;
+    return AttributeSet(reinterpret_cast<AttributeSetImpl*>(Val));
+  }
+  static inline AttributeSet getTombstoneKey() {
+    uintptr_t Val = static_cast<uintptr_t>(-2);
+    Val <<= PointerLikeTypeTraits<void*>::NumLowBitsAvailable;
+    return AttributeSet(reinterpret_cast<AttributeSetImpl*>(Val));
+  }
+  static unsigned getHashValue(AttributeSet AS) {
+    return (unsigned((uintptr_t)AS.pImpl) >> 4) ^
+           (unsigned((uintptr_t)AS.pImpl) >> 9);
+  }
+  static bool isEqual(AttributeSet LHS, AttributeSet RHS) { return LHS == RHS; }
+};
+
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+/// \class
+/// \brief This class is used in conjunction with the Attribute::get method to
+/// create an Attribute object. The object itself is uniquified. The Builder's
+/// value, however, is not. So this can be used as a quick way to test for
+/// equality, presence of attributes, etc.
+class AttrBuilder {
+  std::bitset<Attribute::EndAttrKinds> Attrs;
+  std::map<std::string, std::string> TargetDepAttrs;
+  uint64_t Alignment;
+  uint64_t StackAlignment;
+public:
+  AttrBuilder() : Attrs(0), Alignment(0), StackAlignment(0) {}
+  explicit AttrBuilder(uint64_t Val)
+    : Attrs(0), Alignment(0), StackAlignment(0) {
+    addRawValue(Val);
+  }
+  AttrBuilder(const Attribute &A) : Attrs(0), Alignment(0), StackAlignment(0) {
+    addAttribute(A);
+  }
+  AttrBuilder(AttributeSet AS, unsigned Idx);
+  AttrBuilder(const AttrBuilder &B)
+    : Attrs(B.Attrs),
+      TargetDepAttrs(B.TargetDepAttrs.begin(), B.TargetDepAttrs.end()),
+      Alignment(B.Alignment), StackAlignment(B.StackAlignment) {}
+
+  void clear();
+
+  /// \brief Add an attribute to the builder.
+  AttrBuilder &addAttribute(Attribute::AttrKind Val);
+
+  /// \brief Add the Attribute object to the builder.
+  AttrBuilder &addAttribute(Attribute A);
+
+  /// \brief Add the target-dependent attribute to the builder.
+  AttrBuilder &addAttribute(StringRef A, StringRef V = StringRef());
+
+  /// \brief Remove an attribute from the builder.
+  AttrBuilder &removeAttribute(Attribute::AttrKind Val);
+
+  /// \brief Remove the attributes from the builder.
+  AttrBuilder &removeAttributes(AttributeSet A, uint64_t Index);
+
+  /// \brief Remove the target-dependent attribute to the builder.
+  AttrBuilder &removeAttribute(StringRef A);
+
+  /// \brief Add the attributes from the builder.
+  AttrBuilder &merge(const AttrBuilder &B);
+
+  /// \brief Return true if the builder has the specified attribute.
+  bool contains(Attribute::AttrKind A) const {
+    assert((unsigned)A < Attribute::EndAttrKinds && "Attribute out of range!");
+    return Attrs[A];
+  }
+
+  /// \brief Return true if the builder has the specified target-dependent
+  /// attribute.
+  bool contains(StringRef A) const;
+
+  /// \brief Return true if the builder has IR-level attributes.
+  bool hasAttributes() const;
+
+  /// \brief Return true if the builder has any attribute that's in the
+  /// specified attribute.
+  bool hasAttributes(AttributeSet A, uint64_t Index) const;
+
+  /// \brief Return true if the builder has an alignment attribute.
+  bool hasAlignmentAttr() const;
+
+  /// \brief Retrieve the alignment attribute, if it exists.
+  uint64_t getAlignment() const { return Alignment; }
+
+  /// \brief Retrieve the stack alignment attribute, if it exists.
+  uint64_t getStackAlignment() const { return StackAlignment; }
+
+  /// \brief This turns an int alignment (which must be a power of 2) into the
+  /// form used internally in Attribute.
+  AttrBuilder &addAlignmentAttr(unsigned Align);
+
+  /// \brief This turns an int stack alignment (which must be a power of 2) into
+  /// the form used internally in Attribute.
+  AttrBuilder &addStackAlignmentAttr(unsigned Align);
+
+  /// \brief Return true if the builder contains no target-independent
+  /// attributes.
+  bool empty() const { return Attrs.none(); }
+
+  // Iterators for target-dependent attributes.
+  typedef std::pair<std::string, std::string>                td_type;
+  typedef std::map<std::string, std::string>::iterator       td_iterator;
+  typedef std::map<std::string, std::string>::const_iterator td_const_iterator;
+
+  td_iterator td_begin()             { return TargetDepAttrs.begin(); }
+  td_iterator td_end()               { return TargetDepAttrs.end(); }
+
+  td_const_iterator td_begin() const { return TargetDepAttrs.begin(); }
+  td_const_iterator td_end() const   { return TargetDepAttrs.end(); }
+
+  bool td_empty() const              { return TargetDepAttrs.empty(); }
+
+  bool operator==(const AttrBuilder &B);
+  bool operator!=(const AttrBuilder &B) {
+    return !(*this == B);
+  }
+
+  // FIXME: Remove this in 4.0.
+
+  /// \brief Add the raw value to the internal representation.
+  AttrBuilder &addRawValue(uint64_t Val);
+};
+
+namespace AttributeFuncs {
+
+/// \brief Which attributes cannot be applied to a type.
+AttributeSet typeIncompatible(Type *Ty, uint64_t Index);
+
+} // end AttributeFuncs namespace
+
+} // end llvm namespace
+
+#endif

thirdparty/clang/include/llvm/IR/BasicBlock.h

@@ -0,0 +1,303 @@
+//===-- llvm/BasicBlock.h - Represent a basic block in the VM ---*- C++ -*-===//
+//
+//                     The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure
+//
+// This file is distributed under the University of Illinois Open Source
+// License. See LICENSE.TXT for details.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+//
+// This file contains the declaration of the BasicBlock class.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+
+#ifndef LLVM_IR_BASICBLOCK_H
+#define LLVM_IR_BASICBLOCK_H
+
+#include "llvm/ADT/Twine.h"
+#include "llvm/ADT/ilist.h"
+#include "llvm/IR/Instruction.h"
+#include "llvm/IR/SymbolTableListTraits.h"
+#include "llvm/Support/DataTypes.h"
+
+namespace llvm {
+
+class LandingPadInst;
+class TerminatorInst;
+class LLVMContext;
+class BlockAddress;
+
+template<> struct ilist_traits<Instruction>
+  : public SymbolTableListTraits<Instruction, BasicBlock> {
+
+  /// \brief Return a node that marks the end of a list.
+  ///
+  /// The sentinel is relative to this instance, so we use a non-static
+  /// method.
+  Instruction *createSentinel() const {
+    // Since i(p)lists always publicly derive from their corresponding traits,
+    // placing a data member in this class will augment the i(p)list.  But since
+    // the NodeTy is expected to be publicly derive from ilist_node<NodeTy>,
+    // there is a legal viable downcast from it to NodeTy. We use this trick to
+    // superimpose an i(p)list with a "ghostly" NodeTy, which becomes the
+    // sentinel. Dereferencing the sentinel is forbidden (save the
+    // ilist_node<NodeTy>), so no one will ever notice the superposition.
+    return static_cast<Instruction*>(&Sentinel);
+  }
+  static void destroySentinel(Instruction*) {}
+
+  Instruction *provideInitialHead() const { return createSentinel(); }
+  Instruction *ensureHead(Instruction*) const { return createSentinel(); }
+  static void noteHead(Instruction*, Instruction*) {}
+private:
+  mutable ilist_half_node<Instruction> Sentinel;
+};
+
+/// \brief LLVM Basic Block Representation
+///
+/// This represents a single basic block in LLVM. A basic block is simply a
+/// container of instructions that execute sequentially. Basic blocks are Values
+/// because they are referenced by instructions such as branches and switch
+/// tables. The type of a BasicBlock is "Type::LabelTy" because the basic block
+/// represents a label to which a branch can jump.
+///
+/// A well formed basic block is formed of a list of non-terminating
+/// instructions followed by a single TerminatorInst instruction.
+/// TerminatorInst's may not occur in the middle of basic blocks, and must
+/// terminate the blocks. The BasicBlock class allows malformed basic blocks to
+/// occur because it may be useful in the intermediate stage of constructing or
+/// modifying a program. However, the verifier will ensure that basic blocks
+/// are "well formed".
+class BasicBlock : public Value, // Basic blocks are data objects also
+                   public ilist_node<BasicBlock> {
+  friend class BlockAddress;
+public:
+  typedef iplist<Instruction> InstListType;
+private:
+  InstListType InstList;
+  Function *Parent;
+
+  void setParent(Function *parent);
+  friend class SymbolTableListTraits<BasicBlock, Function>;
+
+  BasicBlock(const BasicBlock &) LLVM_DELETED_FUNCTION;
+  void operator=(const BasicBlock &) LLVM_DELETED_FUNCTION;
+
+  /// \brief Constructor.
+  ///
+  /// If the function parameter is specified, the basic block is automatically
+  /// inserted at either the end of the function (if InsertBefore is null), or
+  /// before the specified basic block.
+  explicit BasicBlock(LLVMContext &C, const Twine &Name = "",
+                      Function *Parent = 0, BasicBlock *InsertBefore = 0);
+public:
+  /// \brief Get the context in which this basic block lives.
+  LLVMContext &getContext() const;
+
+  /// Instruction iterators...
+  typedef InstListType::iterator iterator;
+  typedef InstListType::const_iterator const_iterator;
+  typedef InstListType::reverse_iterator reverse_iterator;
+  typedef InstListType::const_reverse_iterator const_reverse_iterator;
+
+  /// \brief Creates a new BasicBlock.
+  ///
+  /// If the Parent parameter is specified, the basic block is automatically
+  /// inserted at either the end of the function (if InsertBefore is 0), or
+  /// before the specified basic block.
+  static BasicBlock *Create(LLVMContext &Context, const Twine &Name = "",
+                            Function *Parent = 0,BasicBlock *InsertBefore = 0) {
+    return new BasicBlock(Context, Name, Parent, InsertBefore);
+  }
+  ~BasicBlock();
+
+  /// \brief Return the enclosing method, or null if none.
+  const Function *getParent() const { return Parent; }
+        Function *getParent()       { return Parent; }
+
+  /// \brief Returns the terminator instruction if the block is well formed or
+  /// null if the block is not well formed.
+  TerminatorInst *getTerminator();
+  const TerminatorInst *getTerminator() const;
+
+  /// \brief Returns a pointer to the first instruction in this block that is
+  /// not a PHINode instruction.
+  ///
+  /// When adding instructions to the beginning of the basic block, they should
+  /// be added before the returned value, not before the first instruction,
+  /// which might be PHI. Returns 0 is there's no non-PHI instruction.
+  Instruction* getFirstNonPHI();
+  const Instruction* getFirstNonPHI() const {
+    return const_cast<BasicBlock*>(this)->getFirstNonPHI();
+  }
+
+  /// \brief Returns a pointer to the first instruction in this block that is not
+  /// a PHINode or a debug intrinsic.
+  Instruction* getFirstNonPHIOrDbg();
+  const Instruction* getFirstNonPHIOrDbg() const {
+    return const_cast<BasicBlock*>(this)->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg();
+  }
+
+  /// \brief Returns a pointer to the first instruction in this block that is not
+  /// a PHINode, a debug intrinsic, or a lifetime intrinsic.
+  Instruction* getFirstNonPHIOrDbgOrLifetime();
+  const Instruction* getFirstNonPHIOrDbgOrLifetime() const {
+    return const_cast<BasicBlock*>(this)->getFirstNonPHIOrDbgOrLifetime();
+  }
+
+  /// \brief Returns an iterator to the first instruction in this block that is
+  /// suitable for inserting a non-PHI instruction.
+  ///
+  /// In particular, it skips all PHIs and LandingPad instructions.
+  iterator getFirstInsertionPt();
+  const_iterator getFirstInsertionPt() const {
+    return const_cast<BasicBlock*>(this)->getFirstInsertionPt();
+  }
+
+  /// \brief Unlink 'this' from the containing function, but do not delete it.
+  void removeFromParent();
+
+  /// \brief Unlink 'this' from the containing function and delete it.
+  void eraseFromParent();
+
+  /// \brief Unlink this basic block from its current function and insert it
+  /// into the function that \p MovePos lives in, right before \p MovePos.
+  void moveBefore(BasicBlock *MovePos);
+
+  /// \brief Unlink this basic block from its current function and insert it
+  /// right after \p MovePos in the function \p MovePos lives in.
+  void moveAfter(BasicBlock *MovePos);
+
+
+  /// \brief Return this block if it has a single predecessor block. Otherwise
+  /// return a null pointer.
+  BasicBlock *getSinglePredecessor();
+  const BasicBlock *getSinglePredecessor() const {
+    return const_cast<BasicBlock*>(this)->getSinglePredecessor();
+  }
+
+  /// \brief Return this block if it has a unique predecessor block. Otherwise return a null pointer.
+  ///
+  /// Note that unique predecessor doesn't mean single edge, there can be
+  /// multiple edges from the unique predecessor to this block (for example a
+  /// switch statement with multiple cases having the same destination).
+  BasicBlock *getUniquePredecessor();
+  const BasicBlock *getUniquePredecessor() const {
+    return const_cast<BasicBlock*>(this)->getUniquePredecessor();
+  }
+
+  //===--------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+  /// Instruction iterator methods
+  ///
+  inline iterator                begin()       { return InstList.begin(); }
+  inline const_iterator          begin() const { return InstList.begin(); }
+  inline iterator                end  ()       { return InstList.end();   }
+  inline const_iterator          end  () const { return InstList.end();   }
+
+  inline reverse_iterator        rbegin()       { return InstList.rbegin(); }
+  inline const_reverse_iterator  rbegin() const { return InstList.rbegin(); }
+  inline reverse_iterator        rend  ()       { return InstList.rend();   }
+  inline const_reverse_iterator  rend  () const { return InstList.rend();   }
+
+  inline size_t                   size() const { return InstList.size();  }
+  inline bool                    empty() const { return InstList.empty(); }
+  inline const Instruction      &front() const { return InstList.front(); }
+  inline       Instruction      &front()       { return InstList.front(); }
+  inline const Instruction       &back() const { return InstList.back();  }
+  inline       Instruction       &back()       { return InstList.back();  }
+
+  /// \brief Return the underlying instruction list container.
+  ///
+  /// Currently you need to access the underlying instruction list container
+  /// directly if you want to modify it.
+  const InstListType &getInstList() const { return InstList; }
+        InstListType &getInstList()       { return InstList; }
+
+  /// \brief Returns a pointer to a member of the instruction list.
+  static iplist<Instruction> BasicBlock::*getSublistAccess(Instruction*) {
+    return &BasicBlock::InstList;
+  }
+
+  /// \brief Returns a pointer to the symbol table if one exists.
+  ValueSymbolTable *getValueSymbolTable();
+
+  /// \brief Methods for support type inquiry through isa, cast, and dyn_cast.
+  static inline bool classof(const Value *V) {
+    return V->getValueID() == Value::BasicBlockVal;
+  }
+
+  /// \brief Cause all subinstructions to "let go" of all the references that
+  /// said subinstructions are maintaining.
+  ///
+  /// This allows one to 'delete' a whole class at a time, even though there may
+  /// be circular references... first all references are dropped, and all use
+  /// counts go to zero.  Then everything is delete'd for real.  Note that no
+  /// operations are valid on an object that has "dropped all references",
+  /// except operator delete.
+  void dropAllReferences();
+
+  /// \brief Notify the BasicBlock that the predecessor \p Pred is no longer
+  /// able to reach it.
+  ///
+  /// This is actually not used to update the Predecessor list, but is actually
+  /// used to update the PHI nodes that reside in the block.  Note that this
+  /// should be called while the predecessor still refers to this block.
+  void removePredecessor(BasicBlock *Pred, bool DontDeleteUselessPHIs = false);
+
+  /// \brief Split the basic block into two basic blocks at the specified
+  /// instruction.
+  ///
+  /// Note that all instructions BEFORE the specified iterator stay as part of
+  /// the original basic block, an unconditional branch is added to the original
+  /// BB, and the rest of the instructions in the BB are moved to the new BB,
+  /// including the old terminator.  The newly formed BasicBlock is returned.
+  /// This function invalidates the specified iterator.
+  ///
+  /// Note that this only works on well formed basic blocks (must have a
+  /// terminator), and 'I' must not be the end of instruction list (which would
+  /// cause a degenerate basic block to be formed, having a terminator inside of
+  /// the basic block).
+  ///
+  /// Also note that this doesn't preserve any passes. To split blocks while
+  /// keeping loop information consistent, use the SplitBlock utility function.
+  BasicBlock *splitBasicBlock(iterator I, const Twine &BBName = "");
+
+  /// \brief Returns true if there are any uses of this basic block other than
+  /// direct branches, switches, etc. to it.
+  bool hasAddressTaken() const { return getSubclassDataFromValue() != 0; }
+
+  /// \brief Update all phi nodes in this basic block's successors to refer to
+  /// basic block \p New instead of to it.
+  void replaceSuccessorsPhiUsesWith(BasicBlock *New);
+
+  /// \brief Return true if this basic block is a landing pad.
+  ///
+  /// Being a ``landing pad'' means that the basic block is the destination of
+  /// the 'unwind' edge of an invoke instruction.
+  bool isLandingPad() const;
+
+  /// \brief Return the landingpad instruction associated with the landing pad.
+  LandingPadInst *getLandingPadInst();
+  const LandingPadInst *getLandingPadInst() const;
+
+private:
+  /// \brief Increment the internal refcount of the number of BlockAddresses
+  /// referencing this BasicBlock by \p Amt.
+  ///
+  /// This is almost always 0, sometimes one possibly, but almost never 2, and
+  /// inconceivably 3 or more.
+  void AdjustBlockAddressRefCount(int Amt) {
+    setValueSubclassData(getSubclassDataFromValue()+Amt);
+    assert((int)(signed char)getSubclassDataFromValue() >= 0 &&
+           "Refcount wrap-around");
+  }
+  /// \brief Shadow Value::setValueSubclassData with a private forwarding method
+  /// so that any future subclasses cannot accidentally use it.
+  void setValueSubclassData(unsigned short D) {
+    Value::setValueSubclassData(D);
+  }
+};
+
+} // End llvm namespace
+
+#endif

thirdparty/clang/include/llvm/IR/CallingConv.h

@@ -0,0 +1,129 @@
+//===-- llvm/CallingConv.h - LLVM Calling Conventions -----------*- C++ -*-===//
+//
+//                     The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure
+//
+// This file is distributed under the University of Illinois Open Source
+// License. See LICENSE.TXT for details.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+//
+// This file defines LLVM's set of calling conventions.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+
+#ifndef LLVM_IR_CALLINGCONV_H
+#define LLVM_IR_CALLINGCONV_H
+
+namespace llvm {
+
+/// CallingConv Namespace - This namespace contains an enum with a value for
+/// the well-known calling conventions.
+///
+namespace CallingConv {
+  /// A set of enums which specify the assigned numeric values for known llvm
+  /// calling conventions.
+  /// @brief LLVM Calling Convention Representation
+  enum ID {
+    /// C - The default llvm calling convention, compatible with C.  This
+    /// convention is the only calling convention that supports varargs calls.
+    /// As with typical C calling conventions, the callee/caller have to
+    /// tolerate certain amounts of prototype mismatch.
+    C = 0,
+
+    // Generic LLVM calling conventions.  None of these calling conventions
+    // support varargs calls, and all assume that the caller and callee
+    // prototype exactly match.
+
+    /// Fast - This calling convention attempts to make calls as fast as
+    /// possible (e.g. by passing things in registers).
+    Fast = 8,
+
+    // Cold - This calling convention attempts to make code in the caller as
+    // efficient as possible under the assumption that the call is not commonly
+    // executed.  As such, these calls often preserve all registers so that the
+    // call does not break any live ranges in the caller side.
+    Cold = 9,
+
+    // GHC - Calling convention used by the Glasgow Haskell Compiler (GHC).
+    GHC = 10,
+
+    // HiPE - Calling convention used by the High-Performance Erlang Compiler
+    // (HiPE).
+    HiPE = 11,
+
+    // Target - This is the start of the target-specific calling conventions,
+    // e.g. fastcall and thiscall on X86.
+    FirstTargetCC = 64,
+
+    /// X86_StdCall - stdcall is the calling conventions mostly used by the
+    /// Win32 API. It is basically the same as the C convention with the
+    /// difference in that the callee is responsible for popping the arguments
+    /// from the stack.
+    X86_StdCall = 64,
+
+    /// X86_FastCall - 'fast' analog of X86_StdCall. Passes first two arguments
+    /// in ECX:EDX registers, others - via stack. Callee is responsible for
+    /// stack cleaning.
+    X86_FastCall = 65,
+
+    /// ARM_APCS - ARM Procedure Calling Standard calling convention (obsolete,
+    /// but still used on some targets).
+    ARM_APCS = 66,
+
+    /// ARM_AAPCS - ARM Architecture Procedure Calling Standard calling
+    /// convention (aka EABI). Soft float variant.
+    ARM_AAPCS = 67,
+
+    /// ARM_AAPCS_VFP - Same as ARM_AAPCS, but uses hard floating point ABI.
+    ARM_AAPCS_VFP = 68,
+
+    /// MSP430_INTR - Calling convention used for MSP430 interrupt routines.
+    MSP430_INTR = 69,
+
+    /// X86_ThisCall - Similar to X86_StdCall. Passes first argument in ECX,
+    /// others via stack. Callee is responsible for stack cleaning. MSVC uses
+    /// this by default for methods in its ABI.
+    X86_ThisCall = 70,
+
+    /// PTX_Kernel - Call to a PTX kernel.
+    /// Passes all arguments in parameter space.
+    PTX_Kernel = 71,
+
+    /// PTX_Device - Call to a PTX device function.
+    /// Passes all arguments in register or parameter space.
+    PTX_Device = 72,
+
+    /// MBLAZE_INTR - Calling convention used for MBlaze interrupt routines.
+    MBLAZE_INTR = 73,
+
+    /// MBLAZE_INTR - Calling convention used for MBlaze interrupt support
+    /// routines (i.e. GCC's save_volatiles attribute).
+    MBLAZE_SVOL = 74,
+
+    /// SPIR_FUNC - Calling convention for SPIR non-kernel device functions.
+    /// No lowering or expansion of arguments.
+    /// Structures are passed as a pointer to a struct with the byval attribute.
+    /// Functions can only call SPIR_FUNC and SPIR_KERNEL functions.
+    /// Functions can only have zero or one return values.
+    /// Variable arguments are not allowed, except for printf.
+    /// How arguments/return values are lowered are not specified.
+    /// Functions are only visible to the devices.
+    SPIR_FUNC = 75,
+
+    /// SPIR_KERNEL - Calling convention for SPIR kernel functions.
+    /// Inherits the restrictions of SPIR_FUNC, except
+    /// Cannot have non-void return values.
+    /// Cannot have variable arguments.
+    /// Can also be called by the host.
+    /// Is externally visible.
+    SPIR_KERNEL = 76,
+
+    /// Intel_OCL_BI - Calling conventions for Intel OpenCL built-ins
+    Intel_OCL_BI = 77
+
+  };
+} // End CallingConv namespace
+
+} // End llvm namespace
+
+#endif

thirdparty/clang/include/llvm/IR/Constant.h

@@ -0,0 +1,170 @@
+//===-- llvm/Constant.h - Constant class definition -------------*- C++ -*-===//
+//
+//                     The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure
+//
+// This file is distributed under the University of Illinois Open Source
+// License. See LICENSE.TXT for details.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+//
+// This file contains the declaration of the Constant class.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+
+#ifndef LLVM_IR_CONSTANT_H
+#define LLVM_IR_CONSTANT_H
+
+#include "llvm/IR/User.h"
+
+namespace llvm {
+  class APInt;
+
+  template<typename T> class SmallVectorImpl;
+
+/// This is an important base class in LLVM. It provides the common facilities
+/// of all constant values in an LLVM program. A constant is a value that is
+/// immutable at runtime. Functions are constants because their address is
+/// immutable. Same with global variables. 
+/// 
+/// All constants share the capabilities provided in this class. All constants
+/// can have a null value. They can have an operand list. Constants can be
+/// simple (integer and floating point values), complex (arrays and structures),
+/// or expression based (computations yielding a constant value composed of 
+/// only certain operators and other constant values).
+/// 
+/// Note that Constants are immutable (once created they never change) 
+/// and are fully shared by structural equivalence.  This means that two 
+/// structurally equivalent constants will always have the same address.  
+/// Constants are created on demand as needed and never deleted: thus clients 
+/// don't have to worry about the lifetime of the objects.
+/// @brief LLVM Constant Representation
+class Constant : public User {
+  void operator=(const Constant &) LLVM_DELETED_FUNCTION;
+  Constant(const Constant &) LLVM_DELETED_FUNCTION;
+  virtual void anchor();
+  
+protected:
+  Constant(Type *ty, ValueTy vty, Use *Ops, unsigned NumOps)
+    : User(ty, vty, Ops, NumOps) {}
+
+  void destroyConstantImpl();
+public:
+  /// isNullValue - Return true if this is the value that would be returned by
+  /// getNullValue.
+  bool isNullValue() const;
+
+  /// isAllOnesValue - Return true if this is the value that would be returned by
+  /// getAllOnesValue.
+  bool isAllOnesValue() const;
+
+  /// isNegativeZeroValue - Return true if the value is what would be returned 
+  /// by getZeroValueForNegation.
+  bool isNegativeZeroValue() const;
+
+  /// Return true if the value is negative zero or null value.
+  bool isZeroValue() const;
+
+  /// canTrap - Return true if evaluation of this constant could trap.  This is
+  /// true for things like constant expressions that could divide by zero.
+  bool canTrap() const;
+
+  /// isThreadDependent - Return true if the value can vary between threads.
+  bool isThreadDependent() const;
+
+  /// isConstantUsed - Return true if the constant has users other than constant
+  /// exprs and other dangling things.
+  bool isConstantUsed() const;
+  
+  enum PossibleRelocationsTy {
+    NoRelocation = 0,
+    LocalRelocation = 1,
+    GlobalRelocations = 2
+  };
+  
+  /// getRelocationInfo - This method classifies the entry according to
+  /// whether or not it may generate a relocation entry.  This must be
+  /// conservative, so if it might codegen to a relocatable entry, it should say
+  /// so.  The return values are:
+  /// 
+  ///  NoRelocation: This constant pool entry is guaranteed to never have a
+  ///     relocation applied to it (because it holds a simple constant like
+  ///     '4').
+  ///  LocalRelocation: This entry has relocations, but the entries are
+  ///     guaranteed to be resolvable by the static linker, so the dynamic
+  ///     linker will never see them.
+  ///  GlobalRelocations: This entry may have arbitrary relocations.
+  ///
+  /// FIXME: This really should not be in VMCore.
+  PossibleRelocationsTy getRelocationInfo() const;
+  
+  /// getAggregateElement - For aggregates (struct/array/vector) return the
+  /// constant that corresponds to the specified element if possible, or null if
+  /// not.  This can return null if the element index is a ConstantExpr, or if
+  /// 'this' is a constant expr.
+  Constant *getAggregateElement(unsigned Elt) const;
+  Constant *getAggregateElement(Constant *Elt) const;
+
+  /// getSplatValue - If this is a splat vector constant, meaning that all of
+  /// the elements have the same value, return that value. Otherwise return 0.
+  Constant *getSplatValue() const;
+
+  /// If C is a constant integer then return its value, otherwise C must be a
+  /// vector of constant integers, all equal, and the common value is returned.
+  const APInt &getUniqueInteger() const;
+
+  /// destroyConstant - Called if some element of this constant is no longer
+  /// valid.  At this point only other constants may be on the use_list for this
+  /// constant.  Any constants on our Use list must also be destroy'd.  The
+  /// implementation must be sure to remove the constant from the list of
+  /// available cached constants.  Implementations should call
+  /// destroyConstantImpl as the last thing they do, to destroy all users and
+  /// delete this.
+  virtual void destroyConstant() { llvm_unreachable("Not reached!"); }
+
+  //// Methods for support type inquiry through isa, cast, and dyn_cast:
+  static inline bool classof(const Value *V) {
+    return V->getValueID() >= ConstantFirstVal &&
+           V->getValueID() <= ConstantLastVal;
+  }
+
+  /// replaceUsesOfWithOnConstant - This method is a special form of
+  /// User::replaceUsesOfWith (which does not work on constants) that does work
+  /// on constants.  Basically this method goes through the trouble of building
+  /// a new constant that is equivalent to the current one, with all uses of
+  /// From replaced with uses of To.  After this construction is completed, all
+  /// of the users of 'this' are replaced to use the new constant, and then
+  /// 'this' is deleted.  In general, you should not call this method, instead,
+  /// use Value::replaceAllUsesWith, which automatically dispatches to this
+  /// method as needed.
+  ///
+  virtual void replaceUsesOfWithOnConstant(Value *, Value *, Use *) {
+    // Provide a default implementation for constants (like integers) that
+    // cannot use any other values.  This cannot be called at runtime, but needs
+    // to be here to avoid link errors.
+    assert(getNumOperands() == 0 && "replaceUsesOfWithOnConstant must be "
+           "implemented for all constants that have operands!");
+    llvm_unreachable("Constants that do not have operands cannot be using "
+                     "'From'!");
+  }
+
+  static Constant *getNullValue(Type* Ty);
+
+  /// @returns the value for an integer or vector of integer constant of the
+  /// given type that has all its bits set to true.
+  /// @brief Get the all ones value
+  static Constant *getAllOnesValue(Type* Ty);
+
+  /// getIntegerValue - Return the value for an integer or pointer constant,
+  /// or a vector thereof, with the given scalar value.
+  static Constant *getIntegerValue(Type* Ty, const APInt &V);
+  
+  /// removeDeadConstantUsers - If there are any dead constant users dangling
+  /// off of this constant, remove them.  This method is useful for clients
+  /// that want to check to see if a global is unused, but don't want to deal
+  /// with potentially dead constants hanging off of the globals.
+  void removeDeadConstantUsers() const;
+};
+
+} // End llvm namespace
+
+#endif

thirdparty/clang/include/llvm/IR/DataLayout.h

@@ -0,0 +1,477 @@
+//===--------- llvm/DataLayout.h - Data size & alignment info ---*- C++ -*-===//
+//
+//                     The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure
+//
+// This file is distributed under the University of Illinois Open Source
+// License. See LICENSE.TXT for details.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+//
+// This file defines layout properties related to datatype size/offset/alignment
+// information.  It uses lazy annotations to cache information about how
+// structure types are laid out and used.
+//
+// This structure should be created once, filled in if the defaults are not
+// correct and then passed around by const&.  None of the members functions
+// require modification to the object.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+
+#ifndef LLVM_IR_DATALAYOUT_H
+#define LLVM_IR_DATALAYOUT_H
+
+#include "llvm/ADT/DenseMap.h"
+#include "llvm/ADT/SmallVector.h"
+#include "llvm/IR/DerivedTypes.h"
+#include "llvm/IR/Type.h"
+#include "llvm/Pass.h"
+#include "llvm/Support/DataTypes.h"
+
+namespace llvm {
+
+class Value;
+class Type;
+class IntegerType;
+class StructType;
+class StructLayout;
+class GlobalVariable;
+class LLVMContext;
+template<typename T>
+class ArrayRef;
+
+/// Enum used to categorize the alignment types stored by LayoutAlignElem
+enum AlignTypeEnum {
+  INVALID_ALIGN = 0,                 ///< An invalid alignment
+  INTEGER_ALIGN = 'i',               ///< Integer type alignment
+  VECTOR_ALIGN = 'v',                ///< Vector type alignment
+  FLOAT_ALIGN = 'f',                 ///< Floating point type alignment
+  AGGREGATE_ALIGN = 'a',             ///< Aggregate alignment
+  STACK_ALIGN = 's'                  ///< Stack objects alignment
+};
+
+/// Layout alignment element.
+///
+/// Stores the alignment data associated with a given alignment type (integer,
+/// vector, float) and type bit width.
+///
+/// @note The unusual order of elements in the structure attempts to reduce
+/// padding and make the structure slightly more cache friendly.
+struct LayoutAlignElem {
+  unsigned AlignType    : 8;  ///< Alignment type (AlignTypeEnum)
+  unsigned TypeBitWidth : 24; ///< Type bit width
+  unsigned ABIAlign     : 16; ///< ABI alignment for this type/bitw
+  unsigned PrefAlign    : 16; ///< Pref. alignment for this type/bitw
+
+  /// Initializer
+  static LayoutAlignElem get(AlignTypeEnum align_type, unsigned abi_align,
+                             unsigned pref_align, uint32_t bit_width);
+  /// Equality predicate
+  bool operator==(const LayoutAlignElem &rhs) const;
+};
+
+/// Layout pointer alignment element.
+///
+/// Stores the alignment data associated with a given pointer and address space.
+///
+/// @note The unusual order of elements in the structure attempts to reduce
+/// padding and make the structure slightly more cache friendly.
+struct PointerAlignElem {
+  unsigned            ABIAlign;       ///< ABI alignment for this type/bitw
+  unsigned            PrefAlign;      ///< Pref. alignment for this type/bitw
+  uint32_t            TypeBitWidth;   ///< Type bit width
+  uint32_t            AddressSpace;   ///< Address space for the pointer type
+
+  /// Initializer
+  static PointerAlignElem get(uint32_t addr_space, unsigned abi_align,
+                             unsigned pref_align, uint32_t bit_width);
+  /// Equality predicate
+  bool operator==(const PointerAlignElem &rhs) const;
+};
+
+
+/// DataLayout - This class holds a parsed version of the target data layout
+/// string in a module and provides methods for querying it.  The target data
+/// layout string is specified *by the target* - a frontend generating LLVM IR
+/// is required to generate the right target data for the target being codegen'd
+/// to.  If some measure of portability is desired, an empty string may be
+/// specified in the module.
+class DataLayout : public ImmutablePass {
+private:
+  bool          LittleEndian;          ///< Defaults to false
+  unsigned      StackNaturalAlign;     ///< Stack natural alignment
+
+  SmallVector<unsigned char, 8> LegalIntWidths; ///< Legal Integers.
+
+  /// Alignments - Where the primitive type alignment data is stored.
+  ///
+  /// @sa init().
+  /// @note Could support multiple size pointer alignments, e.g., 32-bit
+  /// pointers vs. 64-bit pointers by extending LayoutAlignment, but for now,
+  /// we don't.
+  SmallVector<LayoutAlignElem, 16> Alignments;
+  DenseMap<unsigned, PointerAlignElem> Pointers;
+
+  /// InvalidAlignmentElem - This member is a signal that a requested alignment
+  /// type and bit width were not found in the SmallVector.
+  static const LayoutAlignElem InvalidAlignmentElem;
+
+  /// InvalidPointerElem - This member is a signal that a requested pointer
+  /// type and bit width were not found in the DenseSet.
+  static const PointerAlignElem InvalidPointerElem;
+
+  // The StructType -> StructLayout map.
+  mutable void *LayoutMap;
+
+  //! Set/initialize target alignments
+  void setAlignment(AlignTypeEnum align_type, unsigned abi_align,
+                    unsigned pref_align, uint32_t bit_width);
+  unsigned getAlignmentInfo(AlignTypeEnum align_type, uint32_t bit_width,
+                            bool ABIAlign, Type *Ty) const;
+
+  //! Set/initialize pointer alignments
+  void setPointerAlignment(uint32_t addr_space, unsigned abi_align,
+      unsigned pref_align, uint32_t bit_width);
+
+  //! Internal helper method that returns requested alignment for type.
+  unsigned getAlignment(Type *Ty, bool abi_or_pref) const;
+
+  /// Valid alignment predicate.
+  ///
+  /// Predicate that tests a LayoutAlignElem reference returned by get() against
+  /// InvalidAlignmentElem.
+  bool validAlignment(const LayoutAlignElem &align) const {
+    return &align != &InvalidAlignmentElem;
+  }
+
+  /// Valid pointer predicate.
+  ///
+  /// Predicate that tests a PointerAlignElem reference returned by get() against
+  /// InvalidPointerElem.
+  bool validPointer(const PointerAlignElem &align) const {
+    return &align != &InvalidPointerElem;
+  }
+
+  /// Parses a target data specification string. Assert if the string is
+  /// malformed.
+  void parseSpecifier(StringRef LayoutDescription);
+
+public:
+  /// Default ctor.
+  ///
+  /// @note This has to exist, because this is a pass, but it should never be
+  /// used.
+  DataLayout();
+
+  /// Constructs a DataLayout from a specification string. See init().
+  explicit DataLayout(StringRef LayoutDescription)
+    : ImmutablePass(ID) {
+    init(LayoutDescription);
+  }
+
+  /// Initialize target data from properties stored in the module.
+  explicit DataLayout(const Module *M);
+
+  DataLayout(const DataLayout &DL) :
+    ImmutablePass(ID),
+    LittleEndian(DL.isLittleEndian()),
+    StackNaturalAlign(DL.StackNaturalAlign),
+    LegalIntWidths(DL.LegalIntWidths),
+    Alignments(DL.Alignments),
+    Pointers(DL.Pointers),
+    LayoutMap(0)
+  { }
+
+  ~DataLayout();  // Not virtual, do not subclass this class
+
+  /// DataLayout is an immutable pass, but holds state.  This allows the pass
+  /// manager to clear its mutable state.
+  bool doFinalization(Module &M);
+
+  /// Parse a data layout string (with fallback to default values). Ensure that
+  /// the data layout pass is registered.
+  void init(StringRef LayoutDescription);
+
+  /// Layout endianness...
+  bool isLittleEndian() const { return LittleEndian; }
+  bool isBigEndian() const { return !LittleEndian; }
+
+  /// getStringRepresentation - Return the string representation of the
+  /// DataLayout.  This representation is in the same format accepted by the
+  /// string constructor above.
+  std::string getStringRepresentation() const;
+
+  /// isLegalInteger - This function returns true if the specified type is
+  /// known to be a native integer type supported by the CPU.  For example,
+  /// i64 is not native on most 32-bit CPUs and i37 is not native on any known
+  /// one.  This returns false if the integer width is not legal.
+  ///
+  /// The width is specified in bits.
+  ///
+  bool isLegalInteger(unsigned Width) const {
+    for (unsigned i = 0, e = (unsigned)LegalIntWidths.size(); i != e; ++i)
+      if (LegalIntWidths[i] == Width)
+        return true;
+    return false;
+  }
+
+  bool isIllegalInteger(unsigned Width) const {
+    return !isLegalInteger(Width);
+  }
+
+  /// Returns true if the given alignment exceeds the natural stack alignment.
+  bool exceedsNaturalStackAlignment(unsigned Align) const {
+    return (StackNaturalAlign != 0) && (Align > StackNaturalAlign);
+  }
+
+  /// fitsInLegalInteger - This function returns true if the specified type fits
+  /// in a native integer type supported by the CPU.  For example, if the CPU
+  /// only supports i32 as a native integer type, then i27 fits in a legal
+  // integer type but i45 does not.
+  bool fitsInLegalInteger(unsigned Width) const {
+    for (unsigned i = 0, e = (unsigned)LegalIntWidths.size(); i != e; ++i)
+      if (Width <= LegalIntWidths[i])
+        return true;
+    return false;
+  }
+
+  /// Layout pointer alignment
+  /// FIXME: The defaults need to be removed once all of
+  /// the backends/clients are updated.
+  unsigned getPointerABIAlignment(unsigned AS = 0)  const {
+    DenseMap<unsigned, PointerAlignElem>::const_iterator val = Pointers.find(AS);
+    if (val == Pointers.end()) {
+      val = Pointers.find(0);
+    }
+    return val->second.ABIAlign;
+  }
+  /// Return target's alignment for stack-based pointers
+  /// FIXME: The defaults need to be removed once all of
+  /// the backends/clients are updated.
+  unsigned getPointerPrefAlignment(unsigned AS = 0) const {
+    DenseMap<unsigned, PointerAlignElem>::const_iterator val = Pointers.find(AS);
+    if (val == Pointers.end()) {
+      val = Pointers.find(0);
+    }
+    return val->second.PrefAlign;
+  }
+  /// Layout pointer size
+  /// FIXME: The defaults need to be removed once all of
+  /// the backends/clients are updated.
+  unsigned getPointerSize(unsigned AS = 0)          const {
+    DenseMap<unsigned, PointerAlignElem>::const_iterator val = Pointers.find(AS);
+    if (val == Pointers.end()) {
+      val = Pointers.find(0);
+    }
+    return val->second.TypeBitWidth;
+  }
+  /// Layout pointer size, in bits
+  /// FIXME: The defaults need to be removed once all of
+  /// the backends/clients are updated.
+  unsigned getPointerSizeInBits(unsigned AS = 0)    const {
+    return getPointerSize(AS) * 8;
+  }
+  /// Size examples:
+  ///
+  /// Type        SizeInBits  StoreSizeInBits  AllocSizeInBits[*]
+  /// ----        ----------  ---------------  ---------------
+  ///  i1            1           8                8
+  ///  i8            8           8                8
+  ///  i19          19          24               32
+  ///  i32          32          32               32
+  ///  i100        100         104              128
+  ///  i128        128         128              128
+  ///  Float        32          32               32
+  ///  Double       64          64               64
+  ///  X86_FP80     80          80               96
+  ///
+  /// [*] The alloc size depends on the alignment, and thus on the target.
+  ///     These values are for x86-32 linux.
+
+  /// getTypeSizeInBits - Return the number of bits necessary to hold the
+  /// specified type.  For example, returns 36 for i36 and 80 for x86_fp80.
+  /// The type passed must have a size (Type::isSized() must return true).
+  uint64_t getTypeSizeInBits(Type *Ty) const;
+
+  /// getTypeStoreSize - Return the maximum number of bytes that may be
+  /// overwritten by storing the specified type.  For example, returns 5
+  /// for i36 and 10 for x86_fp80.
+  uint64_t getTypeStoreSize(Type *Ty) const {
+    return (getTypeSizeInBits(Ty)+7)/8;
+  }
+
+  /// getTypeStoreSizeInBits - Return the maximum number of bits that may be
+  /// overwritten by storing the specified type; always a multiple of 8.  For
+  /// example, returns 40 for i36 and 80 for x86_fp80.
+  uint64_t getTypeStoreSizeInBits(Type *Ty) const {
+    return 8*getTypeStoreSize(Ty);
+  }
+
+  /// getTypeAllocSize - Return the offset in bytes between successive objects
+  /// of the specified type, including alignment padding.  This is the amount
+  /// that alloca reserves for this type.  For example, returns 12 or 16 for
+  /// x86_fp80, depending on alignment.
+  uint64_t getTypeAllocSize(Type *Ty) const {
+    // Round up to the next alignment boundary.
+    return RoundUpAlignment(getTypeStoreSize(Ty), getABITypeAlignment(Ty));
+  }
+
+  /// getTypeAllocSizeInBits - Return the offset in bits between successive
+  /// objects of the specified type, including alignment padding; always a
+  /// multiple of 8.  This is the amount that alloca reserves for this type.
+  /// For example, returns 96 or 128 for x86_fp80, depending on alignment.
+  uint64_t getTypeAllocSizeInBits(Type *Ty) const {
+    return 8*getTypeAllocSize(Ty);
+  }
+
+  /// getABITypeAlignment - Return the minimum ABI-required alignment for the
+  /// specified type.
+  unsigned getABITypeAlignment(Type *Ty) const;
+
+  /// getABIIntegerTypeAlignment - Return the minimum ABI-required alignment for
+  /// an integer type of the specified bitwidth.
+  unsigned getABIIntegerTypeAlignment(unsigned BitWidth) const;
+
+  /// getCallFrameTypeAlignment - Return the minimum ABI-required alignment
+  /// for the specified type when it is part of a call frame.
+  unsigned getCallFrameTypeAlignment(Type *Ty) const;
+
+  /// getPrefTypeAlignment - Return the preferred stack/global alignment for
+  /// the specified type.  This is always at least as good as the ABI alignment.
+  unsigned getPrefTypeAlignment(Type *Ty) const;
+
+  /// getPreferredTypeAlignmentShift - Return the preferred alignment for the
+  /// specified type, returned as log2 of the value (a shift amount).
+  unsigned getPreferredTypeAlignmentShift(Type *Ty) const;
+
+  /// getIntPtrType - Return an integer type with size at least as big as that
+  /// of a pointer in the given address space.
+  IntegerType *getIntPtrType(LLVMContext &C, unsigned AddressSpace = 0) const;
+
+  /// getIntPtrType - Return an integer (vector of integer) type with size at
+  /// least as big as that of a pointer of the given pointer (vector of pointer)
+  /// type.
+  Type *getIntPtrType(Type *) const;
+
+  /// getSmallestLegalIntType - Return the smallest integer type with size at
+  /// least as big as Width bits.
+  Type *getSmallestLegalIntType(LLVMContext &C, unsigned Width = 0) const;
+
+  /// getIndexedOffset - return the offset from the beginning of the type for
+  /// the specified indices.  This is used to implement getelementptr.
+  uint64_t getIndexedOffset(Type *Ty, ArrayRef<Value *> Indices) const;
+
+  /// getStructLayout - Return a StructLayout object, indicating the alignment
+  /// of the struct, its size, and the offsets of its fields.  Note that this
+  /// information is lazily cached.
+  const StructLayout *getStructLayout(StructType *Ty) const;
+
+  /// getPreferredAlignment - Return the preferred alignment of the specified
+  /// global.  This includes an explicitly requested alignment (if the global
+  /// has one).
+  unsigned getPreferredAlignment(const GlobalVariable *GV) const;
+
+  /// getPreferredAlignmentLog - Return the preferred alignment of the
+  /// specified global, returned in log form.  This includes an explicitly
+  /// requested alignment (if the global has one).
+  unsigned getPreferredAlignmentLog(const GlobalVariable *GV) const;
+
+  /// RoundUpAlignment - Round the specified value up to the next alignment
+  /// boundary specified by Alignment.  For example, 7 rounded up to an
+  /// alignment boundary of 4 is 8.  8 rounded up to the alignment boundary of 4
+  /// is 8 because it is already aligned.
+  template <typename UIntTy>
+  static UIntTy RoundUpAlignment(UIntTy Val, unsigned Alignment) {
+    assert((Alignment & (Alignment-1)) == 0 && "Alignment must be power of 2!");
+    return (Val + (Alignment-1)) & ~UIntTy(Alignment-1);
+  }
+
+  static char ID; // Pass identification, replacement for typeid
+};
+
+/// StructLayout - used to lazily calculate structure layout information for a
+/// target machine, based on the DataLayout structure.
+///
+class StructLayout {
+  uint64_t StructSize;
+  unsigned StructAlignment;
+  unsigned NumElements;
+  uint64_t MemberOffsets[1];  // variable sized array!
+public:
+
+  uint64_t getSizeInBytes() const {
+    return StructSize;
+  }
+
+  uint64_t getSizeInBits() const {
+    return 8*StructSize;
+  }
+
+  unsigned getAlignment() const {
+    return StructAlignment;
+  }
+
+  /// getElementContainingOffset - Given a valid byte offset into the structure,
+  /// return the structure index that contains it.
+  ///
+  unsigned getElementContainingOffset(uint64_t Offset) const;
+
+  uint64_t getElementOffset(unsigned Idx) const {
+    assert(Idx < NumElements && "Invalid element idx!");
+    return MemberOffsets[Idx];
+  }
+
+  uint64_t getElementOffsetInBits(unsigned Idx) const {
+    return getElementOffset(Idx)*8;
+  }
+
+private:
+  friend class DataLayout;   // Only DataLayout can create this class
+  StructLayout(StructType *ST, const DataLayout &DL);
+};
+
+
+// The implementation of this method is provided inline as it is particularly
+// well suited to constant folding when called on a specific Type subclass.
+inline uint64_t DataLayout::getTypeSizeInBits(Type *Ty) const {
+  assert(Ty->isSized() && "Cannot getTypeInfo() on a type that is unsized!");
+  switch (Ty->getTypeID()) {
+  case Type::LabelTyID:
+    return getPointerSizeInBits(0);
+  case Type::PointerTyID:
+    return getPointerSizeInBits(cast<PointerType>(Ty)->getAddressSpace());
+  case Type::ArrayTyID: {
+    ArrayType *ATy = cast<ArrayType>(Ty);
+    return ATy->getNumElements() *
+           getTypeAllocSizeInBits(ATy->getElementType());
+  }
+  case Type::StructTyID:
+    // Get the layout annotation... which is lazily created on demand.
+    return getStructLayout(cast<StructType>(Ty))->getSizeInBits();
+  case Type::IntegerTyID:
+    return cast<IntegerType>(Ty)->getBitWidth();
+  case Type::HalfTyID:
+    return 16;
+  case Type::FloatTyID:
+    return 32;
+  case Type::DoubleTyID:
+  case Type::X86_MMXTyID:
+    return 64;
+  case Type::PPC_FP128TyID:
+  case Type::FP128TyID:
+    return 128;
+    // In memory objects this is always aligned to a higher boundary, but
+  // only 80 bits contain information.
+  case Type::X86_FP80TyID:
+    return 80;
+  case Type::VectorTyID: {
+    VectorType *VTy = cast<VectorType>(Ty);
+    return VTy->getNumElements() * getTypeSizeInBits(VTy->getElementType());
+  }
+  default:
+    llvm_unreachable("DataLayout::getTypeSizeInBits(): Unsupported type");
+  }
+}
+
+} // End llvm namespace
+
+#endif

thirdparty/clang/include/llvm/IR/DerivedTypes.h

@@ -0,0 +1,455 @@
+//===-- llvm/DerivedTypes.h - Classes for handling data types ---*- C++ -*-===//
+//
+//                     The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure
+//
+// This file is distributed under the University of Illinois Open Source
+// License. See LICENSE.TXT for details.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+//
+// This file contains the declarations of classes that represent "derived
+// types".  These are things like "arrays of x" or "structure of x, y, z" or
+// "function returning x taking (y,z) as parameters", etc...
+//
+// The implementations of these classes live in the Type.cpp file.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+
+#ifndef LLVM_IR_DERIVEDTYPES_H
+#define LLVM_IR_DERIVEDTYPES_H
+
+#include "llvm/IR/Type.h"
+#include "llvm/Support/Compiler.h"
+#include "llvm/Support/DataTypes.h"
+
+namespace llvm {
+
+class Value;
+class APInt;
+class LLVMContext;
+template<typename T> class ArrayRef;
+class StringRef;
+
+/// Class to represent integer types. Note that this class is also used to
+/// represent the built-in integer types: Int1Ty, Int8Ty, Int16Ty, Int32Ty and
+/// Int64Ty.
+/// @brief Integer representation type
+class IntegerType : public Type {
+  friend class LLVMContextImpl;
+  
+protected:
+  explicit IntegerType(LLVMContext &C, unsigned NumBits) : Type(C, IntegerTyID){
+    setSubclassData(NumBits);
+  }
+public:
+  /// This enum is just used to hold constants we need for IntegerType.
+  enum {
+    MIN_INT_BITS = 1,        ///< Minimum number of bits that can be specified
+    MAX_INT_BITS = (1<<23)-1 ///< Maximum number of bits that can be specified
+      ///< Note that bit width is stored in the Type classes SubclassData field
+      ///< which has 23 bits. This yields a maximum bit width of 8,388,607 bits.
+  };
+
+  /// This static method is the primary way of constructing an IntegerType.
+  /// If an IntegerType with the same NumBits value was previously instantiated,
+  /// that instance will be returned. Otherwise a new one will be created. Only
+  /// one instance with a given NumBits value is ever created.
+  /// @brief Get or create an IntegerType instance.
+  static IntegerType *get(LLVMContext &C, unsigned NumBits);
+
+  /// @brief Get the number of bits in this IntegerType
+  unsigned getBitWidth() const { return getSubclassData(); }
+
+  /// getBitMask - Return a bitmask with ones set for all of the bits
+  /// that can be set by an unsigned version of this type.  This is 0xFF for
+  /// i8, 0xFFFF for i16, etc.
+  uint64_t getBitMask() const {
+    return ~uint64_t(0UL) >> (64-getBitWidth());
+  }
+
+  /// getSignBit - Return a uint64_t with just the most significant bit set (the
+  /// sign bit, if the value is treated as a signed number).
+  uint64_t getSignBit() const {
+    return 1ULL << (getBitWidth()-1);
+  }
+
+  /// For example, this is 0xFF for an 8 bit integer, 0xFFFF for i16, etc.
+  /// @returns a bit mask with ones set for all the bits of this type.
+  /// @brief Get a bit mask for this type.
+  APInt getMask() const;
+
+  /// This method determines if the width of this IntegerType is a power-of-2
+  /// in terms of 8 bit bytes.
+  /// @returns true if this is a power-of-2 byte width.
+  /// @brief Is this a power-of-2 byte-width IntegerType ?
+  bool isPowerOf2ByteWidth() const;
+
+  /// Methods for support type inquiry through isa, cast, and dyn_cast.
+  static inline bool classof(const Type *T) {
+    return T->getTypeID() == IntegerTyID;
+  }
+};
+
+
+/// FunctionType - Class to represent function types
+///
+class FunctionType : public Type {
+  FunctionType(const FunctionType &) LLVM_DELETED_FUNCTION;
+  const FunctionType &operator=(const FunctionType &) LLVM_DELETED_FUNCTION;
+  FunctionType(Type *Result, ArrayRef<Type*> Params, bool IsVarArgs);
+
+public:
+  /// FunctionType::get - This static method is the primary way of constructing
+  /// a FunctionType.
+  ///
+  static FunctionType *get(Type *Result,
+                           ArrayRef<Type*> Params, bool isVarArg);
+
+  /// FunctionType::get - Create a FunctionType taking no parameters.
+  ///
+  static FunctionType *get(Type *Result, bool isVarArg);
+  
+  /// isValidReturnType - Return true if the specified type is valid as a return
+  /// type.
+  static bool isValidReturnType(Type *RetTy);
+
+  /// isValidArgumentType - Return true if the specified type is valid as an
+  /// argument type.
+  static bool isValidArgumentType(Type *ArgTy);
+
+  bool isVarArg() const { return getSubclassData(); }
+  Type *getReturnType() const { return ContainedTys[0]; }
+
+  typedef Type::subtype_iterator param_iterator;
+  param_iterator param_begin() const { return ContainedTys + 1; }
+  param_iterator param_end() const { return &ContainedTys[NumContainedTys]; }
+
+  /// Parameter type accessors.
+  Type *getParamType(unsigned i) const { return ContainedTys[i+1]; }
+
+  /// getNumParams - Return the number of fixed parameters this function type
+  /// requires.  This does not consider varargs.
+  ///
+  unsigned getNumParams() const { return NumContainedTys - 1; }
+
+  /// Methods for support type inquiry through isa, cast, and dyn_cast.
+  static inline bool classof(const Type *T) {
+    return T->getTypeID() == FunctionTyID;
+  }
+};
+
+
+/// CompositeType - Common super class of ArrayType, StructType, PointerType
+/// and VectorType.
+class CompositeType : public Type {
+protected:
+  explicit CompositeType(LLVMContext &C, TypeID tid) : Type(C, tid) { }
+public:
+
+  /// getTypeAtIndex - Given an index value into the type, return the type of
+  /// the element.
+  ///
+  Type *getTypeAtIndex(const Value *V);
+  Type *getTypeAtIndex(unsigned Idx);
+  bool indexValid(const Value *V) const;
+  bool indexValid(unsigned Idx) const;
+
+  /// Methods for support type inquiry through isa, cast, and dyn_cast.
+  static inline bool classof(const Type *T) {
+    return T->getTypeID() == ArrayTyID ||
+           T->getTypeID() == StructTyID ||
+           T->getTypeID() == PointerTyID ||
+           T->getTypeID() == VectorTyID;
+  }
+};
+
+
+/// StructType - Class to represent struct types.  There are two different kinds
+/// of struct types: Literal structs and Identified structs.
+///
+/// Literal struct types (e.g. { i32, i32 }) are uniqued structurally, and must
+/// always have a body when created.  You can get one of these by using one of
+/// the StructType::get() forms.
+///  
+/// Identified structs (e.g. %foo or %42) may optionally have a name and are not
+/// uniqued.  The names for identified structs are managed at the LLVMContext
+/// level, so there can only be a single identified struct with a given name in
+/// a particular LLVMContext.  Identified structs may also optionally be opaque
+/// (have no body specified).  You get one of these by using one of the
+/// StructType::create() forms.
+///
+/// Independent of what kind of struct you have, the body of a struct type are
+/// laid out in memory consequtively with the elements directly one after the
+/// other (if the struct is packed) or (if not packed) with padding between the
+/// elements as defined by DataLayout (which is required to match what the code
+/// generator for a target expects).
+///
+class StructType : public CompositeType {
+  StructType(const StructType &) LLVM_DELETED_FUNCTION;
+  const StructType &operator=(const StructType &) LLVM_DELETED_FUNCTION;
+  StructType(LLVMContext &C)
+    : CompositeType(C, StructTyID), SymbolTableEntry(0) {}
+  enum {
+    /// This is the contents of the SubClassData field.
+    SCDB_HasBody = 1,
+    SCDB_Packed = 2,
+    SCDB_IsLiteral = 4,
+    SCDB_IsSized = 8
+  };
+
+  /// SymbolTableEntry - For a named struct that actually has a name, this is a
+  /// pointer to the symbol table entry (maintained by LLVMContext) for the
+  /// struct.  This is null if the type is an literal struct or if it is
+  /// a identified type that has an empty name.
+  /// 
+  void *SymbolTableEntry;
+public:
+  ~StructType() {
+    delete [] ContainedTys; // Delete the body.
+  }
+
+  /// StructType::create - This creates an identified struct.
+  static StructType *create(LLVMContext &Context, StringRef Name);
+  static StructType *create(LLVMContext &Context);
+  
+  static StructType *create(ArrayRef<Type*> Elements,
+                            StringRef Name,
+                            bool isPacked = false);
+  static StructType *create(ArrayRef<Type*> Elements);
+  static StructType *create(LLVMContext &Context,
+                            ArrayRef<Type*> Elements,
+                            StringRef Name,
+                            bool isPacked = false);
+  static StructType *create(LLVMContext &Context, ArrayRef<Type*> Elements);
+  static StructType *create(StringRef Name, Type *elt1, ...) END_WITH_NULL;
+
+  /// StructType::get - This static method is the primary way to create a
+  /// literal StructType.
+  static StructType *get(LLVMContext &Context, ArrayRef<Type*> Elements,
+                         bool isPacked = false);
+
+  /// StructType::get - Create an empty structure type.
+  ///
+  static StructType *get(LLVMContext &Context, bool isPacked = false);
+  
+  /// StructType::get - This static method is a convenience method for creating
+  /// structure types by specifying the elements as arguments.  Note that this
+  /// method always returns a non-packed struct, and requires at least one
+  /// element type.
+  static StructType *get(Type *elt1, ...) END_WITH_NULL;
+
+  bool isPacked() const { return (getSubclassData() & SCDB_Packed) != 0; }
+  
+  /// isLiteral - Return true if this type is uniqued by structural
+  /// equivalence, false if it is a struct definition.
+  bool isLiteral() const { return (getSubclassData() & SCDB_IsLiteral) != 0; }
+  
+  /// isOpaque - Return true if this is a type with an identity that has no body
+  /// specified yet.  These prints as 'opaque' in .ll files.
+  bool isOpaque() const { return (getSubclassData() & SCDB_HasBody) == 0; }
+
+  /// isSized - Return true if this is a sized type.
+  bool isSized() const;
+  
+  /// hasName - Return true if this is a named struct that has a non-empty name.
+  bool hasName() const { return SymbolTableEntry != 0; }
+  
+  /// getName - Return the name for this struct type if it has an identity.
+  /// This may return an empty string for an unnamed struct type.  Do not call
+  /// this on an literal type.
+  StringRef getName() const;
+  
+  /// setName - Change the name of this type to the specified name, or to a name
+  /// with a suffix if there is a collision.  Do not call this on an literal
+  /// type.
+  void setName(StringRef Name);
+
+  /// setBody - Specify a body for an opaque identified type.
+  void setBody(ArrayRef<Type*> Elements, bool isPacked = false);
+  void setBody(Type *elt1, ...) END_WITH_NULL;
+  
+  /// isValidElementType - Return true if the specified type is valid as a
+  /// element type.
+  static bool isValidElementType(Type *ElemTy);
+  
+
+  // Iterator access to the elements.
+  typedef Type::subtype_iterator element_iterator;
+  element_iterator element_begin() const { return ContainedTys; }
+  element_iterator element_end() const { return &ContainedTys[NumContainedTys];}
+
+  /// isLayoutIdentical - Return true if this is layout identical to the
+  /// specified struct.
+  bool isLayoutIdentical(StructType *Other) const;  
+  
+  /// Random access to the elements
+  unsigned getNumElements() const { return NumContainedTys; }
+  Type *getElementType(unsigned N) const {
+    assert(N < NumContainedTys && "Element number out of range!");
+    return ContainedTys[N];
+  }
+
+  /// Methods for support type inquiry through isa, cast, and dyn_cast.
+  static inline bool classof(const Type *T) {
+    return T->getTypeID() == StructTyID;
+  }
+};
+
+/// SequentialType - This is the superclass of the array, pointer and vector
+/// type classes.  All of these represent "arrays" in memory.  The array type
+/// represents a specifically sized array, pointer types are unsized/unknown
+/// size arrays, vector types represent specifically sized arrays that
+/// allow for use of SIMD instructions.  SequentialType holds the common
+/// features of all, which stem from the fact that all three lay their
+/// components out in memory identically.
+///
+class SequentialType : public CompositeType {
+  Type *ContainedType;               ///< Storage for the single contained type.
+  SequentialType(const SequentialType &) LLVM_DELETED_FUNCTION;
+  const SequentialType &operator=(const SequentialType &) LLVM_DELETED_FUNCTION;
+
+protected:
+  SequentialType(TypeID TID, Type *ElType)
+    : CompositeType(ElType->getContext(), TID), ContainedType(ElType) {
+    ContainedTys = &ContainedType;
+    NumContainedTys = 1;
+  }
+
+public:
+  Type *getElementType() const { return ContainedTys[0]; }
+
+  /// Methods for support type inquiry through isa, cast, and dyn_cast.
+  static inline bool classof(const Type *T) {
+    return T->getTypeID() == ArrayTyID ||
+           T->getTypeID() == PointerTyID ||
+           T->getTypeID() == VectorTyID;
+  }
+};
+
+
+/// ArrayType - Class to represent array types.
+///
+class ArrayType : public SequentialType {
+  uint64_t NumElements;
+
+  ArrayType(const ArrayType &) LLVM_DELETED_FUNCTION;
+  const ArrayType &operator=(const ArrayType &) LLVM_DELETED_FUNCTION;
+  ArrayType(Type *ElType, uint64_t NumEl);
+public:
+  /// ArrayType::get - This static method is the primary way to construct an
+  /// ArrayType
+  ///
+  static ArrayType *get(Type *ElementType, uint64_t NumElements);
+
+  /// isValidElementType - Return true if the specified type is valid as a
+  /// element type.
+  static bool isValidElementType(Type *ElemTy);
+
+  uint64_t getNumElements() const { return NumElements; }
+
+  /// Methods for support type inquiry through isa, cast, and dyn_cast.
+  static inline bool classof(const Type *T) {
+    return T->getTypeID() == ArrayTyID;
+  }
+};
+
+/// VectorType - Class to represent vector types.
+///
+class VectorType : public SequentialType {
+  unsigned NumElements;
+
+  VectorType(const VectorType &) LLVM_DELETED_FUNCTION;
+  const VectorType &operator=(const VectorType &) LLVM_DELETED_FUNCTION;
+  VectorType(Type *ElType, unsigned NumEl);
+public:
+  /// VectorType::get - This static method is the primary way to construct an
+  /// VectorType.
+  ///
+  static VectorType *get(Type *ElementType, unsigned NumElements);
+
+  /// VectorType::getInteger - This static method gets a VectorType with the
+  /// same number of elements as the input type, and the element type is an
+  /// integer type of the same width as the input element type.
+  ///
+  static VectorType *getInteger(VectorType *VTy) {
+    unsigned EltBits = VTy->getElementType()->getPrimitiveSizeInBits();
+    assert(EltBits && "Element size must be of a non-zero size");
+    Type *EltTy = IntegerType::get(VTy->getContext(), EltBits);
+    return VectorType::get(EltTy, VTy->getNumElements());
+  }
+
+  /// VectorType::getExtendedElementVectorType - This static method is like
+  /// getInteger except that the element types are twice as wide as the
+  /// elements in the input type.
+  ///
+  static VectorType *getExtendedElementVectorType(VectorType *VTy) {
+    unsigned EltBits = VTy->getElementType()->getPrimitiveSizeInBits();
+    Type *EltTy = IntegerType::get(VTy->getContext(), EltBits * 2);
+    return VectorType::get(EltTy, VTy->getNumElements());
+  }
+
+  /// VectorType::getTruncatedElementVectorType - This static method is like
+  /// getInteger except that the element types are half as wide as the
+  /// elements in the input type.
+  ///
+  static VectorType *getTruncatedElementVectorType(VectorType *VTy) {
+    unsigned EltBits = VTy->getElementType()->getPrimitiveSizeInBits();
+    assert((EltBits & 1) == 0 &&
+           "Cannot truncate vector element with odd bit-width");
+    Type *EltTy = IntegerType::get(VTy->getContext(), EltBits / 2);
+    return VectorType::get(EltTy, VTy->getNumElements());
+  }
+
+  /// isValidElementType - Return true if the specified type is valid as a
+  /// element type.
+  static bool isValidElementType(Type *ElemTy);
+
+  /// @brief Return the number of elements in the Vector type.
+  unsigned getNumElements() const { return NumElements; }
+
+  /// @brief Return the number of bits in the Vector type.
+  /// Returns zero when the vector is a vector of pointers.
+  unsigned getBitWidth() const {
+    return NumElements * getElementType()->getPrimitiveSizeInBits();
+  }
+
+  /// Methods for support type inquiry through isa, cast, and dyn_cast.
+  static inline bool classof(const Type *T) {
+    return T->getTypeID() == VectorTyID;
+  }
+};
+
+
+/// PointerType - Class to represent pointers.
+///
+class PointerType : public SequentialType {
+  PointerType(const PointerType &) LLVM_DELETED_FUNCTION;
+  const PointerType &operator=(const PointerType &) LLVM_DELETED_FUNCTION;
+  explicit PointerType(Type *ElType, unsigned AddrSpace);
+public:
+  /// PointerType::get - This constructs a pointer to an object of the specified
+  /// type in a numbered address space.
+  static PointerType *get(Type *ElementType, unsigned AddressSpace);
+
+  /// PointerType::getUnqual - This constructs a pointer to an object of the
+  /// specified type in the generic address space (address space zero).
+  static PointerType *getUnqual(Type *ElementType) {
+    return PointerType::get(ElementType, 0);
+  }
+
+  /// isValidElementType - Return true if the specified type is valid as a
+  /// element type.
+  static bool isValidElementType(Type *ElemTy);
+
+  /// @brief Return the address space of the Pointer type.
+  inline unsigned getAddressSpace() const { return getSubclassData(); }
+
+  /// Implement support type inquiry through isa, cast, and dyn_cast.
+  static inline bool classof(const Type *T) {
+    return T->getTypeID() == PointerTyID;
+  }
+};
+
+} // End llvm namespace
+
+#endif

thirdparty/clang/include/llvm/IR/Function.h

@@ -0,0 +1,470 @@
+//===-- llvm/Function.h - Class to represent a single function --*- C++ -*-===//
+//
+//                     The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure
+//
+// This file is distributed under the University of Illinois Open Source
+// License. See LICENSE.TXT for details.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+//
+// This file contains the declaration of the Function class, which represents a
+// single function/procedure in LLVM.
+//
+// A function basically consists of a list of basic blocks, a list of arguments,
+// and a symbol table.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+
+#ifndef LLVM_IR_FUNCTION_H
+#define LLVM_IR_FUNCTION_H
+
+#include "llvm/IR/Argument.h"
+#include "llvm/IR/Attributes.h"
+#include "llvm/IR/BasicBlock.h"
+#include "llvm/IR/CallingConv.h"
+#include "llvm/IR/GlobalValue.h"
+#include "llvm/Support/Compiler.h"
+
+namespace llvm {
+
+class FunctionType;
+class LLVMContext;
+
+// Traits for intrusive list of basic blocks...
+template<> struct ilist_traits<BasicBlock>
+  : public SymbolTableListTraits<BasicBlock, Function> {
+
+  // createSentinel is used to get hold of the node that marks the end of the
+  // list... (same trick used here as in ilist_traits<Instruction>)
+  BasicBlock *createSentinel() const {
+    return static_cast<BasicBlock*>(&Sentinel);
+  }
+  static void destroySentinel(BasicBlock*) {}
+
+  BasicBlock *provideInitialHead() const { return createSentinel(); }
+  BasicBlock *ensureHead(BasicBlock*) const { return createSentinel(); }
+  static void noteHead(BasicBlock*, BasicBlock*) {}
+
+  static ValueSymbolTable *getSymTab(Function *ItemParent);
+private:
+  mutable ilist_half_node<BasicBlock> Sentinel;
+};
+
+template<> struct ilist_traits<Argument>
+  : public SymbolTableListTraits<Argument, Function> {
+
+  Argument *createSentinel() const {
+    return static_cast<Argument*>(&Sentinel);
+  }
+  static void destroySentinel(Argument*) {}
+
+  Argument *provideInitialHead() const { return createSentinel(); }
+  Argument *ensureHead(Argument*) const { return createSentinel(); }
+  static void noteHead(Argument*, Argument*) {}
+
+  static ValueSymbolTable *getSymTab(Function *ItemParent);
+private:
+  mutable ilist_half_node<Argument> Sentinel;
+};
+
+class Function : public GlobalValue,
+                 public ilist_node<Function> {
+public:
+  typedef iplist<Argument> ArgumentListType;
+  typedef iplist<BasicBlock> BasicBlockListType;
+
+  // BasicBlock iterators...
+  typedef BasicBlockListType::iterator iterator;
+  typedef BasicBlockListType::const_iterator const_iterator;
+
+  typedef ArgumentListType::iterator arg_iterator;
+  typedef ArgumentListType::const_iterator const_arg_iterator;
+
+private:
+  // Important things that make up a function!
+  BasicBlockListType  BasicBlocks;        ///< The basic blocks
+  mutable ArgumentListType ArgumentList;  ///< The formal arguments
+  ValueSymbolTable *SymTab;               ///< Symbol table of args/instructions
+  AttributeSet AttributeSets;             ///< Parameter attributes
+
+  // HasLazyArguments is stored in Value::SubclassData.
+  /*bool HasLazyArguments;*/
+
+  // The Calling Convention is stored in Value::SubclassData.
+  /*CallingConv::ID CallingConvention;*/
+
+  friend class SymbolTableListTraits<Function, Module>;
+
+  void setParent(Module *parent);
+
+  /// hasLazyArguments/CheckLazyArguments - The argument list of a function is
+  /// built on demand, so that the list isn't allocated until the first client
+  /// needs it.  The hasLazyArguments predicate returns true if the arg list
+  /// hasn't been set up yet.
+  bool hasLazyArguments() const {
+    return getSubclassDataFromValue() & 1;
+  }
+  void CheckLazyArguments() const {
+    if (hasLazyArguments())
+      BuildLazyArguments();
+  }
+  void BuildLazyArguments() const;
+
+  Function(const Function&) LLVM_DELETED_FUNCTION;
+  void operator=(const Function&) LLVM_DELETED_FUNCTION;
+
+  /// Do the actual lookup of an intrinsic ID when the query could not be
+  /// answered from the cache.
+  unsigned lookupIntrinsicID() const LLVM_READONLY;
+
+  /// Function ctor - If the (optional) Module argument is specified, the
+  /// function is automatically inserted into the end of the function list for
+  /// the module.
+  ///
+  Function(FunctionType *Ty, LinkageTypes Linkage,
+           const Twine &N = "", Module *M = 0);
+
+public:
+  static Function *Create(FunctionType *Ty, LinkageTypes Linkage,
+                          const Twine &N = "", Module *M = 0) {
+    return new(0) Function(Ty, Linkage, N, M);
+  }
+
+  ~Function();
+
+  Type *getReturnType() const;           // Return the type of the ret val
+  FunctionType *getFunctionType() const; // Return the FunctionType for me
+
+  /// getContext - Return a pointer to the LLVMContext associated with this
+  /// function, or NULL if this function is not bound to a context yet.
+  LLVMContext &getContext() const;
+
+  /// isVarArg - Return true if this function takes a variable number of
+  /// arguments.
+  bool isVarArg() const;
+
+  /// getIntrinsicID - This method returns the ID number of the specified
+  /// function, or Intrinsic::not_intrinsic if the function is not an
+  /// intrinsic, or if the pointer is null.  This value is always defined to be
+  /// zero to allow easy checking for whether a function is intrinsic or not.
+  /// The particular intrinsic functions which correspond to this value are
+  /// defined in llvm/Intrinsics.h.  Results are cached in the LLVM context,
+  /// subsequent requests for the same ID return results much faster from the
+  /// cache.
+  ///
+  unsigned getIntrinsicID() const LLVM_READONLY;
+  bool isIntrinsic() const { return getName().startswith("llvm."); }
+
+  /// getCallingConv()/setCallingConv(CC) - These method get and set the
+  /// calling convention of this function.  The enum values for the known
+  /// calling conventions are defined in CallingConv.h.
+  CallingConv::ID getCallingConv() const {
+    return static_cast<CallingConv::ID>(getSubclassDataFromValue() >> 1);
+  }
+  void setCallingConv(CallingConv::ID CC) {
+    setValueSubclassData((getSubclassDataFromValue() & 1) |
+                         (static_cast<unsigned>(CC) << 1));
+  }
+
+  /// getAttributes - Return the attribute list for this Function.
+  ///
+  AttributeSet getAttributes() const { return AttributeSets; }
+
+  /// setAttributes - Set the attribute list for this Function.
+  ///
+  void setAttributes(AttributeSet attrs) { AttributeSets = attrs; }
+
+  /// addFnAttr - Add function attributes to this function.
+  ///
+  void addFnAttr(Attribute::AttrKind N) {
+    setAttributes(AttributeSets.addAttribute(getContext(),
+                                             AttributeSet::FunctionIndex, N));
+  }
+
+  /// addFnAttr - Add function attributes to this function.
+  ///
+  void addFnAttr(StringRef Kind) {
+    setAttributes(
+      AttributeSets.addAttribute(getContext(),
+                                 AttributeSet::FunctionIndex, Kind));
+  }
+
+  /// \brief Return true if the function has the attribute.
+  bool hasFnAttribute(Attribute::AttrKind Kind) const {
+    return AttributeSets.hasAttribute(AttributeSet::FunctionIndex, Kind);
+  }
+  bool hasFnAttribute(StringRef Kind) const {
+    return AttributeSets.hasAttribute(AttributeSet::FunctionIndex, Kind);
+  }
+
+  /// hasGC/getGC/setGC/clearGC - The name of the garbage collection algorithm
+  ///                             to use during code generation.
+  bool hasGC() const;
+  const char *getGC() const;
+  void setGC(const char *Str);
+  void clearGC();
+
+  /// @brief adds the attribute to the list of attributes.
+  void addAttribute(unsigned i, Attribute::AttrKind attr);
+
+  /// @brief adds the attributes to the list of attributes.
+  void addAttributes(unsigned i, AttributeSet attrs);
+
+  /// @brief removes the attributes from the list of attributes.
+  void removeAttributes(unsigned i, AttributeSet attr);
+
+  /// @brief Extract the alignment for a call or parameter (0=unknown).
+  unsigned getParamAlignment(unsigned i) const {
+    return AttributeSets.getParamAlignment(i);
+  }
+
+  /// @brief Determine if the function does not access memory.
+  bool doesNotAccessMemory() const {
+    return AttributeSets.hasAttribute(AttributeSet::FunctionIndex,
+                                      Attribute::ReadNone);
+  }
+  void setDoesNotAccessMemory() {
+    addFnAttr(Attribute::ReadNone);
+  }
+
+  /// @brief Determine if the function does not access or only reads memory.
+  bool onlyReadsMemory() const {
+    return doesNotAccessMemory() ||
+      AttributeSets.hasAttribute(AttributeSet::FunctionIndex,
+                                 Attribute::ReadOnly);
+  }
+  void setOnlyReadsMemory() {
+    addFnAttr(Attribute::ReadOnly);
+  }
+
+  /// @brief Determine if the function cannot return.
+  bool doesNotReturn() const {
+    return AttributeSets.hasAttribute(AttributeSet::FunctionIndex,
+                                      Attribute::NoReturn);
+  }
+  void setDoesNotReturn() {
+    addFnAttr(Attribute::NoReturn);
+  }
+
+  /// @brief Determine if the function cannot unwind.
+  bool doesNotThrow() const {
+    return AttributeSets.hasAttribute(AttributeSet::FunctionIndex,
+                                      Attribute::NoUnwind);
+  }
+  void setDoesNotThrow() {
+    addFnAttr(Attribute::NoUnwind);
+  }
+
+  /// @brief Determine if the call cannot be duplicated.
+  bool cannotDuplicate() const {
+    return AttributeSets.hasAttribute(AttributeSet::FunctionIndex,
+                                      Attribute::NoDuplicate);
+  }
+  void setCannotDuplicate() {
+    addFnAttr(Attribute::NoDuplicate);
+  }
+
+  /// @brief True if the ABI mandates (or the user requested) that this
+  /// function be in a unwind table.
+  bool hasUWTable() const {
+    return AttributeSets.hasAttribute(AttributeSet::FunctionIndex,
+                                      Attribute::UWTable);
+  }
+  void setHasUWTable() {
+    addFnAttr(Attribute::UWTable);
+  }
+
+  /// @brief True if this function needs an unwind table.
+  bool needsUnwindTableEntry() const {
+    return hasUWTable() || !doesNotThrow();
+  }
+
+  /// @brief Determine if the function returns a structure through first
+  /// pointer argument.
+  bool hasStructRetAttr() const {
+    return AttributeSets.hasAttribute(1, Attribute::StructRet);
+  }
+
+  /// @brief Determine if the parameter does not alias other parameters.
+  /// @param n The parameter to check. 1 is the first parameter, 0 is the return
+  bool doesNotAlias(unsigned n) const {
+    return AttributeSets.hasAttribute(n, Attribute::NoAlias);
+  }
+  void setDoesNotAlias(unsigned n) {
+    addAttribute(n, Attribute::NoAlias);
+  }
+
+  /// @brief Determine if the parameter can be captured.
+  /// @param n The parameter to check. 1 is the first parameter, 0 is the return
+  bool doesNotCapture(unsigned n) const {
+    return AttributeSets.hasAttribute(n, Attribute::NoCapture);
+  }
+  void setDoesNotCapture(unsigned n) {
+    addAttribute(n, Attribute::NoCapture);
+  }
+
+  /// copyAttributesFrom - copy all additional attributes (those not needed to
+  /// create a Function) from the Function Src to this one.
+  void copyAttributesFrom(const GlobalValue *Src);
+
+  /// deleteBody - This method deletes the body of the function, and converts
+  /// the linkage to external.
+  ///
+  void deleteBody() {
+    dropAllReferences();
+    setLinkage(ExternalLinkage);
+  }
+
+  /// removeFromParent - This method unlinks 'this' from the containing module,
+  /// but does not delete it.
+  ///
+  virtual void removeFromParent();
+
+  /// eraseFromParent - This method unlinks 'this' from the containing module
+  /// and deletes it.
+  ///
+  virtual void eraseFromParent();
+
+
+  /// Get the underlying elements of the Function... the basic block list is
+  /// empty for external functions.
+  ///
+  const ArgumentListType &getArgumentList() const {
+    CheckLazyArguments();
+    return ArgumentList;
+  }
+  ArgumentListType &getArgumentList() {
+    CheckLazyArguments();
+    return ArgumentList;
+  }
+  static iplist<Argument> Function::*getSublistAccess(Argument*) {
+    return &Function::ArgumentList;
+  }
+
+  const BasicBlockListType &getBasicBlockList() const { return BasicBlocks; }
+        BasicBlockListType &getBasicBlockList()       { return BasicBlocks; }
+  static iplist<BasicBlock> Function::*getSublistAccess(BasicBlock*) {
+    return &Function::BasicBlocks;
+  }
+
+  const BasicBlock       &getEntryBlock() const   { return front(); }
+        BasicBlock       &getEntryBlock()         { return front(); }
+
+  //===--------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+  // Symbol Table Accessing functions...
+
+  /// getSymbolTable() - Return the symbol table...
+  ///
+  inline       ValueSymbolTable &getValueSymbolTable()       { return *SymTab; }
+  inline const ValueSymbolTable &getValueSymbolTable() const { return *SymTab; }
+
+
+  //===--------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+  // BasicBlock iterator forwarding functions
+  //
+  iterator                begin()       { return BasicBlocks.begin(); }
+  const_iterator          begin() const { return BasicBlocks.begin(); }
+  iterator                end  ()       { return BasicBlocks.end();   }
+  const_iterator          end  () const { return BasicBlocks.end();   }
+
+  size_t                   size() const { return BasicBlocks.size();  }
+  bool                    empty() const { return BasicBlocks.empty(); }
+  const BasicBlock       &front() const { return BasicBlocks.front(); }
+        BasicBlock       &front()       { return BasicBlocks.front(); }
+  const BasicBlock        &back() const { return BasicBlocks.back();  }
+        BasicBlock        &back()       { return BasicBlocks.back();  }
+
+  //===--------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+  // Argument iterator forwarding functions
+  //
+  arg_iterator arg_begin() {
+    CheckLazyArguments();
+    return ArgumentList.begin();
+  }
+  const_arg_iterator arg_begin() const {
+    CheckLazyArguments();
+    return ArgumentList.begin();
+  }
+  arg_iterator arg_end() {
+    CheckLazyArguments();
+    return ArgumentList.end();
+  }
+  const_arg_iterator arg_end() const {
+    CheckLazyArguments();
+    return ArgumentList.end();
+  }
+
+  size_t arg_size() const;
+  bool arg_empty() const;
+
+  /// viewCFG - This function is meant for use from the debugger.  You can just
+  /// say 'call F->viewCFG()' and a ghostview window should pop up from the
+  /// program, displaying the CFG of the current function with the code for each
+  /// basic block inside.  This depends on there being a 'dot' and 'gv' program
+  /// in your path.
+  ///
+  void viewCFG() const;
+
+  /// viewCFGOnly - This function is meant for use from the debugger.  It works
+  /// just like viewCFG, but it does not include the contents of basic blocks
+  /// into the nodes, just the label.  If you are only interested in the CFG
+  /// this can make the graph smaller.
+  ///
+  void viewCFGOnly() const;
+
+  /// Methods for support type inquiry through isa, cast, and dyn_cast:
+  static inline bool classof(const Value *V) {
+    return V->getValueID() == Value::FunctionVal;
+  }
+
+  /// dropAllReferences() - This method causes all the subinstructions to "let
+  /// go" of all references that they are maintaining.  This allows one to
+  /// 'delete' a whole module at a time, even though there may be circular
+  /// references... first all references are dropped, and all use counts go to
+  /// zero.  Then everything is deleted for real.  Note that no operations are
+  /// valid on an object that has "dropped all references", except operator
+  /// delete.
+  ///
+  /// Since no other object in the module can have references into the body of a
+  /// function, dropping all references deletes the entire body of the function,
+  /// including any contained basic blocks.
+  ///
+  void dropAllReferences();
+
+  /// hasAddressTaken - returns true if there are any uses of this function
+  /// other than direct calls or invokes to it, or blockaddress expressions.
+  /// Optionally passes back an offending user for diagnostic purposes.
+  ///
+  bool hasAddressTaken(const User** = 0) const;
+
+  /// isDefTriviallyDead - Return true if it is trivially safe to remove
+  /// this function definition from the module (because it isn't externally
+  /// visible, does not have its address taken, and has no callers).  To make
+  /// this more accurate, call removeDeadConstantUsers first.
+  bool isDefTriviallyDead() const;
+
+  /// callsFunctionThatReturnsTwice - Return true if the function has a call to
+  /// setjmp or other function that gcc recognizes as "returning twice".
+  bool callsFunctionThatReturnsTwice() const;
+
+private:
+  // Shadow Value::setValueSubclassData with a private forwarding method so that
+  // subclasses cannot accidentally use it.
+  void setValueSubclassData(unsigned short D) {
+    Value::setValueSubclassData(D);
+  }
+};
+
+inline ValueSymbolTable *
+ilist_traits<BasicBlock>::getSymTab(Function *F) {
+  return F ? &F->getValueSymbolTable() : 0;
+}
+
+inline ValueSymbolTable *
+ilist_traits<Argument>::getSymTab(Function *F) {
+  return F ? &F->getValueSymbolTable() : 0;
+}
+
+} // End llvm namespace
+
+#endif

thirdparty/clang/include/llvm/IR/GlobalAlias.h

@@ -0,0 +1,93 @@
+//===-------- llvm/GlobalAlias.h - GlobalAlias class ------------*- C++ -*-===//
+//
+//                     The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure
+//
+// This file is distributed under the University of Illinois Open Source
+// License. See LICENSE.TXT for details.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+//
+// This file contains the declaration of the GlobalAlias class, which
+// represents a single function or variable alias in the IR.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+
+#ifndef LLVM_IR_GLOBALALIAS_H
+#define LLVM_IR_GLOBALALIAS_H
+
+#include "llvm/ADT/Twine.h"
+#include "llvm/ADT/ilist_node.h"
+#include "llvm/IR/GlobalValue.h"
+#include "llvm/IR/OperandTraits.h"
+
+namespace llvm {
+
+class Module;
+template<typename ValueSubClass, typename ItemParentClass>
+  class SymbolTableListTraits;
+
+class GlobalAlias : public GlobalValue, public ilist_node<GlobalAlias> {
+  friend class SymbolTableListTraits<GlobalAlias, Module>;
+  void operator=(const GlobalAlias &) LLVM_DELETED_FUNCTION;
+  GlobalAlias(const GlobalAlias &) LLVM_DELETED_FUNCTION;
+
+  void setParent(Module *parent);
+
+public:
+  // allocate space for exactly one operand
+  void *operator new(size_t s) {
+    return User::operator new(s, 1);
+  }
+  /// GlobalAlias ctor - If a parent module is specified, the alias is
+  /// automatically inserted into the end of the specified module's alias list.
+  GlobalAlias(Type *Ty, LinkageTypes Linkage, const Twine &Name = "",
+              Constant* Aliasee = 0, Module *Parent = 0);
+
+  /// Provide fast operand accessors
+  DECLARE_TRANSPARENT_OPERAND_ACCESSORS(Constant);
+
+  /// removeFromParent - This method unlinks 'this' from the containing module,
+  /// but does not delete it.
+  ///
+  virtual void removeFromParent();
+
+  /// eraseFromParent - This method unlinks 'this' from the containing module
+  /// and deletes it.
+  ///
+  virtual void eraseFromParent();
+
+  /// set/getAliasee - These methods retrive and set alias target.
+  void setAliasee(Constant *GV);
+  const Constant *getAliasee() const {
+    return getOperand(0);
+  }
+  Constant *getAliasee() {
+    return getOperand(0);
+  }
+  /// getAliasedGlobal() - Aliasee can be either global or bitcast of
+  /// global. This method retrives the global for both aliasee flavours.
+  const GlobalValue *getAliasedGlobal() const;
+
+  /// resolveAliasedGlobal() - This method tries to ultimately resolve the alias
+  /// by going through the aliasing chain and trying to find the very last
+  /// global. Returns NULL if a cycle was found. If stopOnWeak is false, then
+  /// the whole chain aliasing chain is traversed, otherwise - only strong
+  /// aliases.
+  const GlobalValue *resolveAliasedGlobal(bool stopOnWeak = true) const;
+
+  // Methods for support type inquiry through isa, cast, and dyn_cast:
+  static inline bool classof(const Value *V) {
+    return V->getValueID() == Value::GlobalAliasVal;
+  }
+};
+
+template <>
+struct OperandTraits<GlobalAlias> :
+  public FixedNumOperandTraits<GlobalAlias, 1> {
+};
+
+DEFINE_TRANSPARENT_OPERAND_ACCESSORS(GlobalAlias, Constant)
+
+} // End llvm namespace
+
+#endif

thirdparty/clang/include/llvm/IR/GlobalValue.h

@@ -0,0 +1,299 @@
+//===-- llvm/GlobalValue.h - Class to represent a global value --*- C++ -*-===//
+//
+//                     The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure
+//
+// This file is distributed under the University of Illinois Open Source
+// License. See LICENSE.TXT for details.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+//
+// This file is a common base class of all globally definable objects.  As such,
+// it is subclassed by GlobalVariable, GlobalAlias and by Function.  This is
+// used because you can do certain things with these global objects that you
+// can't do to anything else.  For example, use the address of one as a
+// constant.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+
+#ifndef LLVM_IR_GLOBALVALUE_H
+#define LLVM_IR_GLOBALVALUE_H
+
+#include "llvm/IR/Constant.h"
+
+namespace llvm {
+
+class PointerType;
+class Module;
+
+class GlobalValue : public Constant {
+  GlobalValue(const GlobalValue &) LLVM_DELETED_FUNCTION;
+public:
+  /// @brief An enumeration for the kinds of linkage for global values.
+  enum LinkageTypes {
+    ExternalLinkage = 0,///< Externally visible function
+    AvailableExternallyLinkage, ///< Available for inspection, not emission.
+    LinkOnceAnyLinkage, ///< Keep one copy of function when linking (inline)
+    LinkOnceODRLinkage, ///< Same, but only replaced by something equivalent.
+    LinkOnceODRAutoHideLinkage, ///< Like LinkOnceODRLinkage but addr not taken.
+    WeakAnyLinkage,     ///< Keep one copy of named function when linking (weak)
+    WeakODRLinkage,     ///< Same, but only replaced by something equivalent.
+    AppendingLinkage,   ///< Special purpose, only applies to global arrays
+    InternalLinkage,    ///< Rename collisions when linking (static functions).
+    PrivateLinkage,     ///< Like Internal, but omit from symbol table.
+    LinkerPrivateLinkage, ///< Like Private, but linker removes.
+    LinkerPrivateWeakLinkage, ///< Like LinkerPrivate, but weak.
+    DLLImportLinkage,   ///< Function to be imported from DLL
+    DLLExportLinkage,   ///< Function to be accessible from DLL.
+    ExternalWeakLinkage,///< ExternalWeak linkage description.
+    CommonLinkage       ///< Tentative definitions.
+  };
+
+  /// @brief An enumeration for the kinds of visibility of global values.
+  enum VisibilityTypes {
+    DefaultVisibility = 0,  ///< The GV is visible
+    HiddenVisibility,       ///< The GV is hidden
+    ProtectedVisibility     ///< The GV is protected
+  };
+
+protected:
+  GlobalValue(Type *ty, ValueTy vty, Use *Ops, unsigned NumOps,
+              LinkageTypes linkage, const Twine &Name)
+    : Constant(ty, vty, Ops, NumOps), Linkage(linkage),
+      Visibility(DefaultVisibility), Alignment(0), UnnamedAddr(0), Parent(0) {
+    setName(Name);
+  }
+
+  // Note: VC++ treats enums as signed, so an extra bit is required to prevent
+  // Linkage and Visibility from turning into negative values.
+  LinkageTypes Linkage : 5;   // The linkage of this global
+  unsigned Visibility : 2;    // The visibility style of this global
+  unsigned Alignment : 16;    // Alignment of this symbol, must be power of two
+  unsigned UnnamedAddr : 1;   // This value's address is not significant
+  Module *Parent;             // The containing module.
+  std::string Section;        // Section to emit this into, empty mean default
+public:
+  ~GlobalValue() {
+    removeDeadConstantUsers();   // remove any dead constants using this.
+  }
+
+  unsigned getAlignment() const {
+    return (1u << Alignment) >> 1;
+  }
+  void setAlignment(unsigned Align);
+
+  bool hasUnnamedAddr() const { return UnnamedAddr; }
+  void setUnnamedAddr(bool Val) { UnnamedAddr = Val; }
+
+  VisibilityTypes getVisibility() const { return VisibilityTypes(Visibility); }
+  bool hasDefaultVisibility() const { return Visibility == DefaultVisibility; }
+  bool hasHiddenVisibility() const { return Visibility == HiddenVisibility; }
+  bool hasProtectedVisibility() const {
+    return Visibility == ProtectedVisibility;
+  }
+  void setVisibility(VisibilityTypes V) { Visibility = V; }
+  
+  bool hasSection() const { return !Section.empty(); }
+  const std::string &getSection() const { return Section; }
+  void setSection(StringRef S) { Section = S; }
+  
+  /// If the usage is empty (except transitively dead constants), then this
+  /// global value can be safely deleted since the destructor will
+  /// delete the dead constants as well.
+  /// @brief Determine if the usage of this global value is empty except
+  /// for transitively dead constants.
+  bool use_empty_except_constants();
+
+  /// getType - Global values are always pointers.
+  inline PointerType *getType() const {
+    return reinterpret_cast<PointerType*>(User::getType());
+  }
+
+  static LinkageTypes getLinkOnceLinkage(bool ODR) {
+    return ODR ? LinkOnceODRLinkage : LinkOnceAnyLinkage;
+  }
+  static LinkageTypes getWeakLinkage(bool ODR) {
+    return ODR ? WeakODRLinkage : WeakAnyLinkage;
+  }
+
+  static bool isExternalLinkage(LinkageTypes Linkage) {
+    return Linkage == ExternalLinkage;
+  }
+  static bool isAvailableExternallyLinkage(LinkageTypes Linkage) {
+    return Linkage == AvailableExternallyLinkage;
+  }
+  static bool isLinkOnceLinkage(LinkageTypes Linkage) {
+    return Linkage == LinkOnceAnyLinkage ||
+           Linkage == LinkOnceODRLinkage ||
+           Linkage == LinkOnceODRAutoHideLinkage;
+  }
+  static bool isLinkOnceODRAutoHideLinkage(LinkageTypes Linkage) {
+    return Linkage == LinkOnceODRAutoHideLinkage;
+  }
+  static bool isWeakLinkage(LinkageTypes Linkage) {
+    return Linkage == WeakAnyLinkage || Linkage == WeakODRLinkage;
+  }
+  static bool isAppendingLinkage(LinkageTypes Linkage) {
+    return Linkage == AppendingLinkage;
+  }
+  static bool isInternalLinkage(LinkageTypes Linkage) {
+    return Linkage == InternalLinkage;
+  }
+  static bool isPrivateLinkage(LinkageTypes Linkage) {
+    return Linkage == PrivateLinkage;
+  }
+  static bool isLinkerPrivateLinkage(LinkageTypes Linkage) {
+    return Linkage == LinkerPrivateLinkage;
+  }
+  static bool isLinkerPrivateWeakLinkage(LinkageTypes Linkage) {
+    return Linkage == LinkerPrivateWeakLinkage;
+  }
+  static bool isLocalLinkage(LinkageTypes Linkage) {
+    return isInternalLinkage(Linkage) || isPrivateLinkage(Linkage) ||
+      isLinkerPrivateLinkage(Linkage) || isLinkerPrivateWeakLinkage(Linkage);
+  }
+  static bool isDLLImportLinkage(LinkageTypes Linkage) {
+    return Linkage == DLLImportLinkage;
+  }
+  static bool isDLLExportLinkage(LinkageTypes Linkage) {
+    return Linkage == DLLExportLinkage;
+  }
+  static bool isExternalWeakLinkage(LinkageTypes Linkage) {
+    return Linkage == ExternalWeakLinkage;
+  }
+  static bool isCommonLinkage(LinkageTypes Linkage) {
+    return Linkage == CommonLinkage;
+  }
+
+  /// isDiscardableIfUnused - Whether the definition of this global may be
+  /// discarded if it is not used in its compilation unit.
+  static bool isDiscardableIfUnused(LinkageTypes Linkage) {
+    return isLinkOnceLinkage(Linkage) || isLocalLinkage(Linkage);
+  }
+
+  /// mayBeOverridden - Whether the definition of this global may be replaced
+  /// by something non-equivalent at link time.  For example, if a function has
+  /// weak linkage then the code defining it may be replaced by different code.
+  static bool mayBeOverridden(LinkageTypes Linkage) {
+    return Linkage == WeakAnyLinkage ||
+           Linkage == LinkOnceAnyLinkage ||
+           Linkage == CommonLinkage ||
+           Linkage == ExternalWeakLinkage ||
+           Linkage == LinkerPrivateWeakLinkage;
+  }
+
+  /// isWeakForLinker - Whether the definition of this global may be replaced at
+  /// link time.  NB: Using this method outside of the code generators is almost
+  /// always a mistake: when working at the IR level use mayBeOverridden instead
+  /// as it knows about ODR semantics.
+  static bool isWeakForLinker(LinkageTypes Linkage)  {
+    return Linkage == AvailableExternallyLinkage ||
+           Linkage == WeakAnyLinkage ||
+           Linkage == WeakODRLinkage ||
+           Linkage == LinkOnceAnyLinkage ||
+           Linkage == LinkOnceODRLinkage ||
+           Linkage == LinkOnceODRAutoHideLinkage ||
+           Linkage == CommonLinkage ||
+           Linkage == ExternalWeakLinkage ||
+           Linkage == LinkerPrivateWeakLinkage;
+  }
+
+  bool hasExternalLinkage() const { return isExternalLinkage(Linkage); }
+  bool hasAvailableExternallyLinkage() const {
+    return isAvailableExternallyLinkage(Linkage);
+  }
+  bool hasLinkOnceLinkage() const {
+    return isLinkOnceLinkage(Linkage);
+  }
+  bool hasLinkOnceODRAutoHideLinkage() const {
+    return isLinkOnceODRAutoHideLinkage(Linkage);
+  }
+  bool hasWeakLinkage() const {
+    return isWeakLinkage(Linkage);
+  }
+  bool hasAppendingLinkage() const { return isAppendingLinkage(Linkage); }
+  bool hasInternalLinkage() const { return isInternalLinkage(Linkage); }
+  bool hasPrivateLinkage() const { return isPrivateLinkage(Linkage); }
+  bool hasLinkerPrivateLinkage() const { return isLinkerPrivateLinkage(Linkage); }
+  bool hasLinkerPrivateWeakLinkage() const {
+    return isLinkerPrivateWeakLinkage(Linkage);
+  }
+  bool hasLocalLinkage() const { return isLocalLinkage(Linkage); }
+  bool hasDLLImportLinkage() const { return isDLLImportLinkage(Linkage); }
+  bool hasDLLExportLinkage() const { return isDLLExportLinkage(Linkage); }
+  bool hasExternalWeakLinkage() const { return isExternalWeakLinkage(Linkage); }
+  bool hasCommonLinkage() const { return isCommonLinkage(Linkage); }
+
+  void setLinkage(LinkageTypes LT) { Linkage = LT; }
+  LinkageTypes getLinkage() const { return Linkage; }
+
+  bool isDiscardableIfUnused() const {
+    return isDiscardableIfUnused(Linkage);
+  }
+
+  bool mayBeOverridden() const { return mayBeOverridden(Linkage); }
+
+  bool isWeakForLinker() const { return isWeakForLinker(Linkage); }
+
+  /// copyAttributesFrom - copy all additional attributes (those not needed to
+  /// create a GlobalValue) from the GlobalValue Src to this one.
+  virtual void copyAttributesFrom(const GlobalValue *Src);
+
+/// @name Materialization
+/// Materialization is used to construct functions only as they're needed. This
+/// is useful to reduce memory usage in LLVM or parsing work done by the
+/// BitcodeReader to load the Module.
+/// @{
+
+  /// isMaterializable - If this function's Module is being lazily streamed in
+  /// functions from disk or some other source, this method can be used to check
+  /// to see if the function has been read in yet or not.
+  bool isMaterializable() const;
+
+  /// isDematerializable - Returns true if this function was loaded from a
+  /// GVMaterializer that's still attached to its Module and that knows how to
+  /// dematerialize the function.
+  bool isDematerializable() const;
+
+  /// Materialize - make sure this GlobalValue is fully read.  If the module is
+  /// corrupt, this returns true and fills in the optional string with
+  /// information about the problem.  If successful, this returns false.
+  bool Materialize(std::string *ErrInfo = 0);
+
+  /// Dematerialize - If this GlobalValue is read in, and if the GVMaterializer
+  /// supports it, release the memory for the function, and set it up to be
+  /// materialized lazily.  If !isDematerializable(), this method is a noop.
+  void Dematerialize();
+
+/// @}
+
+  /// Override from Constant class.
+  virtual void destroyConstant();
+
+  /// isDeclaration - Return true if the primary definition of this global 
+  /// value is outside of the current translation unit.
+  bool isDeclaration() const;
+
+  /// removeFromParent - This method unlinks 'this' from the containing module,
+  /// but does not delete it.
+  virtual void removeFromParent() = 0;
+
+  /// eraseFromParent - This method unlinks 'this' from the containing module
+  /// and deletes it.
+  virtual void eraseFromParent() = 0;
+
+  /// getParent - Get the module that this global value is contained inside
+  /// of...
+  inline Module *getParent() { return Parent; }
+  inline const Module *getParent() const { return Parent; }
+
+  // Methods for support type inquiry through isa, cast, and dyn_cast:
+  static inline bool classof(const Value *V) {
+    return V->getValueID() == Value::FunctionVal ||
+           V->getValueID() == Value::GlobalVariableVal ||
+           V->getValueID() == Value::GlobalAliasVal;
+  }
+};
+
+} // End llvm namespace
+
+#endif

thirdparty/clang/include/llvm/IR/GlobalVariable.h

@@ -0,0 +1,210 @@
+//===-- llvm/GlobalVariable.h - GlobalVariable class ------------*- C++ -*-===//
+//
+//                     The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure
+//
+// This file is distributed under the University of Illinois Open Source
+// License. See LICENSE.TXT for details.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+//
+// This file contains the declaration of the GlobalVariable class, which
+// represents a single global variable (or constant) in the VM.
+//
+// Global variables are constant pointers that refer to hunks of space that are
+// allocated by either the VM, or by the linker in a static compiler.  A global
+// variable may have an initial value, which is copied into the executables .data
+// area.  Global Constants are required to have initializers.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+
+#ifndef LLVM_IR_GLOBALVARIABLE_H
+#define LLVM_IR_GLOBALVARIABLE_H
+
+#include "llvm/ADT/Twine.h"
+#include "llvm/ADT/ilist_node.h"
+#include "llvm/IR/GlobalValue.h"
+#include "llvm/IR/OperandTraits.h"
+
+namespace llvm {
+
+class Module;
+class Constant;
+template<typename ValueSubClass, typename ItemParentClass>
+  class SymbolTableListTraits;
+
+class GlobalVariable : public GlobalValue, public ilist_node<GlobalVariable> {
+  friend class SymbolTableListTraits<GlobalVariable, Module>;
+  void *operator new(size_t, unsigned) LLVM_DELETED_FUNCTION;
+  void operator=(const GlobalVariable &) LLVM_DELETED_FUNCTION;
+  GlobalVariable(const GlobalVariable &) LLVM_DELETED_FUNCTION;
+
+  void setParent(Module *parent);
+
+  bool isConstantGlobal : 1;                   // Is this a global constant?
+  unsigned threadLocalMode : 3;                // Is this symbol "Thread Local",
+                                               // if so, what is the desired
+                                               // model?
+  bool isExternallyInitializedConstant : 1;    // Is this a global whose value
+                                               // can change from its initial
+                                               // value before global
+                                               // initializers are run?
+
+public:
+  // allocate space for exactly one operand
+  void *operator new(size_t s) {
+    return User::operator new(s, 1);
+  }
+
+  enum ThreadLocalMode {
+    NotThreadLocal = 0,
+    GeneralDynamicTLSModel,
+    LocalDynamicTLSModel,
+    InitialExecTLSModel,
+    LocalExecTLSModel
+  };
+
+  /// GlobalVariable ctor - If a parent module is specified, the global is
+  /// automatically inserted into the end of the specified modules global list.
+  GlobalVariable(Type *Ty, bool isConstant, LinkageTypes Linkage,
+                 Constant *Initializer = 0, const Twine &Name = "",
+                 ThreadLocalMode = NotThreadLocal, unsigned AddressSpace = 0,
+                 bool isExternallyInitialized = false);
+  /// GlobalVariable ctor - This creates a global and inserts it before the
+  /// specified other global.
+  GlobalVariable(Module &M, Type *Ty, bool isConstant,
+                 LinkageTypes Linkage, Constant *Initializer,
+                 const Twine &Name = "", GlobalVariable *InsertBefore = 0,
+                 ThreadLocalMode = NotThreadLocal, unsigned AddressSpace = 0,
+                 bool isExternallyInitialized = false);
+
+  ~GlobalVariable() {
+    NumOperands = 1; // FIXME: needed by operator delete
+  }
+
+  /// Provide fast operand accessors
+  DECLARE_TRANSPARENT_OPERAND_ACCESSORS(Value);
+
+  /// hasInitializer - Unless a global variable isExternal(), it has an
+  /// initializer.  The initializer for the global variable/constant is held by
+  /// Initializer if an initializer is specified.
+  ///
+  inline bool hasInitializer() const { return !isDeclaration(); }
+
+  /// hasDefinitiveInitializer - Whether the global variable has an initializer,
+  /// and any other instances of the global (this can happen due to weak
+  /// linkage) are guaranteed to have the same initializer.
+  ///
+  /// Note that if you want to transform a global, you must use
+  /// hasUniqueInitializer() instead, because of the *_odr linkage type.
+  ///
+  /// Example:
+  ///
+  /// @a = global SomeType* null - Initializer is both definitive and unique.
+  ///
+  /// @b = global weak SomeType* null - Initializer is neither definitive nor
+  /// unique.
+  ///
+  /// @c = global weak_odr SomeType* null - Initializer is definitive, but not
+  /// unique.
+  inline bool hasDefinitiveInitializer() const {
+    return hasInitializer() &&
+      // The initializer of a global variable with weak linkage may change at
+      // link time.
+      !mayBeOverridden() &&
+      // The initializer of a global variable with the externally_initialized
+      // marker may change at runtime before C++ initializers are evaluated.
+      !isExternallyInitialized();
+  }
+
+  /// hasUniqueInitializer - Whether the global variable has an initializer, and
+  /// any changes made to the initializer will turn up in the final executable.
+  inline bool hasUniqueInitializer() const {
+    return hasInitializer() &&
+      // It's not safe to modify initializers of global variables with weak
+      // linkage, because the linker might choose to discard the initializer and
+      // use the initializer from another instance of the global variable
+      // instead. It is wrong to modify the initializer of a global variable
+      // with *_odr linkage because then different instances of the global may
+      // have different initializers, breaking the One Definition Rule.
+      !isWeakForLinker() &&
+      // It is not safe to modify initializers of global variables with the
+      // external_initializer marker since the value may be changed at runtime
+      // before C++ initializers are evaluated.
+      !isExternallyInitialized();
+  }
+
+  /// getInitializer - Return the initializer for this global variable.  It is
+  /// illegal to call this method if the global is external, because we cannot
+  /// tell what the value is initialized to!
+  ///
+  inline const Constant *getInitializer() const {
+    assert(hasInitializer() && "GV doesn't have initializer!");
+    return static_cast<Constant*>(Op<0>().get());
+  }
+  inline Constant *getInitializer() {
+    assert(hasInitializer() && "GV doesn't have initializer!");
+    return static_cast<Constant*>(Op<0>().get());
+  }
+  /// setInitializer - Sets the initializer for this global variable, removing
+  /// any existing initializer if InitVal==NULL.  If this GV has type T*, the
+  /// initializer must have type T.
+  void setInitializer(Constant *InitVal);
+
+  /// If the value is a global constant, its value is immutable throughout the
+  /// runtime execution of the program.  Assigning a value into the constant
+  /// leads to undefined behavior.
+  ///
+  bool isConstant() const { return isConstantGlobal; }
+  void setConstant(bool Val) { isConstantGlobal = Val; }
+
+  /// If the value is "Thread Local", its value isn't shared by the threads.
+  bool isThreadLocal() const { return threadLocalMode != NotThreadLocal; }
+  void setThreadLocal(bool Val) {
+    threadLocalMode = Val ? GeneralDynamicTLSModel : NotThreadLocal;
+  }
+  void setThreadLocalMode(ThreadLocalMode Val) { threadLocalMode = Val; }
+  ThreadLocalMode getThreadLocalMode() const {
+    return static_cast<ThreadLocalMode>(threadLocalMode);
+  }
+
+  bool isExternallyInitialized() const {
+    return isExternallyInitializedConstant;
+  }
+  void setExternallyInitialized(bool Val) {
+    isExternallyInitializedConstant = Val;
+  }
+
+  /// copyAttributesFrom - copy all additional attributes (those not needed to
+  /// create a GlobalVariable) from the GlobalVariable Src to this one.
+  void copyAttributesFrom(const GlobalValue *Src);
+
+  /// removeFromParent - This method unlinks 'this' from the containing module,
+  /// but does not delete it.
+  ///
+  virtual void removeFromParent();
+
+  /// eraseFromParent - This method unlinks 'this' from the containing module
+  /// and deletes it.
+  ///
+  virtual void eraseFromParent();
+
+  /// Override Constant's implementation of this method so we can
+  /// replace constant initializers.
+  virtual void replaceUsesOfWithOnConstant(Value *From, Value *To, Use *U);
+
+  // Methods for support type inquiry through isa, cast, and dyn_cast:
+  static inline bool classof(const Value *V) {
+    return V->getValueID() == Value::GlobalVariableVal;
+  }
+};
+
+template <>
+struct OperandTraits<GlobalVariable> :
+  public OptionalOperandTraits<GlobalVariable> {
+};
+
+DEFINE_TRANSPARENT_OPERAND_ACCESSORS(GlobalVariable, Value)
+
+} // End llvm namespace
+
+#endif

thirdparty/clang/include/llvm/IR/InlineAsm.h

@@ -0,0 +1,309 @@
+//===-- llvm/InlineAsm.h - Class to represent inline asm strings-*- C++ -*-===//
+//
+//                     The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure
+//
+// This file is distributed under the University of Illinois Open Source
+// License. See LICENSE.TXT for details.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+//
+// This class represents the inline asm strings, which are Value*'s that are
+// used as the callee operand of call instructions.  InlineAsm's are uniqued
+// like constants, and created via InlineAsm::get(...).
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+
+#ifndef LLVM_IR_INLINEASM_H
+#define LLVM_IR_INLINEASM_H
+
+#include "llvm/ADT/StringRef.h"
+#include "llvm/IR/Value.h"
+#include <vector>
+
+namespace llvm {
+
+class PointerType;
+class FunctionType;
+class Module;
+struct InlineAsmKeyType;
+template<class ValType, class ValRefType, class TypeClass, class ConstantClass,
+         bool HasLargeKey>
+class ConstantUniqueMap;
+template<class ConstantClass, class TypeClass, class ValType>
+struct ConstantCreator;
+
+class InlineAsm : public Value {
+public:
+  enum AsmDialect {
+    AD_ATT,
+    AD_Intel
+  };
+
+private:
+  friend struct ConstantCreator<InlineAsm, PointerType, InlineAsmKeyType>;
+  friend class ConstantUniqueMap<InlineAsmKeyType, const InlineAsmKeyType&,
+                                 PointerType, InlineAsm, false>;
+
+  InlineAsm(const InlineAsm &) LLVM_DELETED_FUNCTION;
+  void operator=(const InlineAsm&) LLVM_DELETED_FUNCTION;
+
+  std::string AsmString, Constraints;
+  bool HasSideEffects;
+  bool IsAlignStack;
+  AsmDialect Dialect;
+
+  InlineAsm(PointerType *Ty, const std::string &AsmString,
+            const std::string &Constraints, bool hasSideEffects,
+            bool isAlignStack, AsmDialect asmDialect);
+  virtual ~InlineAsm();
+
+  /// When the ConstantUniqueMap merges two types and makes two InlineAsms
+  /// identical, it destroys one of them with this method.
+  void destroyConstant();
+public:
+
+  /// InlineAsm::get - Return the specified uniqued inline asm string.
+  ///
+  static InlineAsm *get(FunctionType *Ty, StringRef AsmString,
+                        StringRef Constraints, bool hasSideEffects,
+                        bool isAlignStack = false,
+                        AsmDialect asmDialect = AD_ATT);
+  
+  bool hasSideEffects() const { return HasSideEffects; }
+  bool isAlignStack() const { return IsAlignStack; }
+  AsmDialect getDialect() const { return Dialect; }
+
+  /// getType - InlineAsm's are always pointers.
+  ///
+  PointerType *getType() const {
+    return reinterpret_cast<PointerType*>(Value::getType());
+  }
+  
+  /// getFunctionType - InlineAsm's are always pointers to functions.
+  ///
+  FunctionType *getFunctionType() const;
+  
+  const std::string &getAsmString() const { return AsmString; }
+  const std::string &getConstraintString() const { return Constraints; }
+
+  /// Verify - This static method can be used by the parser to check to see if
+  /// the specified constraint string is legal for the type.  This returns true
+  /// if legal, false if not.
+  ///
+  static bool Verify(FunctionType *Ty, StringRef Constraints);
+
+  // Constraint String Parsing 
+  enum ConstraintPrefix {
+    isInput,            // 'x'
+    isOutput,           // '=x'
+    isClobber           // '~x'
+  };
+  
+  typedef std::vector<std::string> ConstraintCodeVector;
+  
+  struct SubConstraintInfo {
+    /// MatchingInput - If this is not -1, this is an output constraint where an
+    /// input constraint is required to match it (e.g. "0").  The value is the
+    /// constraint number that matches this one (for example, if this is
+    /// constraint #0 and constraint #4 has the value "0", this will be 4).
+    signed char MatchingInput;
+    /// Code - The constraint code, either the register name (in braces) or the
+    /// constraint letter/number.
+    ConstraintCodeVector Codes;
+    /// Default constructor.
+    SubConstraintInfo() : MatchingInput(-1) {}
+  };
+
+  typedef std::vector<SubConstraintInfo> SubConstraintInfoVector;
+  struct ConstraintInfo;
+  typedef std::vector<ConstraintInfo> ConstraintInfoVector;
+  
+  struct ConstraintInfo {
+    /// Type - The basic type of the constraint: input/output/clobber
+    ///
+    ConstraintPrefix Type;
+    
+    /// isEarlyClobber - "&": output operand writes result before inputs are all
+    /// read.  This is only ever set for an output operand.
+    bool isEarlyClobber; 
+    
+    /// MatchingInput - If this is not -1, this is an output constraint where an
+    /// input constraint is required to match it (e.g. "0").  The value is the
+    /// constraint number that matches this one (for example, if this is
+    /// constraint #0 and constraint #4 has the value "0", this will be 4).
+    signed char MatchingInput;
+    
+    /// hasMatchingInput - Return true if this is an output constraint that has
+    /// a matching input constraint.
+    bool hasMatchingInput() const { return MatchingInput != -1; }
+    
+    /// isCommutative - This is set to true for a constraint that is commutative
+    /// with the next operand.
+    bool isCommutative;
+    
+    /// isIndirect - True if this operand is an indirect operand.  This means
+    /// that the address of the source or destination is present in the call
+    /// instruction, instead of it being returned or passed in explicitly.  This
+    /// is represented with a '*' in the asm string.
+    bool isIndirect;
+    
+    /// Code - The constraint code, either the register name (in braces) or the
+    /// constraint letter/number.
+    ConstraintCodeVector Codes;
+    
+    /// isMultipleAlternative - '|': has multiple-alternative constraints.
+    bool isMultipleAlternative;
+    
+    /// multipleAlternatives - If there are multiple alternative constraints,
+    /// this array will contain them.  Otherwise it will be empty.
+    SubConstraintInfoVector multipleAlternatives;
+    
+    /// The currently selected alternative constraint index.
+    unsigned currentAlternativeIndex;
+    
+    ///Default constructor.
+    ConstraintInfo();
+    
+    /// Copy constructor.
+    ConstraintInfo(const ConstraintInfo &other);
+    
+    /// Parse - Analyze the specified string (e.g. "=*&{eax}") and fill in the
+    /// fields in this structure.  If the constraint string is not understood,
+    /// return true, otherwise return false.
+    bool Parse(StringRef Str, ConstraintInfoVector &ConstraintsSoFar);
+               
+    /// selectAlternative - Point this constraint to the alternative constraint
+    /// indicated by the index.
+    void selectAlternative(unsigned index);
+  };
+  
+  /// ParseConstraints - Split up the constraint string into the specific
+  /// constraints and their prefixes.  If this returns an empty vector, and if
+  /// the constraint string itself isn't empty, there was an error parsing.
+  static ConstraintInfoVector ParseConstraints(StringRef ConstraintString);
+  
+  /// ParseConstraints - Parse the constraints of this inlineasm object, 
+  /// returning them the same way that ParseConstraints(str) does.
+  ConstraintInfoVector ParseConstraints() const {
+    return ParseConstraints(Constraints);
+  }
+  
+  // Methods for support type inquiry through isa, cast, and dyn_cast:
+  static inline bool classof(const Value *V) {
+    return V->getValueID() == Value::InlineAsmVal;
+  }
+
+  
+  // These are helper methods for dealing with flags in the INLINEASM SDNode
+  // in the backend.
+  
+  enum {
+    // Fixed operands on an INLINEASM SDNode.
+    Op_InputChain = 0,
+    Op_AsmString = 1,
+    Op_MDNode = 2,
+    Op_ExtraInfo = 3,    // HasSideEffects, IsAlignStack, AsmDialect.
+    Op_FirstOperand = 4,
+
+    // Fixed operands on an INLINEASM MachineInstr.
+    MIOp_AsmString = 0,
+    MIOp_ExtraInfo = 1,    // HasSideEffects, IsAlignStack, AsmDialect.
+    MIOp_FirstOperand = 2,
+
+    // Interpretation of the MIOp_ExtraInfo bit field.
+    Extra_HasSideEffects = 1,
+    Extra_IsAlignStack = 2,
+    Extra_AsmDialect = 4,
+    Extra_MayLoad = 8,
+    Extra_MayStore = 16,
+
+    // Inline asm operands map to multiple SDNode / MachineInstr operands.
+    // The first operand is an immediate describing the asm operand, the low
+    // bits is the kind:
+    Kind_RegUse = 1,             // Input register, "r".
+    Kind_RegDef = 2,             // Output register, "=r".
+    Kind_RegDefEarlyClobber = 3, // Early-clobber output register, "=&r".
+    Kind_Clobber = 4,            // Clobbered register, "~r".
+    Kind_Imm = 5,                // Immediate.
+    Kind_Mem = 6,                // Memory operand, "m".
+
+    Flag_MatchingOperand = 0x80000000
+  };
+  
+  static unsigned getFlagWord(unsigned Kind, unsigned NumOps) {
+    assert(((NumOps << 3) & ~0xffff) == 0 && "Too many inline asm operands!");
+    assert(Kind >= Kind_RegUse && Kind <= Kind_Mem && "Invalid Kind");
+    return Kind | (NumOps << 3);
+  }
+  
+  /// getFlagWordForMatchingOp - Augment an existing flag word returned by
+  /// getFlagWord with information indicating that this input operand is tied 
+  /// to a previous output operand.
+  static unsigned getFlagWordForMatchingOp(unsigned InputFlag,
+                                           unsigned MatchedOperandNo) {
+    assert(MatchedOperandNo <= 0x7fff && "Too big matched operand");
+    assert((InputFlag & ~0xffff) == 0 && "High bits already contain data");
+    return InputFlag | Flag_MatchingOperand | (MatchedOperandNo << 16);
+  }
+
+  /// getFlagWordForRegClass - Augment an existing flag word returned by
+  /// getFlagWord with the required register class for the following register
+  /// operands.
+  /// A tied use operand cannot have a register class, use the register class
+  /// from the def operand instead.
+  static unsigned getFlagWordForRegClass(unsigned InputFlag, unsigned RC) {
+    // Store RC + 1, reserve the value 0 to mean 'no register class'.
+    ++RC;
+    assert(RC <= 0x7fff && "Too large register class ID");
+    assert((InputFlag & ~0xffff) == 0 && "High bits already contain data");
+    return InputFlag | (RC << 16);
+  }
+
+  static unsigned getKind(unsigned Flags) {
+    return Flags & 7;
+  }
+
+  static bool isRegDefKind(unsigned Flag){ return getKind(Flag) == Kind_RegDef;}
+  static bool isImmKind(unsigned Flag) { return getKind(Flag) == Kind_Imm; }
+  static bool isMemKind(unsigned Flag) { return getKind(Flag) == Kind_Mem; }
+  static bool isRegDefEarlyClobberKind(unsigned Flag) {
+    return getKind(Flag) == Kind_RegDefEarlyClobber;
+  }
+  static bool isClobberKind(unsigned Flag) {
+    return getKind(Flag) == Kind_Clobber;
+  }
+
+  /// getNumOperandRegisters - Extract the number of registers field from the
+  /// inline asm operand flag.
+  static unsigned getNumOperandRegisters(unsigned Flag) {
+    return (Flag & 0xffff) >> 3;
+  }
+
+  /// isUseOperandTiedToDef - Return true if the flag of the inline asm
+  /// operand indicates it is an use operand that's matched to a def operand.
+  static bool isUseOperandTiedToDef(unsigned Flag, unsigned &Idx) {
+    if ((Flag & Flag_MatchingOperand) == 0)
+      return false;
+    Idx = (Flag & ~Flag_MatchingOperand) >> 16;
+    return true;
+  }
+
+  /// hasRegClassConstraint - Returns true if the flag contains a register
+  /// class constraint.  Sets RC to the register class ID.
+  static bool hasRegClassConstraint(unsigned Flag, unsigned &RC) {
+    if (Flag & Flag_MatchingOperand)
+      return false;
+    unsigned High = Flag >> 16;
+    // getFlagWordForRegClass() uses 0 to mean no register class, and otherwise
+    // stores RC + 1.
+    if (!High)
+      return false;
+    RC = High - 1;
+    return true;
+  }
+
+};
+
+} // End llvm namespace
+
+#endif

thirdparty/clang/include/llvm/IR/InstrTypes.h

@@ -0,0 +1,851 @@
+//===-- llvm/InstrTypes.h - Important Instruction subclasses ----*- C++ -*-===//
+//
+//                     The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure
+//
+// This file is distributed under the University of Illinois Open Source
+// License. See LICENSE.TXT for details.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+//
+// This file defines various meta classes of instructions that exist in the VM
+// representation.  Specific concrete subclasses of these may be found in the
+// i*.h files...
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+
+#ifndef LLVM_IR_INSTRTYPES_H
+#define LLVM_IR_INSTRTYPES_H
+
+#include "llvm/ADT/Twine.h"
+#include "llvm/IR/DerivedTypes.h"
+#include "llvm/IR/Instruction.h"
+#include "llvm/IR/OperandTraits.h"
+
+namespace llvm {
+
+class LLVMContext;
+
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+//                            TerminatorInst Class
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+
+/// TerminatorInst - Subclasses of this class are all able to terminate a basic
+/// block.  Thus, these are all the flow control type of operations.
+///
+class TerminatorInst : public Instruction {
+protected:
+  TerminatorInst(Type *Ty, Instruction::TermOps iType,
+                 Use *Ops, unsigned NumOps,
+                 Instruction *InsertBefore = 0)
+    : Instruction(Ty, iType, Ops, NumOps, InsertBefore) {}
+
+  TerminatorInst(Type *Ty, Instruction::TermOps iType,
+                 Use *Ops, unsigned NumOps, BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd)
+    : Instruction(Ty, iType, Ops, NumOps, InsertAtEnd) {}
+
+  // Out of line virtual method, so the vtable, etc has a home.
+  ~TerminatorInst();
+
+  /// Virtual methods - Terminators should overload these and provide inline
+  /// overrides of non-V methods.
+  virtual BasicBlock *getSuccessorV(unsigned idx) const = 0;
+  virtual unsigned getNumSuccessorsV() const = 0;
+  virtual void setSuccessorV(unsigned idx, BasicBlock *B) = 0;
+  virtual TerminatorInst *clone_impl() const = 0;
+public:
+
+  /// getNumSuccessors - Return the number of successors that this terminator
+  /// has.
+  unsigned getNumSuccessors() const {
+    return getNumSuccessorsV();
+  }
+
+  /// getSuccessor - Return the specified successor.
+  ///
+  BasicBlock *getSuccessor(unsigned idx) const {
+    return getSuccessorV(idx);
+  }
+
+  /// setSuccessor - Update the specified successor to point at the provided
+  /// block.
+  void setSuccessor(unsigned idx, BasicBlock *B) {
+    setSuccessorV(idx, B);
+  }
+
+  // Methods for support type inquiry through isa, cast, and dyn_cast:
+  static inline bool classof(const Instruction *I) {
+    return I->isTerminator();
+  }
+  static inline bool classof(const Value *V) {
+    return isa<Instruction>(V) && classof(cast<Instruction>(V));
+  }
+};
+
+
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+//                          UnaryInstruction Class
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+
+class UnaryInstruction : public Instruction {
+  void *operator new(size_t, unsigned) LLVM_DELETED_FUNCTION;
+
+protected:
+  UnaryInstruction(Type *Ty, unsigned iType, Value *V,
+                   Instruction *IB = 0)
+    : Instruction(Ty, iType, &Op<0>(), 1, IB) {
+    Op<0>() = V;
+  }
+  UnaryInstruction(Type *Ty, unsigned iType, Value *V, BasicBlock *IAE)
+    : Instruction(Ty, iType, &Op<0>(), 1, IAE) {
+    Op<0>() = V;
+  }
+public:
+  // allocate space for exactly one operand
+  void *operator new(size_t s) {
+    return User::operator new(s, 1);
+  }
+
+  // Out of line virtual method, so the vtable, etc has a home.
+  ~UnaryInstruction();
+
+  /// Transparently provide more efficient getOperand methods.
+  DECLARE_TRANSPARENT_OPERAND_ACCESSORS(Value);
+
+  // Methods for support type inquiry through isa, cast, and dyn_cast:
+  static inline bool classof(const Instruction *I) {
+    return I->getOpcode() == Instruction::Alloca ||
+           I->getOpcode() == Instruction::Load ||
+           I->getOpcode() == Instruction::VAArg ||
+           I->getOpcode() == Instruction::ExtractValue ||
+           (I->getOpcode() >= CastOpsBegin && I->getOpcode() < CastOpsEnd);
+  }
+  static inline bool classof(const Value *V) {
+    return isa<Instruction>(V) && classof(cast<Instruction>(V));
+  }
+};
+
+template <>
+struct OperandTraits<UnaryInstruction> :
+  public FixedNumOperandTraits<UnaryInstruction, 1> {
+};
+
+DEFINE_TRANSPARENT_OPERAND_ACCESSORS(UnaryInstruction, Value)
+
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+//                           BinaryOperator Class
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+
+class BinaryOperator : public Instruction {
+  void *operator new(size_t, unsigned) LLVM_DELETED_FUNCTION;
+protected:
+  void init(BinaryOps iType);
+  BinaryOperator(BinaryOps iType, Value *S1, Value *S2, Type *Ty,
+                 const Twine &Name, Instruction *InsertBefore);
+  BinaryOperator(BinaryOps iType, Value *S1, Value *S2, Type *Ty,
+                 const Twine &Name, BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd);
+  virtual BinaryOperator *clone_impl() const LLVM_OVERRIDE;
+public:
+  // allocate space for exactly two operands
+  void *operator new(size_t s) {
+    return User::operator new(s, 2);
+  }
+
+  /// Transparently provide more efficient getOperand methods.
+  DECLARE_TRANSPARENT_OPERAND_ACCESSORS(Value);
+
+  /// Create() - Construct a binary instruction, given the opcode and the two
+  /// operands.  Optionally (if InstBefore is specified) insert the instruction
+  /// into a BasicBlock right before the specified instruction.  The specified
+  /// Instruction is allowed to be a dereferenced end iterator.
+  ///
+  static BinaryOperator *Create(BinaryOps Op, Value *S1, Value *S2,
+                                const Twine &Name = Twine(),
+                                Instruction *InsertBefore = 0);
+
+  /// Create() - Construct a binary instruction, given the opcode and the two
+  /// operands.  Also automatically insert this instruction to the end of the
+  /// BasicBlock specified.
+  ///
+  static BinaryOperator *Create(BinaryOps Op, Value *S1, Value *S2,
+                                const Twine &Name, BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd);
+
+  /// Create* - These methods just forward to Create, and are useful when you
+  /// statically know what type of instruction you're going to create.  These
+  /// helpers just save some typing.
+#define HANDLE_BINARY_INST(N, OPC, CLASS) \
+  static BinaryOperator *Create##OPC(Value *V1, Value *V2, \
+                                     const Twine &Name = "") {\
+    return Create(Instruction::OPC, V1, V2, Name);\
+  }
+#include "llvm/IR/Instruction.def"
+#define HANDLE_BINARY_INST(N, OPC, CLASS) \
+  static BinaryOperator *Create##OPC(Value *V1, Value *V2, \
+                                     const Twine &Name, BasicBlock *BB) {\
+    return Create(Instruction::OPC, V1, V2, Name, BB);\
+  }
+#include "llvm/IR/Instruction.def"
+#define HANDLE_BINARY_INST(N, OPC, CLASS) \
+  static BinaryOperator *Create##OPC(Value *V1, Value *V2, \
+                                     const Twine &Name, Instruction *I) {\
+    return Create(Instruction::OPC, V1, V2, Name, I);\
+  }
+#include "llvm/IR/Instruction.def"
+
+  static BinaryOperator *CreateNSW(BinaryOps Opc, Value *V1, Value *V2,
+                                   const Twine &Name = "") {
+    BinaryOperator *BO = Create(Opc, V1, V2, Name);
+    BO->setHasNoSignedWrap(true);
+    return BO;
+  }
+  static BinaryOperator *CreateNSW(BinaryOps Opc, Value *V1, Value *V2,
+                                   const Twine &Name, BasicBlock *BB) {
+    BinaryOperator *BO = Create(Opc, V1, V2, Name, BB);
+    BO->setHasNoSignedWrap(true);
+    return BO;
+  }
+  static BinaryOperator *CreateNSW(BinaryOps Opc, Value *V1, Value *V2,
+                                   const Twine &Name, Instruction *I) {
+    BinaryOperator *BO = Create(Opc, V1, V2, Name, I);
+    BO->setHasNoSignedWrap(true);
+    return BO;
+  }
+  
+  static BinaryOperator *CreateNUW(BinaryOps Opc, Value *V1, Value *V2,
+                                   const Twine &Name = "") {
+    BinaryOperator *BO = Create(Opc, V1, V2, Name);
+    BO->setHasNoUnsignedWrap(true);
+    return BO;
+  }
+  static BinaryOperator *CreateNUW(BinaryOps Opc, Value *V1, Value *V2,
+                                   const Twine &Name, BasicBlock *BB) {
+    BinaryOperator *BO = Create(Opc, V1, V2, Name, BB);
+    BO->setHasNoUnsignedWrap(true);
+    return BO;
+  }
+  static BinaryOperator *CreateNUW(BinaryOps Opc, Value *V1, Value *V2,
+                                   const Twine &Name, Instruction *I) {
+    BinaryOperator *BO = Create(Opc, V1, V2, Name, I);
+    BO->setHasNoUnsignedWrap(true);
+    return BO;
+  }
+  
+  static BinaryOperator *CreateExact(BinaryOps Opc, Value *V1, Value *V2,
+                                     const Twine &Name = "") {
+    BinaryOperator *BO = Create(Opc, V1, V2, Name);
+    BO->setIsExact(true);
+    return BO;
+  }
+  static BinaryOperator *CreateExact(BinaryOps Opc, Value *V1, Value *V2,
+                                     const Twine &Name, BasicBlock *BB) {
+    BinaryOperator *BO = Create(Opc, V1, V2, Name, BB);
+    BO->setIsExact(true);
+    return BO;
+  }
+  static BinaryOperator *CreateExact(BinaryOps Opc, Value *V1, Value *V2,
+                                     const Twine &Name, Instruction *I) {
+    BinaryOperator *BO = Create(Opc, V1, V2, Name, I);
+    BO->setIsExact(true);
+    return BO;
+  }
+  
+#define DEFINE_HELPERS(OPC, NUWNSWEXACT)                                     \
+  static BinaryOperator *Create ## NUWNSWEXACT ## OPC                        \
+           (Value *V1, Value *V2, const Twine &Name = "") {                  \
+    return Create ## NUWNSWEXACT(Instruction::OPC, V1, V2, Name);            \
+  }                                                                          \
+  static BinaryOperator *Create ## NUWNSWEXACT ## OPC                        \
+           (Value *V1, Value *V2, const Twine &Name, BasicBlock *BB) {       \
+    return Create ## NUWNSWEXACT(Instruction::OPC, V1, V2, Name, BB);        \
+  }                                                                          \
+  static BinaryOperator *Create ## NUWNSWEXACT ## OPC                        \
+           (Value *V1, Value *V2, const Twine &Name, Instruction *I) {       \
+    return Create ## NUWNSWEXACT(Instruction::OPC, V1, V2, Name, I);         \
+  }
+  
+  DEFINE_HELPERS(Add, NSW)  // CreateNSWAdd
+  DEFINE_HELPERS(Add, NUW)  // CreateNUWAdd
+  DEFINE_HELPERS(Sub, NSW)  // CreateNSWSub
+  DEFINE_HELPERS(Sub, NUW)  // CreateNUWSub
+  DEFINE_HELPERS(Mul, NSW)  // CreateNSWMul
+  DEFINE_HELPERS(Mul, NUW)  // CreateNUWMul
+  DEFINE_HELPERS(Shl, NSW)  // CreateNSWShl
+  DEFINE_HELPERS(Shl, NUW)  // CreateNUWShl
+
+  DEFINE_HELPERS(SDiv, Exact)  // CreateExactSDiv
+  DEFINE_HELPERS(UDiv, Exact)  // CreateExactUDiv
+  DEFINE_HELPERS(AShr, Exact)  // CreateExactAShr
+  DEFINE_HELPERS(LShr, Exact)  // CreateExactLShr
+
+#undef DEFINE_HELPERS
+  
+  /// Helper functions to construct and inspect unary operations (NEG and NOT)
+  /// via binary operators SUB and XOR:
+  ///
+  /// CreateNeg, CreateNot - Create the NEG and NOT
+  ///     instructions out of SUB and XOR instructions.
+  ///
+  static BinaryOperator *CreateNeg(Value *Op, const Twine &Name = "",
+                                   Instruction *InsertBefore = 0);
+  static BinaryOperator *CreateNeg(Value *Op, const Twine &Name,
+                                   BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd);
+  static BinaryOperator *CreateNSWNeg(Value *Op, const Twine &Name = "",
+                                      Instruction *InsertBefore = 0);
+  static BinaryOperator *CreateNSWNeg(Value *Op, const Twine &Name,
+                                      BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd);
+  static BinaryOperator *CreateNUWNeg(Value *Op, const Twine &Name = "",
+                                      Instruction *InsertBefore = 0);
+  static BinaryOperator *CreateNUWNeg(Value *Op, const Twine &Name,
+                                      BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd);
+  static BinaryOperator *CreateFNeg(Value *Op, const Twine &Name = "",
+                                    Instruction *InsertBefore = 0);
+  static BinaryOperator *CreateFNeg(Value *Op, const Twine &Name,
+                                    BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd);
+  static BinaryOperator *CreateNot(Value *Op, const Twine &Name = "",
+                                   Instruction *InsertBefore = 0);
+  static BinaryOperator *CreateNot(Value *Op, const Twine &Name,
+                                   BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd);
+
+  /// isNeg, isFNeg, isNot - Check if the given Value is a
+  /// NEG, FNeg, or NOT instruction.
+  ///
+  static bool isNeg(const Value *V);
+  static bool isFNeg(const Value *V, bool IgnoreZeroSign=false);
+  static bool isNot(const Value *V);
+
+  /// getNegArgument, getNotArgument - Helper functions to extract the
+  ///     unary argument of a NEG, FNEG or NOT operation implemented via
+  ///     Sub, FSub, or Xor.
+  ///
+  static const Value *getNegArgument(const Value *BinOp);
+  static       Value *getNegArgument(      Value *BinOp);
+  static const Value *getFNegArgument(const Value *BinOp);
+  static       Value *getFNegArgument(      Value *BinOp);
+  static const Value *getNotArgument(const Value *BinOp);
+  static       Value *getNotArgument(      Value *BinOp);
+
+  BinaryOps getOpcode() const {
+    return static_cast<BinaryOps>(Instruction::getOpcode());
+  }
+
+  /// swapOperands - Exchange the two operands to this instruction.
+  /// This instruction is safe to use on any binary instruction and
+  /// does not modify the semantics of the instruction.  If the instruction
+  /// cannot be reversed (ie, it's a Div), then return true.
+  ///
+  bool swapOperands();
+
+  /// setHasNoUnsignedWrap - Set or clear the nsw flag on this instruction,
+  /// which must be an operator which supports this flag. See LangRef.html
+  /// for the meaning of this flag.
+  void setHasNoUnsignedWrap(bool b = true);
+
+  /// setHasNoSignedWrap - Set or clear the nsw flag on this instruction,
+  /// which must be an operator which supports this flag. See LangRef.html
+  /// for the meaning of this flag.
+  void setHasNoSignedWrap(bool b = true);
+
+  /// setIsExact - Set or clear the exact flag on this instruction,
+  /// which must be an operator which supports this flag. See LangRef.html
+  /// for the meaning of this flag.
+  void setIsExact(bool b = true);
+
+  /// hasNoUnsignedWrap - Determine whether the no unsigned wrap flag is set.
+  bool hasNoUnsignedWrap() const;
+
+  /// hasNoSignedWrap - Determine whether the no signed wrap flag is set.
+  bool hasNoSignedWrap() const;
+
+  /// isExact - Determine whether the exact flag is set.
+  bool isExact() const;
+
+  // Methods for support type inquiry through isa, cast, and dyn_cast:
+  static inline bool classof(const Instruction *I) {
+    return I->isBinaryOp();
+  }
+  static inline bool classof(const Value *V) {
+    return isa<Instruction>(V) && classof(cast<Instruction>(V));
+  }
+};
+
+template <>
+struct OperandTraits<BinaryOperator> :
+  public FixedNumOperandTraits<BinaryOperator, 2> {
+};
+
+DEFINE_TRANSPARENT_OPERAND_ACCESSORS(BinaryOperator, Value)
+
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+//                               CastInst Class
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+
+/// CastInst - This is the base class for all instructions that perform data
+/// casts. It is simply provided so that instruction category testing
+/// can be performed with code like:
+///
+/// if (isa<CastInst>(Instr)) { ... }
+/// @brief Base class of casting instructions.
+class CastInst : public UnaryInstruction {
+  virtual void anchor() LLVM_OVERRIDE;
+protected:
+  /// @brief Constructor with insert-before-instruction semantics for subclasses
+  CastInst(Type *Ty, unsigned iType, Value *S,
+           const Twine &NameStr = "", Instruction *InsertBefore = 0)
+    : UnaryInstruction(Ty, iType, S, InsertBefore) {
+    setName(NameStr);
+  }
+  /// @brief Constructor with insert-at-end-of-block semantics for subclasses
+  CastInst(Type *Ty, unsigned iType, Value *S,
+           const Twine &NameStr, BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd)
+    : UnaryInstruction(Ty, iType, S, InsertAtEnd) {
+    setName(NameStr);
+  }
+public:
+  /// Provides a way to construct any of the CastInst subclasses using an
+  /// opcode instead of the subclass's constructor. The opcode must be in the
+  /// CastOps category (Instruction::isCast(opcode) returns true). This
+  /// constructor has insert-before-instruction semantics to automatically
+  /// insert the new CastInst before InsertBefore (if it is non-null).
+  /// @brief Construct any of the CastInst subclasses
+  static CastInst *Create(
+    Instruction::CastOps,    ///< The opcode of the cast instruction
+    Value *S,                ///< The value to be casted (operand 0)
+    Type *Ty,          ///< The type to which cast should be made
+    const Twine &Name = "", ///< Name for the instruction
+    Instruction *InsertBefore = 0 ///< Place to insert the instruction
+  );
+  /// Provides a way to construct any of the CastInst subclasses using an
+  /// opcode instead of the subclass's constructor. The opcode must be in the
+  /// CastOps category. This constructor has insert-at-end-of-block semantics
+  /// to automatically insert the new CastInst at the end of InsertAtEnd (if
+  /// its non-null).
+  /// @brief Construct any of the CastInst subclasses
+  static CastInst *Create(
+    Instruction::CastOps,    ///< The opcode for the cast instruction
+    Value *S,                ///< The value to be casted (operand 0)
+    Type *Ty,          ///< The type to which operand is casted
+    const Twine &Name, ///< The name for the instruction
+    BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd  ///< The block to insert the instruction into
+  );
+
+  /// @brief Create a ZExt or BitCast cast instruction
+  static CastInst *CreateZExtOrBitCast(
+    Value *S,                ///< The value to be casted (operand 0)
+    Type *Ty,          ///< The type to which cast should be made
+    const Twine &Name = "", ///< Name for the instruction
+    Instruction *InsertBefore = 0 ///< Place to insert the instruction
+  );
+
+  /// @brief Create a ZExt or BitCast cast instruction
+  static CastInst *CreateZExtOrBitCast(
+    Value *S,                ///< The value to be casted (operand 0)
+    Type *Ty,          ///< The type to which operand is casted
+    const Twine &Name, ///< The name for the instruction
+    BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd  ///< The block to insert the instruction into
+  );
+
+  /// @brief Create a SExt or BitCast cast instruction
+  static CastInst *CreateSExtOrBitCast(
+    Value *S,                ///< The value to be casted (operand 0)
+    Type *Ty,          ///< The type to which cast should be made
+    const Twine &Name = "", ///< Name for the instruction
+    Instruction *InsertBefore = 0 ///< Place to insert the instruction
+  );
+
+  /// @brief Create a SExt or BitCast cast instruction
+  static CastInst *CreateSExtOrBitCast(
+    Value *S,                ///< The value to be casted (operand 0)
+    Type *Ty,          ///< The type to which operand is casted
+    const Twine &Name, ///< The name for the instruction
+    BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd  ///< The block to insert the instruction into
+  );
+
+  /// @brief Create a BitCast or a PtrToInt cast instruction
+  static CastInst *CreatePointerCast(
+    Value *S,                ///< The pointer value to be casted (operand 0)
+    Type *Ty,          ///< The type to which operand is casted
+    const Twine &Name, ///< The name for the instruction
+    BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd  ///< The block to insert the instruction into
+  );
+
+  /// @brief Create a BitCast or a PtrToInt cast instruction
+  static CastInst *CreatePointerCast(
+    Value *S,                ///< The pointer value to be casted (operand 0)
+    Type *Ty,          ///< The type to which cast should be made
+    const Twine &Name = "", ///< Name for the instruction
+    Instruction *InsertBefore = 0 ///< Place to insert the instruction
+  );
+
+  /// @brief Create a ZExt, BitCast, or Trunc for int -> int casts.
+  static CastInst *CreateIntegerCast(
+    Value *S,                ///< The pointer value to be casted (operand 0)
+    Type *Ty,          ///< The type to which cast should be made
+    bool isSigned,           ///< Whether to regard S as signed or not
+    const Twine &Name = "", ///< Name for the instruction
+    Instruction *InsertBefore = 0 ///< Place to insert the instruction
+  );
+
+  /// @brief Create a ZExt, BitCast, or Trunc for int -> int casts.
+  static CastInst *CreateIntegerCast(
+    Value *S,                ///< The integer value to be casted (operand 0)
+    Type *Ty,          ///< The integer type to which operand is casted
+    bool isSigned,           ///< Whether to regard S as signed or not
+    const Twine &Name, ///< The name for the instruction
+    BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd  ///< The block to insert the instruction into
+  );
+
+  /// @brief Create an FPExt, BitCast, or FPTrunc for fp -> fp casts
+  static CastInst *CreateFPCast(
+    Value *S,                ///< The floating point value to be casted
+    Type *Ty,          ///< The floating point type to cast to
+    const Twine &Name = "", ///< Name for the instruction
+    Instruction *InsertBefore = 0 ///< Place to insert the instruction
+  );
+
+  /// @brief Create an FPExt, BitCast, or FPTrunc for fp -> fp casts
+  static CastInst *CreateFPCast(
+    Value *S,                ///< The floating point value to be casted
+    Type *Ty,          ///< The floating point type to cast to
+    const Twine &Name, ///< The name for the instruction
+    BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd  ///< The block to insert the instruction into
+  );
+
+  /// @brief Create a Trunc or BitCast cast instruction
+  static CastInst *CreateTruncOrBitCast(
+    Value *S,                ///< The value to be casted (operand 0)
+    Type *Ty,          ///< The type to which cast should be made
+    const Twine &Name = "", ///< Name for the instruction
+    Instruction *InsertBefore = 0 ///< Place to insert the instruction
+  );
+
+  /// @brief Create a Trunc or BitCast cast instruction
+  static CastInst *CreateTruncOrBitCast(
+    Value *S,                ///< The value to be casted (operand 0)
+    Type *Ty,          ///< The type to which operand is casted
+    const Twine &Name, ///< The name for the instruction
+    BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd  ///< The block to insert the instruction into
+  );
+
+  /// @brief Check whether it is valid to call getCastOpcode for these types.
+  static bool isCastable(
+    Type *SrcTy, ///< The Type from which the value should be cast.
+    Type *DestTy ///< The Type to which the value should be cast.
+  );
+
+  /// Returns the opcode necessary to cast Val into Ty using usual casting
+  /// rules.
+  /// @brief Infer the opcode for cast operand and type
+  static Instruction::CastOps getCastOpcode(
+    const Value *Val, ///< The value to cast
+    bool SrcIsSigned, ///< Whether to treat the source as signed
+    Type *Ty,   ///< The Type to which the value should be casted
+    bool DstIsSigned  ///< Whether to treate the dest. as signed
+  );
+
+  /// There are several places where we need to know if a cast instruction
+  /// only deals with integer source and destination types. To simplify that
+  /// logic, this method is provided.
+  /// @returns true iff the cast has only integral typed operand and dest type.
+  /// @brief Determine if this is an integer-only cast.
+  bool isIntegerCast() const;
+
+  /// A lossless cast is one that does not alter the basic value. It implies
+  /// a no-op cast but is more stringent, preventing things like int->float,
+  /// long->double, or int->ptr.
+  /// @returns true iff the cast is lossless.
+  /// @brief Determine if this is a lossless cast.
+  bool isLosslessCast() const;
+
+  /// A no-op cast is one that can be effected without changing any bits.
+  /// It implies that the source and destination types are the same size. The
+  /// IntPtrTy argument is used to make accurate determinations for casts
+  /// involving Integer and Pointer types. They are no-op casts if the integer
+  /// is the same size as the pointer. However, pointer size varies with
+  /// platform. Generally, the result of DataLayout::getIntPtrType() should be
+  /// passed in. If that's not available, use Type::Int64Ty, which will make
+  /// the isNoopCast call conservative.
+  /// @brief Determine if the described cast is a no-op cast.
+  static bool isNoopCast(
+    Instruction::CastOps Opcode,  ///< Opcode of cast
+    Type *SrcTy,   ///< SrcTy of cast
+    Type *DstTy,   ///< DstTy of cast
+    Type *IntPtrTy ///< Integer type corresponding to Ptr types, or null
+  );
+
+  /// @brief Determine if this cast is a no-op cast.
+  bool isNoopCast(
+    Type *IntPtrTy ///< Integer type corresponding to pointer
+  ) const;
+
+  /// Determine how a pair of casts can be eliminated, if they can be at all.
+  /// This is a helper function for both CastInst and ConstantExpr.
+  /// @returns 0 if the CastInst pair can't be eliminated, otherwise
+  /// returns Instruction::CastOps value for a cast that can replace
+  /// the pair, casting SrcTy to DstTy.
+  /// @brief Determine if a cast pair is eliminable
+  static unsigned isEliminableCastPair(
+    Instruction::CastOps firstOpcode,  ///< Opcode of first cast
+    Instruction::CastOps secondOpcode, ///< Opcode of second cast
+    Type *SrcTy, ///< SrcTy of 1st cast
+    Type *MidTy, ///< DstTy of 1st cast & SrcTy of 2nd cast
+    Type *DstTy, ///< DstTy of 2nd cast
+    Type *SrcIntPtrTy, ///< Integer type corresponding to Ptr SrcTy, or null
+    Type *MidIntPtrTy, ///< Integer type corresponding to Ptr MidTy, or null
+    Type *DstIntPtrTy  ///< Integer type corresponding to Ptr DstTy, or null
+  );
+
+  /// @brief Return the opcode of this CastInst
+  Instruction::CastOps getOpcode() const {
+    return Instruction::CastOps(Instruction::getOpcode());
+  }
+
+  /// @brief Return the source type, as a convenience
+  Type* getSrcTy() const { return getOperand(0)->getType(); }
+  /// @brief Return the destination type, as a convenience
+  Type* getDestTy() const { return getType(); }
+
+  /// This method can be used to determine if a cast from S to DstTy using
+  /// Opcode op is valid or not.
+  /// @returns true iff the proposed cast is valid.
+  /// @brief Determine if a cast is valid without creating one.
+  static bool castIsValid(Instruction::CastOps op, Value *S, Type *DstTy);
+
+  /// @brief Methods for support type inquiry through isa, cast, and dyn_cast:
+  static inline bool classof(const Instruction *I) {
+    return I->isCast();
+  }
+  static inline bool classof(const Value *V) {
+    return isa<Instruction>(V) && classof(cast<Instruction>(V));
+  }
+};
+
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+//                               CmpInst Class
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+
+/// This class is the base class for the comparison instructions.
+/// @brief Abstract base class of comparison instructions.
+class CmpInst : public Instruction {
+  void *operator new(size_t, unsigned) LLVM_DELETED_FUNCTION;
+  CmpInst() LLVM_DELETED_FUNCTION;
+protected:
+  CmpInst(Type *ty, Instruction::OtherOps op, unsigned short pred,
+          Value *LHS, Value *RHS, const Twine &Name = "",
+          Instruction *InsertBefore = 0);
+
+  CmpInst(Type *ty, Instruction::OtherOps op, unsigned short pred,
+          Value *LHS, Value *RHS, const Twine &Name,
+          BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd);
+
+  virtual void anchor() LLVM_OVERRIDE; // Out of line virtual method.
+public:
+  /// This enumeration lists the possible predicates for CmpInst subclasses.
+  /// Values in the range 0-31 are reserved for FCmpInst, while values in the
+  /// range 32-64 are reserved for ICmpInst. This is necessary to ensure the
+  /// predicate values are not overlapping between the classes.
+  enum Predicate {
+    // Opcode              U L G E    Intuitive operation
+    FCMP_FALSE =  0,  ///< 0 0 0 0    Always false (always folded)
+    FCMP_OEQ   =  1,  ///< 0 0 0 1    True if ordered and equal
+    FCMP_OGT   =  2,  ///< 0 0 1 0    True if ordered and greater than
+    FCMP_OGE   =  3,  ///< 0 0 1 1    True if ordered and greater than or equal
+    FCMP_OLT   =  4,  ///< 0 1 0 0    True if ordered and less than
+    FCMP_OLE   =  5,  ///< 0 1 0 1    True if ordered and less than or equal
+    FCMP_ONE   =  6,  ///< 0 1 1 0    True if ordered and operands are unequal
+    FCMP_ORD   =  7,  ///< 0 1 1 1    True if ordered (no nans)
+    FCMP_UNO   =  8,  ///< 1 0 0 0    True if unordered: isnan(X) | isnan(Y)
+    FCMP_UEQ   =  9,  ///< 1 0 0 1    True if unordered or equal
+    FCMP_UGT   = 10,  ///< 1 0 1 0    True if unordered or greater than
+    FCMP_UGE   = 11,  ///< 1 0 1 1    True if unordered, greater than, or equal
+    FCMP_ULT   = 12,  ///< 1 1 0 0    True if unordered or less than
+    FCMP_ULE   = 13,  ///< 1 1 0 1    True if unordered, less than, or equal
+    FCMP_UNE   = 14,  ///< 1 1 1 0    True if unordered or not equal
+    FCMP_TRUE  = 15,  ///< 1 1 1 1    Always true (always folded)
+    FIRST_FCMP_PREDICATE = FCMP_FALSE,
+    LAST_FCMP_PREDICATE = FCMP_TRUE,
+    BAD_FCMP_PREDICATE = FCMP_TRUE + 1,
+    ICMP_EQ    = 32,  ///< equal
+    ICMP_NE    = 33,  ///< not equal
+    ICMP_UGT   = 34,  ///< unsigned greater than
+    ICMP_UGE   = 35,  ///< unsigned greater or equal
+    ICMP_ULT   = 36,  ///< unsigned less than
+    ICMP_ULE   = 37,  ///< unsigned less or equal
+    ICMP_SGT   = 38,  ///< signed greater than
+    ICMP_SGE   = 39,  ///< signed greater or equal
+    ICMP_SLT   = 40,  ///< signed less than
+    ICMP_SLE   = 41,  ///< signed less or equal
+    FIRST_ICMP_PREDICATE = ICMP_EQ,
+    LAST_ICMP_PREDICATE = ICMP_SLE,
+    BAD_ICMP_PREDICATE = ICMP_SLE + 1
+  };
+
+  // allocate space for exactly two operands
+  void *operator new(size_t s) {
+    return User::operator new(s, 2);
+  }
+  /// Construct a compare instruction, given the opcode, the predicate and
+  /// the two operands.  Optionally (if InstBefore is specified) insert the
+  /// instruction into a BasicBlock right before the specified instruction.
+  /// The specified Instruction is allowed to be a dereferenced end iterator.
+  /// @brief Create a CmpInst
+  static CmpInst *Create(OtherOps Op,
+                         unsigned short predicate, Value *S1,
+                         Value *S2, const Twine &Name = "",
+                         Instruction *InsertBefore = 0);
+
+  /// Construct a compare instruction, given the opcode, the predicate and the
+  /// two operands.  Also automatically insert this instruction to the end of
+  /// the BasicBlock specified.
+  /// @brief Create a CmpInst
+  static CmpInst *Create(OtherOps Op, unsigned short predicate, Value *S1,
+                         Value *S2, const Twine &Name, BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd);
+  
+  /// @brief Get the opcode casted to the right type
+  OtherOps getOpcode() const {
+    return static_cast<OtherOps>(Instruction::getOpcode());
+  }
+
+  /// @brief Return the predicate for this instruction.
+  Predicate getPredicate() const {
+    return Predicate(getSubclassDataFromInstruction());
+  }
+
+  /// @brief Set the predicate for this instruction to the specified value.
+  void setPredicate(Predicate P) { setInstructionSubclassData(P); }
+
+  static bool isFPPredicate(Predicate P) {
+    return P >= FIRST_FCMP_PREDICATE && P <= LAST_FCMP_PREDICATE;
+  }
+  
+  static bool isIntPredicate(Predicate P) {
+    return P >= FIRST_ICMP_PREDICATE && P <= LAST_ICMP_PREDICATE;
+  }
+  
+  bool isFPPredicate() const { return isFPPredicate(getPredicate()); }
+  bool isIntPredicate() const { return isIntPredicate(getPredicate()); }
+  
+  
+  /// For example, EQ -> NE, UGT -> ULE, SLT -> SGE,
+  ///              OEQ -> UNE, UGT -> OLE, OLT -> UGE, etc.
+  /// @returns the inverse predicate for the instruction's current predicate.
+  /// @brief Return the inverse of the instruction's predicate.
+  Predicate getInversePredicate() const {
+    return getInversePredicate(getPredicate());
+  }
+
+  /// For example, EQ -> NE, UGT -> ULE, SLT -> SGE,
+  ///              OEQ -> UNE, UGT -> OLE, OLT -> UGE, etc.
+  /// @returns the inverse predicate for predicate provided in \p pred.
+  /// @brief Return the inverse of a given predicate
+  static Predicate getInversePredicate(Predicate pred);
+
+  /// For example, EQ->EQ, SLE->SGE, ULT->UGT,
+  ///              OEQ->OEQ, ULE->UGE, OLT->OGT, etc.
+  /// @returns the predicate that would be the result of exchanging the two
+  /// operands of the CmpInst instruction without changing the result
+  /// produced.
+  /// @brief Return the predicate as if the operands were swapped
+  Predicate getSwappedPredicate() const {
+    return getSwappedPredicate(getPredicate());
+  }
+
+  /// This is a static version that you can use without an instruction
+  /// available.
+  /// @brief Return the predicate as if the operands were swapped.
+  static Predicate getSwappedPredicate(Predicate pred);
+
+  /// @brief Provide more efficient getOperand methods.
+  DECLARE_TRANSPARENT_OPERAND_ACCESSORS(Value);
+
+  /// This is just a convenience that dispatches to the subclasses.
+  /// @brief Swap the operands and adjust predicate accordingly to retain
+  /// the same comparison.
+  void swapOperands();
+
+  /// This is just a convenience that dispatches to the subclasses.
+  /// @brief Determine if this CmpInst is commutative.
+  bool isCommutative() const;
+
+  /// This is just a convenience that dispatches to the subclasses.
+  /// @brief Determine if this is an equals/not equals predicate.
+  bool isEquality() const;
+
+  /// @returns true if the comparison is signed, false otherwise.
+  /// @brief Determine if this instruction is using a signed comparison.
+  bool isSigned() const {
+    return isSigned(getPredicate());
+  }
+
+  /// @returns true if the comparison is unsigned, false otherwise.
+  /// @brief Determine if this instruction is using an unsigned comparison.
+  bool isUnsigned() const {
+    return isUnsigned(getPredicate());
+  }
+
+  /// This is just a convenience.
+  /// @brief Determine if this is true when both operands are the same.
+  bool isTrueWhenEqual() const {
+    return isTrueWhenEqual(getPredicate());
+  }
+
+  /// This is just a convenience.
+  /// @brief Determine if this is false when both operands are the same.
+  bool isFalseWhenEqual() const {
+    return isFalseWhenEqual(getPredicate());
+  }
+
+  /// @returns true if the predicate is unsigned, false otherwise.
+  /// @brief Determine if the predicate is an unsigned operation.
+  static bool isUnsigned(unsigned short predicate);
+
+  /// @returns true if the predicate is signed, false otherwise.
+  /// @brief Determine if the predicate is an signed operation.
+  static bool isSigned(unsigned short predicate);
+
+  /// @brief Determine if the predicate is an ordered operation.
+  static bool isOrdered(unsigned short predicate);
+
+  /// @brief Determine if the predicate is an unordered operation.
+  static bool isUnordered(unsigned short predicate);
+
+  /// Determine if the predicate is true when comparing a value with itself.
+  static bool isTrueWhenEqual(unsigned short predicate);
+
+  /// Determine if the predicate is false when comparing a value with itself.
+  static bool isFalseWhenEqual(unsigned short predicate);
+
+  /// @brief Methods for support type inquiry through isa, cast, and dyn_cast:
+  static inline bool classof(const Instruction *I) {
+    return I->getOpcode() == Instruction::ICmp ||
+           I->getOpcode() == Instruction::FCmp;
+  }
+  static inline bool classof(const Value *V) {
+    return isa<Instruction>(V) && classof(cast<Instruction>(V));
+  }
+  
+  /// @brief Create a result type for fcmp/icmp
+  static Type* makeCmpResultType(Type* opnd_type) {
+    if (VectorType* vt = dyn_cast<VectorType>(opnd_type)) {
+      return VectorType::get(Type::getInt1Ty(opnd_type->getContext()),
+                             vt->getNumElements());
+    }
+    return Type::getInt1Ty(opnd_type->getContext());
+  }
+private:
+  // Shadow Value::setValueSubclassData with a private forwarding method so that
+  // subclasses cannot accidentally use it.
+  void setValueSubclassData(unsigned short D) {
+    Value::setValueSubclassData(D);
+  }
+};
+
+
+// FIXME: these are redundant if CmpInst < BinaryOperator
+template <>
+struct OperandTraits<CmpInst> : public FixedNumOperandTraits<CmpInst, 2> {
+};
+
+DEFINE_TRANSPARENT_OPERAND_ACCESSORS(CmpInst, Value)
+
+} // End llvm namespace
+
+#endif

thirdparty/clang/include/llvm/IR/Instruction.def

@@ -0,0 +1,199 @@
+//===-- llvm/Instruction.def - File that describes Instructions -*- C++ -*-===//
+// 
+//                     The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure
+//
+// This file is distributed under the University of Illinois Open Source
+// License. See LICENSE.TXT for details.
+// 
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+//
+// This file contains descriptions of the various LLVM instructions.  This is
+// used as a central place for enumerating the different instructions and 
+// should eventually be the place to put comments about the instructions.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+
+// NOTE: NO INCLUDE GUARD DESIRED!
+
+// Provide definitions of macros so that users of this file do not have to 
+// define everything to use it...
+//
+#ifndef FIRST_TERM_INST
+#define FIRST_TERM_INST(num)
+#endif
+#ifndef HANDLE_TERM_INST
+#ifndef HANDLE_INST
+#define HANDLE_TERM_INST(num, opcode, Class)
+#else
+#define HANDLE_TERM_INST(num, opcode, Class) HANDLE_INST(num, opcode, Class)
+#endif
+#endif
+#ifndef LAST_TERM_INST
+#define LAST_TERM_INST(num)
+#endif
+
+#ifndef FIRST_BINARY_INST
+#define FIRST_BINARY_INST(num)
+#endif
+#ifndef HANDLE_BINARY_INST
+#ifndef HANDLE_INST
+#define HANDLE_BINARY_INST(num, opcode, instclass)
+#else
+#define HANDLE_BINARY_INST(num, opcode, Class) HANDLE_INST(num, opcode, Class)
+#endif
+#endif
+#ifndef LAST_BINARY_INST
+#define LAST_BINARY_INST(num)
+#endif
+
+#ifndef FIRST_MEMORY_INST
+#define FIRST_MEMORY_INST(num)
+#endif
+#ifndef HANDLE_MEMORY_INST
+#ifndef HANDLE_INST
+#define HANDLE_MEMORY_INST(num, opcode, Class)
+#else
+#define HANDLE_MEMORY_INST(num, opcode, Class) HANDLE_INST(num, opcode, Class)
+#endif
+#endif
+#ifndef LAST_MEMORY_INST
+#define LAST_MEMORY_INST(num)
+#endif
+
+#ifndef FIRST_CAST_INST
+#define FIRST_CAST_INST(num)
+#endif
+#ifndef HANDLE_CAST_INST
+#ifndef HANDLE_INST
+#define HANDLE_CAST_INST(num, opcode, Class)
+#else
+#define HANDLE_CAST_INST(num, opcode, Class) HANDLE_INST(num, opcode, Class)
+#endif
+#endif
+#ifndef LAST_CAST_INST
+#define LAST_CAST_INST(num)
+#endif
+
+#ifndef FIRST_OTHER_INST
+#define FIRST_OTHER_INST(num)
+#endif
+#ifndef HANDLE_OTHER_INST
+#ifndef HANDLE_INST
+#define HANDLE_OTHER_INST(num, opcode, Class)
+#else
+#define HANDLE_OTHER_INST(num, opcode, Class) HANDLE_INST(num, opcode, Class)
+#endif
+#endif
+#ifndef LAST_OTHER_INST
+#define LAST_OTHER_INST(num)
+#endif
+
+
+// Terminator Instructions - These instructions are used to terminate a basic
+// block of the program.   Every basic block must end with one of these
+// instructions for it to be a well formed basic block.
+//
+ FIRST_TERM_INST  ( 1)
+HANDLE_TERM_INST  ( 1, Ret        , ReturnInst)
+HANDLE_TERM_INST  ( 2, Br         , BranchInst)
+HANDLE_TERM_INST  ( 3, Switch     , SwitchInst)
+HANDLE_TERM_INST  ( 4, IndirectBr , IndirectBrInst)
+HANDLE_TERM_INST  ( 5, Invoke     , InvokeInst)
+HANDLE_TERM_INST  ( 6, Resume     , ResumeInst)
+HANDLE_TERM_INST  ( 7, Unreachable, UnreachableInst)
+  LAST_TERM_INST  ( 7)
+
+// Standard binary operators...
+ FIRST_BINARY_INST( 8)
+HANDLE_BINARY_INST( 8, Add  , BinaryOperator)
+HANDLE_BINARY_INST( 9, FAdd , BinaryOperator)
+HANDLE_BINARY_INST(10, Sub  , BinaryOperator)
+HANDLE_BINARY_INST(11, FSub , BinaryOperator)
+HANDLE_BINARY_INST(12, Mul  , BinaryOperator)
+HANDLE_BINARY_INST(13, FMul , BinaryOperator)
+HANDLE_BINARY_INST(14, UDiv , BinaryOperator)
+HANDLE_BINARY_INST(15, SDiv , BinaryOperator)
+HANDLE_BINARY_INST(16, FDiv , BinaryOperator)
+HANDLE_BINARY_INST(17, URem , BinaryOperator)
+HANDLE_BINARY_INST(18, SRem , BinaryOperator)
+HANDLE_BINARY_INST(19, FRem , BinaryOperator)
+
+// Logical operators (integer operands)
+HANDLE_BINARY_INST(20, Shl  , BinaryOperator) // Shift left  (logical)
+HANDLE_BINARY_INST(21, LShr , BinaryOperator) // Shift right (logical)
+HANDLE_BINARY_INST(22, AShr , BinaryOperator) // Shift right (arithmetic)
+HANDLE_BINARY_INST(23, And  , BinaryOperator)
+HANDLE_BINARY_INST(24, Or   , BinaryOperator)
+HANDLE_BINARY_INST(25, Xor  , BinaryOperator)
+  LAST_BINARY_INST(25)
+
+// Memory operators...
+ FIRST_MEMORY_INST(26)
+HANDLE_MEMORY_INST(26, Alloca, AllocaInst)  // Stack management
+HANDLE_MEMORY_INST(27, Load  , LoadInst  )  // Memory manipulation instrs
+HANDLE_MEMORY_INST(28, Store , StoreInst )
+HANDLE_MEMORY_INST(29, GetElementPtr, GetElementPtrInst)
+HANDLE_MEMORY_INST(30, Fence , FenceInst )
+HANDLE_MEMORY_INST(31, AtomicCmpXchg , AtomicCmpXchgInst )
+HANDLE_MEMORY_INST(32, AtomicRMW , AtomicRMWInst )
+  LAST_MEMORY_INST(32)
+
+// Cast operators ...
+// NOTE: The order matters here because CastInst::isEliminableCastPair 
+// NOTE: (see Instructions.cpp) encodes a table based on this ordering.
+ FIRST_CAST_INST(33)
+HANDLE_CAST_INST(33, Trunc   , TruncInst   )  // Truncate integers
+HANDLE_CAST_INST(34, ZExt    , ZExtInst    )  // Zero extend integers
+HANDLE_CAST_INST(35, SExt    , SExtInst    )  // Sign extend integers
+HANDLE_CAST_INST(36, FPToUI  , FPToUIInst  )  // floating point -> UInt
+HANDLE_CAST_INST(37, FPToSI  , FPToSIInst  )  // floating point -> SInt
+HANDLE_CAST_INST(38, UIToFP  , UIToFPInst  )  // UInt -> floating point
+HANDLE_CAST_INST(39, SIToFP  , SIToFPInst  )  // SInt -> floating point
+HANDLE_CAST_INST(40, FPTrunc , FPTruncInst )  // Truncate floating point
+HANDLE_CAST_INST(41, FPExt   , FPExtInst   )  // Extend floating point
+HANDLE_CAST_INST(42, PtrToInt, PtrToIntInst)  // Pointer -> Integer
+HANDLE_CAST_INST(43, IntToPtr, IntToPtrInst)  // Integer -> Pointer
+HANDLE_CAST_INST(44, BitCast , BitCastInst )  // Type cast
+  LAST_CAST_INST(44)
+
+// Other operators...
+ FIRST_OTHER_INST(45)
+HANDLE_OTHER_INST(45, ICmp   , ICmpInst   )  // Integer comparison instruction
+HANDLE_OTHER_INST(46, FCmp   , FCmpInst   )  // Floating point comparison instr.
+HANDLE_OTHER_INST(47, PHI    , PHINode    )  // PHI node instruction
+HANDLE_OTHER_INST(48, Call   , CallInst   )  // Call a function
+HANDLE_OTHER_INST(49, Select , SelectInst )  // select instruction
+HANDLE_OTHER_INST(50, UserOp1, Instruction)  // May be used internally in a pass
+HANDLE_OTHER_INST(51, UserOp2, Instruction)  // Internal to passes only
+HANDLE_OTHER_INST(52, VAArg  , VAArgInst  )  // vaarg instruction
+HANDLE_OTHER_INST(53, ExtractElement, ExtractElementInst)// extract from vector
+HANDLE_OTHER_INST(54, InsertElement, InsertElementInst)  // insert into vector
+HANDLE_OTHER_INST(55, ShuffleVector, ShuffleVectorInst)  // shuffle two vectors.
+HANDLE_OTHER_INST(56, ExtractValue, ExtractValueInst)// extract from aggregate
+HANDLE_OTHER_INST(57, InsertValue, InsertValueInst)  // insert into aggregate
+HANDLE_OTHER_INST(58, LandingPad, LandingPadInst)  // Landing pad instruction.
+  LAST_OTHER_INST(58)
+
+#undef  FIRST_TERM_INST
+#undef HANDLE_TERM_INST
+#undef   LAST_TERM_INST
+
+#undef  FIRST_BINARY_INST
+#undef HANDLE_BINARY_INST
+#undef   LAST_BINARY_INST
+
+#undef  FIRST_MEMORY_INST
+#undef HANDLE_MEMORY_INST
+#undef   LAST_MEMORY_INST
+
+#undef  FIRST_CAST_INST
+#undef HANDLE_CAST_INST
+#undef   LAST_CAST_INST
+
+#undef  FIRST_OTHER_INST
+#undef HANDLE_OTHER_INST
+#undef   LAST_OTHER_INST
+
+#ifdef HANDLE_INST
+#undef HANDLE_INST
+#endif

thirdparty/clang/include/llvm/IR/Instruction.h

@@ -0,0 +1,467 @@
+//===-- llvm/Instruction.h - Instruction class definition -------*- C++ -*-===//
+//
+//                     The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure
+//
+// This file is distributed under the University of Illinois Open Source
+// License. See LICENSE.TXT for details.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+//
+// This file contains the declaration of the Instruction class, which is the
+// base class for all of the LLVM instructions.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+
+#ifndef LLVM_IR_INSTRUCTION_H
+#define LLVM_IR_INSTRUCTION_H
+
+#include "llvm/ADT/ilist_node.h"
+#include "llvm/IR/User.h"
+#include "llvm/Support/DebugLoc.h"
+
+namespace llvm {
+
+class FastMathFlags;
+class LLVMContext;
+class MDNode;
+
+template<typename ValueSubClass, typename ItemParentClass>
+  class SymbolTableListTraits;
+
+class Instruction : public User, public ilist_node<Instruction> {
+  void operator=(const Instruction &) LLVM_DELETED_FUNCTION;
+  Instruction(const Instruction &) LLVM_DELETED_FUNCTION;
+
+  BasicBlock *Parent;
+  DebugLoc DbgLoc;                         // 'dbg' Metadata cache.
+
+  enum {
+    /// HasMetadataBit - This is a bit stored in the SubClassData field which
+    /// indicates whether this instruction has metadata attached to it or not.
+    HasMetadataBit = 1 << 15
+  };
+public:
+  // Out of line virtual method, so the vtable, etc has a home.
+  ~Instruction();
+
+  /// use_back - Specialize the methods defined in Value, as we know that an
+  /// instruction can only be used by other instructions.
+  Instruction       *use_back()       { return cast<Instruction>(*use_begin());}
+  const Instruction *use_back() const { return cast<Instruction>(*use_begin());}
+
+  inline const BasicBlock *getParent() const { return Parent; }
+  inline       BasicBlock *getParent()       { return Parent; }
+
+  /// removeFromParent - This method unlinks 'this' from the containing basic
+  /// block, but does not delete it.
+  ///
+  void removeFromParent();
+
+  /// eraseFromParent - This method unlinks 'this' from the containing basic
+  /// block and deletes it.
+  ///
+  void eraseFromParent();
+
+  /// insertBefore - Insert an unlinked instructions into a basic block
+  /// immediately before the specified instruction.
+  void insertBefore(Instruction *InsertPos);
+
+  /// insertAfter - Insert an unlinked instructions into a basic block
+  /// immediately after the specified instruction.
+  void insertAfter(Instruction *InsertPos);
+
+  /// moveBefore - Unlink this instruction from its current basic block and
+  /// insert it into the basic block that MovePos lives in, right before
+  /// MovePos.
+  void moveBefore(Instruction *MovePos);
+
+  //===--------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+  // Subclass classification.
+  //===--------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+
+  /// getOpcode() returns a member of one of the enums like Instruction::Add.
+  unsigned getOpcode() const { return getValueID() - InstructionVal; }
+
+  const char *getOpcodeName() const { return getOpcodeName(getOpcode()); }
+  bool isTerminator() const { return isTerminator(getOpcode()); }
+  bool isBinaryOp() const { return isBinaryOp(getOpcode()); }
+  bool isShift() { return isShift(getOpcode()); }
+  bool isCast() const { return isCast(getOpcode()); }
+
+  static const char* getOpcodeName(unsigned OpCode);
+
+  static inline bool isTerminator(unsigned OpCode) {
+    return OpCode >= TermOpsBegin && OpCode < TermOpsEnd;
+  }
+
+  static inline bool isBinaryOp(unsigned Opcode) {
+    return Opcode >= BinaryOpsBegin && Opcode < BinaryOpsEnd;
+  }
+
+  /// @brief Determine if the Opcode is one of the shift instructions.
+  static inline bool isShift(unsigned Opcode) {
+    return Opcode >= Shl && Opcode <= AShr;
+  }
+
+  /// isLogicalShift - Return true if this is a logical shift left or a logical
+  /// shift right.
+  inline bool isLogicalShift() const {
+    return getOpcode() == Shl || getOpcode() == LShr;
+  }
+
+  /// isArithmeticShift - Return true if this is an arithmetic shift right.
+  inline bool isArithmeticShift() const {
+    return getOpcode() == AShr;
+  }
+
+  /// @brief Determine if the OpCode is one of the CastInst instructions.
+  static inline bool isCast(unsigned OpCode) {
+    return OpCode >= CastOpsBegin && OpCode < CastOpsEnd;
+  }
+
+  //===--------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+  // Metadata manipulation.
+  //===--------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+
+  /// hasMetadata() - Return true if this instruction has any metadata attached
+  /// to it.
+  bool hasMetadata() const {
+    return !DbgLoc.isUnknown() || hasMetadataHashEntry();
+  }
+
+  /// hasMetadataOtherThanDebugLoc - Return true if this instruction has
+  /// metadata attached to it other than a debug location.
+  bool hasMetadataOtherThanDebugLoc() const {
+    return hasMetadataHashEntry();
+  }
+
+  /// getMetadata - Get the metadata of given kind attached to this Instruction.
+  /// If the metadata is not found then return null.
+  MDNode *getMetadata(unsigned KindID) const {
+    if (!hasMetadata()) return 0;
+    return getMetadataImpl(KindID);
+  }
+
+  /// getMetadata - Get the metadata of given kind attached to this Instruction.
+  /// If the metadata is not found then return null.
+  MDNode *getMetadata(StringRef Kind) const {
+    if (!hasMetadata()) return 0;
+    return getMetadataImpl(Kind);
+  }
+
+  /// getAllMetadata - Get all metadata attached to this Instruction.  The first
+  /// element of each pair returned is the KindID, the second element is the
+  /// metadata value.  This list is returned sorted by the KindID.
+  void getAllMetadata(SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<unsigned, MDNode*> > &MDs)const{
+    if (hasMetadata())
+      getAllMetadataImpl(MDs);
+  }
+
+  /// getAllMetadataOtherThanDebugLoc - This does the same thing as
+  /// getAllMetadata, except that it filters out the debug location.
+  void getAllMetadataOtherThanDebugLoc(SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<unsigned,
+                                       MDNode*> > &MDs) const {
+    if (hasMetadataOtherThanDebugLoc())
+      getAllMetadataOtherThanDebugLocImpl(MDs);
+  }
+
+  /// setMetadata - Set the metadata of the specified kind to the specified
+  /// node.  This updates/replaces metadata if already present, or removes it if
+  /// Node is null.
+  void setMetadata(unsigned KindID, MDNode *Node);
+  void setMetadata(StringRef Kind, MDNode *Node);
+
+  /// setDebugLoc - Set the debug location information for this instruction.
+  void setDebugLoc(const DebugLoc &Loc) { DbgLoc = Loc; }
+
+  /// getDebugLoc - Return the debug location for this node as a DebugLoc.
+  const DebugLoc &getDebugLoc() const { return DbgLoc; }
+
+  /// Set or clear the unsafe-algebra flag on this instruction, which must be an
+  /// operator which supports this flag. See LangRef.html for the meaning of
+  /// this flag.
+  void setHasUnsafeAlgebra(bool B);
+
+  /// Set or clear the no-nans flag on this instruction, which must be an
+  /// operator which supports this flag. See LangRef.html for the meaning of
+  /// this flag.
+  void setHasNoNaNs(bool B);
+
+  /// Set or clear the no-infs flag on this instruction, which must be an
+  /// operator which supports this flag. See LangRef.html for the meaning of
+  /// this flag.
+  void setHasNoInfs(bool B);
+
+  /// Set or clear the no-signed-zeros flag on this instruction, which must be
+  /// an operator which supports this flag. See LangRef.html for the meaning of
+  /// this flag.
+  void setHasNoSignedZeros(bool B);
+
+  /// Set or clear the allow-reciprocal flag on this instruction, which must be
+  /// an operator which supports this flag. See LangRef.html for the meaning of
+  /// this flag.
+  void setHasAllowReciprocal(bool B);
+
+  /// Convenience function for setting all the fast-math flags on this
+  /// instruction, which must be an operator which supports these flags. See
+  /// LangRef.html for the meaning of these flats.
+  void setFastMathFlags(FastMathFlags FMF);
+
+  /// Determine whether the unsafe-algebra flag is set.
+  bool hasUnsafeAlgebra() const;
+
+  /// Determine whether the no-NaNs flag is set.
+  bool hasNoNaNs() const;
+
+  /// Determine whether the no-infs flag is set.
+  bool hasNoInfs() const;
+
+  /// Determine whether the no-signed-zeros flag is set.
+  bool hasNoSignedZeros() const;
+
+  /// Determine whether the allow-reciprocal flag is set.
+  bool hasAllowReciprocal() const;
+
+  /// Convenience function for getting all the fast-math flags, which must be an
+  /// operator which supports these flags. See LangRef.html for the meaning of
+  /// these flats.
+  FastMathFlags getFastMathFlags() const;
+
+  /// Copy I's fast-math flags
+  void copyFastMathFlags(const Instruction *I);
+
+private:
+  /// hasMetadataHashEntry - Return true if we have an entry in the on-the-side
+  /// metadata hash.
+  bool hasMetadataHashEntry() const {
+    return (getSubclassDataFromValue() & HasMetadataBit) != 0;
+  }
+
+  // These are all implemented in Metadata.cpp.
+  MDNode *getMetadataImpl(unsigned KindID) const;
+  MDNode *getMetadataImpl(StringRef Kind) const;
+  void getAllMetadataImpl(SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<unsigned,MDNode*> > &)const;
+  void getAllMetadataOtherThanDebugLocImpl(SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<unsigned,
+                                           MDNode*> > &) const;
+  void clearMetadataHashEntries();
+public:
+  //===--------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+  // Predicates and helper methods.
+  //===--------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+
+
+  /// isAssociative - Return true if the instruction is associative:
+  ///
+  ///   Associative operators satisfy:  x op (y op z) === (x op y) op z
+  ///
+  /// In LLVM, the Add, Mul, And, Or, and Xor operators are associative.
+  ///
+  bool isAssociative() const;
+  static bool isAssociative(unsigned op);
+
+  /// isCommutative - Return true if the instruction is commutative:
+  ///
+  ///   Commutative operators satisfy: (x op y) === (y op x)
+  ///
+  /// In LLVM, these are the associative operators, plus SetEQ and SetNE, when
+  /// applied to any type.
+  ///
+  bool isCommutative() const { return isCommutative(getOpcode()); }
+  static bool isCommutative(unsigned op);
+
+  /// isIdempotent - Return true if the instruction is idempotent:
+  ///
+  ///   Idempotent operators satisfy:  x op x === x
+  ///
+  /// In LLVM, the And and Or operators are idempotent.
+  ///
+  bool isIdempotent() const { return isIdempotent(getOpcode()); }
+  static bool isIdempotent(unsigned op);
+
+  /// isNilpotent - Return true if the instruction is nilpotent:
+  ///
+  ///   Nilpotent operators satisfy:  x op x === Id,
+  ///
+  ///   where Id is the identity for the operator, i.e. a constant such that
+  ///     x op Id === x and Id op x === x for all x.
+  ///
+  /// In LLVM, the Xor operator is nilpotent.
+  ///
+  bool isNilpotent() const { return isNilpotent(getOpcode()); }
+  static bool isNilpotent(unsigned op);
+
+  /// mayWriteToMemory - Return true if this instruction may modify memory.
+  ///
+  bool mayWriteToMemory() const;
+
+  /// mayReadFromMemory - Return true if this instruction may read memory.
+  ///
+  bool mayReadFromMemory() const;
+
+  /// mayReadOrWriteMemory - Return true if this instruction may read or
+  /// write memory.
+  ///
+  bool mayReadOrWriteMemory() const {
+    return mayReadFromMemory() || mayWriteToMemory();
+  }
+
+  /// mayThrow - Return true if this instruction may throw an exception.
+  ///
+  bool mayThrow() const;
+
+  /// mayReturn - Return true if this is a function that may return.
+  /// this is true for all normal instructions. The only exception
+  /// is functions that are marked with the 'noreturn' attribute.
+  ///
+  bool mayReturn() const;
+
+  /// mayHaveSideEffects - Return true if the instruction may have side effects.
+  ///
+  /// Note that this does not consider malloc and alloca to have side
+  /// effects because the newly allocated memory is completely invisible to
+  /// instructions which don't used the returned value.  For cases where this
+  /// matters, isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute may be more appropriate.
+  bool mayHaveSideEffects() const {
+    return mayWriteToMemory() || mayThrow() || !mayReturn();
+  }
+
+  /// clone() - Create a copy of 'this' instruction that is identical in all
+  /// ways except the following:
+  ///   * The instruction has no parent
+  ///   * The instruction has no name
+  ///
+  Instruction *clone() const;
+
+  /// isIdenticalTo - Return true if the specified instruction is exactly
+  /// identical to the current one.  This means that all operands match and any
+  /// extra information (e.g. load is volatile) agree.
+  bool isIdenticalTo(const Instruction *I) const;
+
+  /// isIdenticalToWhenDefined - This is like isIdenticalTo, except that it
+  /// ignores the SubclassOptionalData flags, which specify conditions
+  /// under which the instruction's result is undefined.
+  bool isIdenticalToWhenDefined(const Instruction *I) const;
+
+  /// When checking for operation equivalence (using isSameOperationAs) it is
+  /// sometimes useful to ignore certain attributes.
+  enum OperationEquivalenceFlags {
+    /// Check for equivalence ignoring load/store alignment.
+    CompareIgnoringAlignment = 1<<0,
+    /// Check for equivalence treating a type and a vector of that type
+    /// as equivalent.
+    CompareUsingScalarTypes = 1<<1
+  };
+
+  /// This function determines if the specified instruction executes the same
+  /// operation as the current one. This means that the opcodes, type, operand
+  /// types and any other factors affecting the operation must be the same. This
+  /// is similar to isIdenticalTo except the operands themselves don't have to
+  /// be identical.
+  /// @returns true if the specified instruction is the same operation as
+  /// the current one.
+  /// @brief Determine if one instruction is the same operation as another.
+  bool isSameOperationAs(const Instruction *I, unsigned flags = 0) const;
+
+  /// isUsedOutsideOfBlock - Return true if there are any uses of this
+  /// instruction in blocks other than the specified block.  Note that PHI nodes
+  /// are considered to evaluate their operands in the corresponding predecessor
+  /// block.
+  bool isUsedOutsideOfBlock(const BasicBlock *BB) const;
+
+
+  /// Methods for support type inquiry through isa, cast, and dyn_cast:
+  static inline bool classof(const Value *V) {
+    return V->getValueID() >= Value::InstructionVal;
+  }
+
+  //----------------------------------------------------------------------
+  // Exported enumerations.
+  //
+  enum TermOps {       // These terminate basic blocks
+#define  FIRST_TERM_INST(N)             TermOpsBegin = N,
+#define HANDLE_TERM_INST(N, OPC, CLASS) OPC = N,
+#define   LAST_TERM_INST(N)             TermOpsEnd = N+1
+#include "llvm/IR/Instruction.def"
+  };
+
+  enum BinaryOps {
+#define  FIRST_BINARY_INST(N)             BinaryOpsBegin = N,
+#define HANDLE_BINARY_INST(N, OPC, CLASS) OPC = N,
+#define   LAST_BINARY_INST(N)             BinaryOpsEnd = N+1
+#include "llvm/IR/Instruction.def"
+  };
+
+  enum MemoryOps {
+#define  FIRST_MEMORY_INST(N)             MemoryOpsBegin = N,
+#define HANDLE_MEMORY_INST(N, OPC, CLASS) OPC = N,
+#define   LAST_MEMORY_INST(N)             MemoryOpsEnd = N+1
+#include "llvm/IR/Instruction.def"
+  };
+
+  enum CastOps {
+#define  FIRST_CAST_INST(N)             CastOpsBegin = N,
+#define HANDLE_CAST_INST(N, OPC, CLASS) OPC = N,
+#define   LAST_CAST_INST(N)             CastOpsEnd = N+1
+#include "llvm/IR/Instruction.def"
+  };
+
+  enum OtherOps {
+#define  FIRST_OTHER_INST(N)             OtherOpsBegin = N,
+#define HANDLE_OTHER_INST(N, OPC, CLASS) OPC = N,
+#define   LAST_OTHER_INST(N)             OtherOpsEnd = N+1
+#include "llvm/IR/Instruction.def"
+  };
+private:
+  // Shadow Value::setValueSubclassData with a private forwarding method so that
+  // subclasses cannot accidentally use it.
+  void setValueSubclassData(unsigned short D) {
+    Value::setValueSubclassData(D);
+  }
+  unsigned short getSubclassDataFromValue() const {
+    return Value::getSubclassDataFromValue();
+  }
+
+  void setHasMetadataHashEntry(bool V) {
+    setValueSubclassData((getSubclassDataFromValue() & ~HasMetadataBit) |
+                         (V ? HasMetadataBit : 0));
+  }
+
+  friend class SymbolTableListTraits<Instruction, BasicBlock>;
+  void setParent(BasicBlock *P);
+protected:
+  // Instruction subclasses can stick up to 15 bits of stuff into the
+  // SubclassData field of instruction with these members.
+
+  // Verify that only the low 15 bits are used.
+  void setInstructionSubclassData(unsigned short D) {
+    assert((D & HasMetadataBit) == 0 && "Out of range value put into field");
+    setValueSubclassData((getSubclassDataFromValue() & HasMetadataBit) | D);
+  }
+
+  unsigned getSubclassDataFromInstruction() const {
+    return getSubclassDataFromValue() & ~HasMetadataBit;
+  }
+
+  Instruction(Type *Ty, unsigned iType, Use *Ops, unsigned NumOps,
+              Instruction *InsertBefore = 0);
+  Instruction(Type *Ty, unsigned iType, Use *Ops, unsigned NumOps,
+              BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd);
+  virtual Instruction *clone_impl() const = 0;
+
+};
+
+// Instruction* is only 4-byte aligned.
+template<>
+class PointerLikeTypeTraits<Instruction*> {
+  typedef Instruction* PT;
+public:
+  static inline void *getAsVoidPointer(PT P) { return P; }
+  static inline PT getFromVoidPointer(void *P) {
+    return static_cast<PT>(P);
+  }
+  enum { NumLowBitsAvailable = 2 };
+};
+
+} // End llvm namespace
+
+#endif

thirdparty/clang/include/llvm/IR/IntrinsicInst.h

@@ -0,0 +1,316 @@
+//===-- llvm/IntrinsicInst.h - Intrinsic Instruction Wrappers ---*- C++ -*-===//
+//
+//                     The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure
+//
+// This file is distributed under the University of Illinois Open Source
+// License. See LICENSE.TXT for details.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+//
+// This file defines classes that make it really easy to deal with intrinsic
+// functions with the isa/dyncast family of functions.  In particular, this
+// allows you to do things like:
+//
+//     if (MemCpyInst *MCI = dyn_cast<MemCpyInst>(Inst))
+//        ... MCI->getDest() ... MCI->getSource() ...
+//
+// All intrinsic function calls are instances of the call instruction, so these
+// are all subclasses of the CallInst class.  Note that none of these classes
+// has state or virtual methods, which is an important part of this gross/neat
+// hack working.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+
+#ifndef LLVM_IR_INTRINSICINST_H
+#define LLVM_IR_INTRINSICINST_H
+
+#include "llvm/IR/Constants.h"
+#include "llvm/IR/Function.h"
+#include "llvm/IR/Instructions.h"
+#include "llvm/IR/Intrinsics.h"
+
+namespace llvm {
+  /// IntrinsicInst - A useful wrapper class for inspecting calls to intrinsic
+  /// functions.  This allows the standard isa/dyncast/cast functionality to
+  /// work with calls to intrinsic functions.
+  class IntrinsicInst : public CallInst {
+    IntrinsicInst() LLVM_DELETED_FUNCTION;
+    IntrinsicInst(const IntrinsicInst&) LLVM_DELETED_FUNCTION;
+    void operator=(const IntrinsicInst&) LLVM_DELETED_FUNCTION;
+  public:
+    /// getIntrinsicID - Return the intrinsic ID of this intrinsic.
+    ///
+    Intrinsic::ID getIntrinsicID() const {
+      return (Intrinsic::ID)getCalledFunction()->getIntrinsicID();
+    }
+
+    // Methods for support type inquiry through isa, cast, and dyn_cast:
+    static inline bool classof(const CallInst *I) {
+      if (const Function *CF = I->getCalledFunction())
+        return CF->isIntrinsic();
+      return false;
+    }
+    static inline bool classof(const Value *V) {
+      return isa<CallInst>(V) && classof(cast<CallInst>(V));
+    }
+  };
+
+  /// DbgInfoIntrinsic - This is the common base class for debug info intrinsics
+  ///
+  class DbgInfoIntrinsic : public IntrinsicInst {
+  public:
+
+    // Methods for support type inquiry through isa, cast, and dyn_cast:
+    static inline bool classof(const IntrinsicInst *I) {
+      switch (I->getIntrinsicID()) {
+      case Intrinsic::dbg_declare:
+      case Intrinsic::dbg_value:
+        return true;
+      default: return false;
+      }
+    }
+    static inline bool classof(const Value *V) {
+      return isa<IntrinsicInst>(V) && classof(cast<IntrinsicInst>(V));
+    }
+
+    static Value *StripCast(Value *C);
+  };
+
+  /// DbgDeclareInst - This represents the llvm.dbg.declare instruction.
+  ///
+  class DbgDeclareInst : public DbgInfoIntrinsic {
+  public:
+    Value *getAddress() const;
+    MDNode *getVariable() const { return cast<MDNode>(getArgOperand(1)); }
+
+    // Methods for support type inquiry through isa, cast, and dyn_cast:
+    static inline bool classof(const IntrinsicInst *I) {
+      return I->getIntrinsicID() == Intrinsic::dbg_declare;
+    }
+    static inline bool classof(const Value *V) {
+      return isa<IntrinsicInst>(V) && classof(cast<IntrinsicInst>(V));
+    }
+  };
+
+  /// DbgValueInst - This represents the llvm.dbg.value instruction.
+  ///
+  class DbgValueInst : public DbgInfoIntrinsic {
+  public:
+    const Value *getValue() const;
+    Value *getValue();
+    uint64_t getOffset() const {
+      return cast<ConstantInt>(
+                          const_cast<Value*>(getArgOperand(1)))->getZExtValue();
+    }
+    MDNode *getVariable() const { return cast<MDNode>(getArgOperand(2)); }
+
+    // Methods for support type inquiry through isa, cast, and dyn_cast:
+    static inline bool classof(const IntrinsicInst *I) {
+      return I->getIntrinsicID() == Intrinsic::dbg_value;
+    }
+    static inline bool classof(const Value *V) {
+      return isa<IntrinsicInst>(V) && classof(cast<IntrinsicInst>(V));
+    }
+  };
+
+  /// MemIntrinsic - This is the common base class for memset/memcpy/memmove.
+  ///
+  class MemIntrinsic : public IntrinsicInst {
+  public:
+    Value *getRawDest() const { return const_cast<Value*>(getArgOperand(0)); }
+
+    Value *getLength() const { return const_cast<Value*>(getArgOperand(2)); }
+    ConstantInt *getAlignmentCst() const {
+      return cast<ConstantInt>(const_cast<Value*>(getArgOperand(3)));
+    }
+
+    unsigned getAlignment() const {
+      return getAlignmentCst()->getZExtValue();
+    }
+
+    ConstantInt *getVolatileCst() const {
+      return cast<ConstantInt>(const_cast<Value*>(getArgOperand(4)));
+    }
+    bool isVolatile() const {
+      return !getVolatileCst()->isZero();
+    }
+
+    unsigned getDestAddressSpace() const {
+      return cast<PointerType>(getRawDest()->getType())->getAddressSpace();
+    }
+
+    /// getDest - This is just like getRawDest, but it strips off any cast
+    /// instructions that feed it, giving the original input.  The returned
+    /// value is guaranteed to be a pointer.
+    Value *getDest() const { return getRawDest()->stripPointerCasts(); }
+
+    /// set* - Set the specified arguments of the instruction.
+    ///
+    void setDest(Value *Ptr) {
+      assert(getRawDest()->getType() == Ptr->getType() &&
+             "setDest called with pointer of wrong type!");
+      setArgOperand(0, Ptr);
+    }
+
+    void setLength(Value *L) {
+      assert(getLength()->getType() == L->getType() &&
+             "setLength called with value of wrong type!");
+      setArgOperand(2, L);
+    }
+
+    void setAlignment(Constant* A) {
+      setArgOperand(3, A);
+    }
+
+    void setVolatile(Constant* V) {
+      setArgOperand(4, V);
+    }
+
+    Type *getAlignmentType() const {
+      return getArgOperand(3)->getType();
+    }
+
+    // Methods for support type inquiry through isa, cast, and dyn_cast:
+    static inline bool classof(const IntrinsicInst *I) {
+      switch (I->getIntrinsicID()) {
+      case Intrinsic::memcpy:
+      case Intrinsic::memmove:
+      case Intrinsic::memset:
+        return true;
+      default: return false;
+      }
+    }
+    static inline bool classof(const Value *V) {
+      return isa<IntrinsicInst>(V) && classof(cast<IntrinsicInst>(V));
+    }
+  };
+
+  /// MemSetInst - This class wraps the llvm.memset intrinsic.
+  ///
+  class MemSetInst : public MemIntrinsic {
+  public:
+    /// get* - Return the arguments to the instruction.
+    ///
+    Value *getValue() const { return const_cast<Value*>(getArgOperand(1)); }
+
+    void setValue(Value *Val) {
+      assert(getValue()->getType() == Val->getType() &&
+             "setValue called with value of wrong type!");
+      setArgOperand(1, Val);
+    }
+
+    // Methods for support type inquiry through isa, cast, and dyn_cast:
+    static inline bool classof(const IntrinsicInst *I) {
+      return I->getIntrinsicID() == Intrinsic::memset;
+    }
+    static inline bool classof(const Value *V) {
+      return isa<IntrinsicInst>(V) && classof(cast<IntrinsicInst>(V));
+    }
+  };
+
+  /// MemTransferInst - This class wraps the llvm.memcpy/memmove intrinsics.
+  ///
+  class MemTransferInst : public MemIntrinsic {
+  public:
+    /// get* - Return the arguments to the instruction.
+    ///
+    Value *getRawSource() const { return const_cast<Value*>(getArgOperand(1)); }
+
+    /// getSource - This is just like getRawSource, but it strips off any cast
+    /// instructions that feed it, giving the original input.  The returned
+    /// value is guaranteed to be a pointer.
+    Value *getSource() const { return getRawSource()->stripPointerCasts(); }
+
+    unsigned getSourceAddressSpace() const {
+      return cast<PointerType>(getRawSource()->getType())->getAddressSpace();
+    }
+
+    void setSource(Value *Ptr) {
+      assert(getRawSource()->getType() == Ptr->getType() &&
+             "setSource called with pointer of wrong type!");
+      setArgOperand(1, Ptr);
+    }
+
+    // Methods for support type inquiry through isa, cast, and dyn_cast:
+    static inline bool classof(const IntrinsicInst *I) {
+      return I->getIntrinsicID() == Intrinsic::memcpy ||
+             I->getIntrinsicID() == Intrinsic::memmove;
+    }
+    static inline bool classof(const Value *V) {
+      return isa<IntrinsicInst>(V) && classof(cast<IntrinsicInst>(V));
+    }
+  };
+
+
+  /// MemCpyInst - This class wraps the llvm.memcpy intrinsic.
+  ///
+  class MemCpyInst : public MemTransferInst {
+  public:
+    // Methods for support type inquiry through isa, cast, and dyn_cast:
+    static inline bool classof(const IntrinsicInst *I) {
+      return I->getIntrinsicID() == Intrinsic::memcpy;
+    }
+    static inline bool classof(const Value *V) {
+      return isa<IntrinsicInst>(V) && classof(cast<IntrinsicInst>(V));
+    }
+  };
+
+  /// MemMoveInst - This class wraps the llvm.memmove intrinsic.
+  ///
+  class MemMoveInst : public MemTransferInst {
+  public:
+    // Methods for support type inquiry through isa, cast, and dyn_cast:
+    static inline bool classof(const IntrinsicInst *I) {
+      return I->getIntrinsicID() == Intrinsic::memmove;
+    }
+    static inline bool classof(const Value *V) {
+      return isa<IntrinsicInst>(V) && classof(cast<IntrinsicInst>(V));
+    }
+  };
+
+  /// VAStartInst - This represents the llvm.va_start intrinsic.
+  ///
+  class VAStartInst : public IntrinsicInst {
+  public:
+    static inline bool classof(const IntrinsicInst *I) {
+      return I->getIntrinsicID() == Intrinsic::vastart;
+    }
+    static inline bool classof(const Value *V) {
+      return isa<IntrinsicInst>(V) && classof(cast<IntrinsicInst>(V));
+    }
+
+    Value *getArgList() const { return const_cast<Value*>(getArgOperand(0)); }
+  };
+
+  /// VAEndInst - This represents the llvm.va_end intrinsic.
+  ///
+  class VAEndInst : public IntrinsicInst {
+  public:
+    static inline bool classof(const IntrinsicInst *I) {
+      return I->getIntrinsicID() == Intrinsic::vaend;
+    }
+    static inline bool classof(const Value *V) {
+      return isa<IntrinsicInst>(V) && classof(cast<IntrinsicInst>(V));
+    }
+
+    Value *getArgList() const { return const_cast<Value*>(getArgOperand(0)); }
+  };
+
+  /// VACopyInst - This represents the llvm.va_copy intrinsic.
+  ///
+  class VACopyInst : public IntrinsicInst {
+  public:
+    static inline bool classof(const IntrinsicInst *I) {
+      return I->getIntrinsicID() == Intrinsic::vacopy;
+    }
+    static inline bool classof(const Value *V) {
+      return isa<IntrinsicInst>(V) && classof(cast<IntrinsicInst>(V));
+    }
+
+    Value *getDest() const { return const_cast<Value*>(getArgOperand(0)); }
+    Value *getSrc() const { return const_cast<Value*>(getArgOperand(1)); }
+  };
+
+}
+
+#endif

thirdparty/clang/include/llvm/IR/Intrinsics.h

@@ -0,0 +1,128 @@
+//===-- llvm/Instrinsics.h - LLVM Intrinsic Function Handling ---*- C++ -*-===//
+//
+//                     The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure
+//
+// This file is distributed under the University of Illinois Open Source
+// License. See LICENSE.TXT for details.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+//
+// This file defines a set of enums which allow processing of intrinsic
+// functions.  Values of these enum types are returned by
+// Function::getIntrinsicID.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+
+#ifndef LLVM_IR_INTRINSICS_H
+#define LLVM_IR_INTRINSICS_H
+
+#include "llvm/ADT/ArrayRef.h"
+#include <string>
+
+namespace llvm {
+
+class Type;
+class FunctionType;
+class Function;
+class LLVMContext;
+class Module;
+class AttributeSet;
+
+/// Intrinsic Namespace - This namespace contains an enum with a value for
+/// every intrinsic/builtin function known by LLVM.  These enum values are
+/// returned by Function::getIntrinsicID().
+///
+namespace Intrinsic {
+  enum ID {
+    not_intrinsic = 0,   // Must be zero
+
+    // Get the intrinsic enums generated from Intrinsics.td
+#define GET_INTRINSIC_ENUM_VALUES
+#include "llvm/IR/Intrinsics.gen"
+#undef GET_INTRINSIC_ENUM_VALUES
+    , num_intrinsics
+  };
+  
+  /// Intrinsic::getName(ID) - Return the LLVM name for an intrinsic, such as
+  /// "llvm.ppc.altivec.lvx".
+  std::string getName(ID id, ArrayRef<Type*> Tys = ArrayRef<Type*>());
+  
+  /// Intrinsic::getType(ID) - Return the function type for an intrinsic.
+  ///
+  FunctionType *getType(LLVMContext &Context, ID id,
+                        ArrayRef<Type*> Tys = ArrayRef<Type*>());
+
+  /// Intrinsic::isOverloaded(ID) - Returns true if the intrinsic can be
+  /// overloaded.
+  bool isOverloaded(ID id);
+
+  /// Intrinsic::getAttributes(ID) - Return the attributes for an intrinsic.
+  ///
+  AttributeSet getAttributes(LLVMContext &C, ID id);
+
+  /// Intrinsic::getDeclaration(M, ID) - Create or insert an LLVM Function
+  /// declaration for an intrinsic, and return it.
+  ///
+  /// The Tys and numTys parameters are for intrinsics with overloaded types
+  /// (e.g., those using iAny, fAny, vAny, or iPTRAny). For a declaration for an
+  /// overloaded intrinsic, Tys should point to an array of numTys pointers to
+  /// Type, and must provide exactly one type for each overloaded type in the
+  /// intrinsic.
+  Function *getDeclaration(Module *M, ID id,
+                           ArrayRef<Type*> Tys = ArrayRef<Type*>());
+                           
+  /// Map a GCC builtin name to an intrinsic ID.
+  ID getIntrinsicForGCCBuiltin(const char *Prefix, const char *BuiltinName);
+  
+  /// IITDescriptor - This is a type descriptor which explains the type
+  /// requirements of an intrinsic.  This is returned by
+  /// getIntrinsicInfoTableEntries.
+  struct IITDescriptor {
+    enum IITDescriptorKind {
+      Void, MMX, Metadata, Half, Float, Double,
+      Integer, Vector, Pointer, Struct,
+      Argument, ExtendVecArgument, TruncVecArgument
+    } Kind;
+    
+    union {
+      unsigned Integer_Width;
+      unsigned Float_Width;
+      unsigned Vector_Width;
+      unsigned Pointer_AddressSpace;
+      unsigned Struct_NumElements;
+      unsigned Argument_Info;
+    };
+    
+    enum ArgKind {
+      AK_AnyInteger,
+      AK_AnyFloat,
+      AK_AnyVector,
+      AK_AnyPointer
+    };
+    unsigned getArgumentNumber() const {
+      assert(Kind == Argument || Kind == ExtendVecArgument || 
+             Kind == TruncVecArgument);
+      return Argument_Info >> 2;
+    }
+    ArgKind getArgumentKind() const {
+      assert(Kind == Argument || Kind == ExtendVecArgument || 
+             Kind == TruncVecArgument);
+      return (ArgKind)(Argument_Info&3);
+    }
+    
+    static IITDescriptor get(IITDescriptorKind K, unsigned Field) {
+      IITDescriptor Result = { K, { Field } };
+      return Result;
+    }
+  };
+  
+  /// getIntrinsicInfoTableEntries - Return the IIT table descriptor for the
+  /// specified intrinsic into an array of IITDescriptors.
+  /// 
+  void getIntrinsicInfoTableEntries(ID id, SmallVectorImpl<IITDescriptor> &T);
+  
+} // End Intrinsic namespace
+
+} // End llvm namespace
+
+#endif

thirdparty/clang/include/llvm/IR/LLVMContext.h

@@ -0,0 +1,114 @@
+//===-- llvm/LLVMContext.h - Class for managing "global" state --*- C++ -*-===//
+//
+//                     The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure
+//
+// This file is distributed under the University of Illinois Open Source
+// License. See LICENSE.TXT for details.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+//
+// This file declares LLVMContext, a container of "global" state in LLVM, such
+// as the global type and constant uniquing tables.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+
+#ifndef LLVM_IR_LLVMCONTEXT_H
+#define LLVM_IR_LLVMCONTEXT_H
+
+#include "llvm/Support/Compiler.h"
+
+namespace llvm {
+
+class LLVMContextImpl;
+class StringRef;
+class Twine;
+class Instruction;
+class Module;
+class SMDiagnostic;
+template <typename T> class SmallVectorImpl;
+
+/// This is an important class for using LLVM in a threaded context.  It
+/// (opaquely) owns and manages the core "global" data of LLVM's core 
+/// infrastructure, including the type and constant uniquing tables.
+/// LLVMContext itself provides no locking guarantees, so you should be careful
+/// to have one context per thread.
+class LLVMContext {
+public:
+  LLVMContextImpl *const pImpl;
+  LLVMContext();
+  ~LLVMContext();
+  
+  // Pinned metadata names, which always have the same value.  This is a
+  // compile-time performance optimization, not a correctness optimization.
+  enum {
+    MD_dbg = 0,  // "dbg"
+    MD_tbaa = 1, // "tbaa"
+    MD_prof = 2,  // "prof"
+    MD_fpmath = 3,  // "fpmath"
+    MD_range = 4, // "range"
+    MD_tbaa_struct = 5, // "tbaa.struct"
+    MD_invariant_load = 6 // "invariant.load"
+  };
+  
+  /// getMDKindID - Return a unique non-zero ID for the specified metadata kind.
+  /// This ID is uniqued across modules in the current LLVMContext.
+  unsigned getMDKindID(StringRef Name) const;
+  
+  /// getMDKindNames - Populate client supplied SmallVector with the name for
+  /// custom metadata IDs registered in this LLVMContext.
+  void getMDKindNames(SmallVectorImpl<StringRef> &Result) const;
+  
+  
+  typedef void (*InlineAsmDiagHandlerTy)(const SMDiagnostic&, void *Context,
+                                         unsigned LocCookie);
+  
+  /// setInlineAsmDiagnosticHandler - This method sets a handler that is invoked
+  /// when problems with inline asm are detected by the backend.  The first
+  /// argument is a function pointer and the second is a context pointer that
+  /// gets passed into the DiagHandler.
+  ///
+  /// LLVMContext doesn't take ownership or interpret either of these
+  /// pointers.
+  void setInlineAsmDiagnosticHandler(InlineAsmDiagHandlerTy DiagHandler,
+                                     void *DiagContext = 0);
+
+  /// getInlineAsmDiagnosticHandler - Return the diagnostic handler set by
+  /// setInlineAsmDiagnosticHandler.
+  InlineAsmDiagHandlerTy getInlineAsmDiagnosticHandler() const;
+
+  /// getInlineAsmDiagnosticContext - Return the diagnostic context set by
+  /// setInlineAsmDiagnosticHandler.
+  void *getInlineAsmDiagnosticContext() const;
+  
+  
+  /// emitError - Emit an error message to the currently installed error handler
+  /// with optional location information.  This function returns, so code should
+  /// be prepared to drop the erroneous construct on the floor and "not crash".
+  /// The generated code need not be correct.  The error message will be
+  /// implicitly prefixed with "error: " and should not end with a ".".
+  void emitError(unsigned LocCookie, const Twine &ErrorStr);
+  void emitError(const Instruction *I, const Twine &ErrorStr);
+  void emitError(const Twine &ErrorStr);
+
+private:
+  LLVMContext(LLVMContext&) LLVM_DELETED_FUNCTION;
+  void operator=(LLVMContext&) LLVM_DELETED_FUNCTION;
+
+  /// addModule - Register a module as being instantiated in this context.  If
+  /// the context is deleted, the module will be deleted as well.
+  void addModule(Module*);
+  
+  /// removeModule - Unregister a module from this context.
+  void removeModule(Module*);
+  
+  // Module needs access to the add/removeModule methods.
+  friend class Module;
+};
+
+/// getGlobalContext - Returns a global context.  This is for LLVM clients that
+/// only care about operating on a single thread.
+extern LLVMContext &getGlobalContext();
+
+}
+
+#endif

thirdparty/clang/include/llvm/IR/MDBuilder.h

@@ -0,0 +1,198 @@
+//===---- llvm/MDBuilder.h - Builder for LLVM metadata ----------*- C++ -*-===//
+//
+//                     The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure
+//
+// This file is distributed under the University of Illinois Open Source
+// License. See LICENSE.TXT for details.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+//
+// This file defines the MDBuilder class, which is used as a convenient way to
+// create LLVM metadata with a consistent and simplified interface.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+
+#ifndef LLVM_IR_MDBUILDER_H
+#define LLVM_IR_MDBUILDER_H
+
+#include "llvm/IR/Constants.h"
+#include "llvm/IR/DerivedTypes.h"
+#include "llvm/IR/Metadata.h"
+
+namespace llvm {
+
+class APInt;
+class LLVMContext;
+
+class MDBuilder {
+  LLVMContext &Context;
+
+public:
+  MDBuilder(LLVMContext &context) : Context(context) {}
+
+  /// \brief Return the given string as metadata.
+  MDString *createString(StringRef Str) {
+    return MDString::get(Context, Str);
+  }
+
+  //===------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+  // FPMath metadata.
+  //===------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+
+  /// \brief Return metadata with the given settings.  The special value 0.0
+  /// for the Accuracy parameter indicates the default (maximal precision)
+  /// setting.
+  MDNode *createFPMath(float Accuracy) {
+    if (Accuracy == 0.0)
+      return 0;
+    assert(Accuracy > 0.0 && "Invalid fpmath accuracy!");
+    Value *Op = ConstantFP::get(Type::getFloatTy(Context), Accuracy);
+    return MDNode::get(Context, Op);
+  }
+
+  //===------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+  // Prof metadata.
+  //===------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+
+  /// \brief Return metadata containing two branch weights.
+  MDNode *createBranchWeights(uint32_t TrueWeight, uint32_t FalseWeight) {
+    uint32_t Weights[] = { TrueWeight, FalseWeight };
+    return createBranchWeights(Weights);
+  }
+
+  /// \brief Return metadata containing a number of branch weights.
+  MDNode *createBranchWeights(ArrayRef<uint32_t> Weights) {
+    assert(Weights.size() >= 2 && "Need at least two branch weights!");
+
+    SmallVector<Value *, 4> Vals(Weights.size()+1);
+    Vals[0] = createString("branch_weights");
+
+    Type *Int32Ty = Type::getInt32Ty(Context);
+    for (unsigned i = 0, e = Weights.size(); i != e; ++i)
+      Vals[i+1] = ConstantInt::get(Int32Ty, Weights[i]);
+
+    return MDNode::get(Context, Vals);
+  }
+
+  //===------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+  // Range metadata.
+  //===------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+
+  /// \brief Return metadata describing the range [Lo, Hi).
+  MDNode *createRange(const APInt &Lo, const APInt &Hi) {
+    assert(Lo.getBitWidth() == Hi.getBitWidth() && "Mismatched bitwidths!");
+    // If the range is everything then it is useless.
+    if (Hi == Lo)
+      return 0;
+
+    // Return the range [Lo, Hi).
+    Type *Ty = IntegerType::get(Context, Lo.getBitWidth());
+    Value *Range[2] = { ConstantInt::get(Ty, Lo), ConstantInt::get(Ty, Hi) };
+    return MDNode::get(Context, Range);
+  }
+
+
+  //===------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+  // TBAA metadata.
+  //===------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+
+  /// \brief Return metadata appropriate for a TBAA root node.  Each returned
+  /// node is distinct from all other metadata and will never be identified
+  /// (uniqued) with anything else.
+  MDNode *createAnonymousTBAARoot() {
+    // To ensure uniqueness the root node is self-referential.
+    MDNode *Dummy = MDNode::getTemporary(Context, ArrayRef<Value*>());
+    MDNode *Root = MDNode::get(Context, Dummy);
+    // At this point we have
+    //   !0 = metadata !{}            <- dummy
+    //   !1 = metadata !{metadata !0} <- root
+    // Replace the dummy operand with the root node itself and delete the dummy.
+    Root->replaceOperandWith(0, Root);
+    MDNode::deleteTemporary(Dummy);
+    // We now have
+    //   !1 = metadata !{metadata !1} <- self-referential root
+    return Root;
+  }
+
+  /// \brief Return metadata appropriate for a TBAA root node with the given
+  /// name.  This may be identified (uniqued) with other roots with the same
+  /// name.
+  MDNode *createTBAARoot(StringRef Name) {
+    return MDNode::get(Context, createString(Name));
+  }
+
+  /// \brief Return metadata for a non-root TBAA node with the given name,
+  /// parent in the TBAA tree, and value for 'pointsToConstantMemory'.
+  MDNode *createTBAANode(StringRef Name, MDNode *Parent,
+                         bool isConstant = false) {
+    if (isConstant) {
+      Constant *Flags = ConstantInt::get(Type::getInt64Ty(Context), 1);
+      Value *Ops[3] = { createString(Name), Parent, Flags };
+      return MDNode::get(Context, Ops);
+    } else {
+      Value *Ops[2] = { createString(Name), Parent };
+      return MDNode::get(Context, Ops);
+    }
+  }
+
+  struct TBAAStructField {
+    uint64_t Offset;
+    uint64_t Size;
+    MDNode *TBAA;
+    TBAAStructField(uint64_t Offset, uint64_t Size, MDNode *TBAA) :
+      Offset(Offset), Size(Size), TBAA(TBAA) {}
+  };
+
+  /// \brief Return metadata for a tbaa.struct node with the given
+  /// struct field descriptions.
+  MDNode *createTBAAStructNode(ArrayRef<TBAAStructField> Fields) {
+    SmallVector<Value *, 4> Vals(Fields.size() * 3);
+    Type *Int64 = IntegerType::get(Context, 64);
+    for (unsigned i = 0, e = Fields.size(); i != e; ++i) {
+      Vals[i * 3 + 0] = ConstantInt::get(Int64, Fields[i].Offset);
+      Vals[i * 3 + 1] = ConstantInt::get(Int64, Fields[i].Size);
+      Vals[i * 3 + 2] = Fields[i].TBAA;
+    }
+    return MDNode::get(Context, Vals);
+  }
+
+  /// \brief Return metadata for a TBAA struct node in the type DAG
+  /// with the given name, a list of pairs (offset, field type in the type DAG).
+  MDNode *createTBAAStructTypeNode(StringRef Name,
+             ArrayRef<std::pair<uint64_t, MDNode*> > Fields) {
+    SmallVector<Value *, 4> Ops(Fields.size() * 2 + 1);
+    Type *Int64 = IntegerType::get(Context, 64);
+    Ops[0] = createString(Name);
+    for (unsigned i = 0, e = Fields.size(); i != e; ++i) {
+      Ops[i * 2 + 1] = ConstantInt::get(Int64, Fields[i].first);
+      Ops[i * 2 + 2] = Fields[i].second;
+    }
+    return MDNode::get(Context, Ops);
+  }
+
+  /// \brief Return metadata for a TBAA scalar type node with the
+  /// given name, an offset and a parent in the TBAA type DAG.
+  MDNode *createTBAAScalarTypeNode(StringRef Name, uint64_t Offset,
+                                   MDNode *Parent) {
+    SmallVector<Value *, 4> Ops(3);
+    Type *Int64 = IntegerType::get(Context, 64);
+    Ops[0] = createString(Name);
+    Ops[1] = ConstantInt::get(Int64, Offset);
+    Ops[2] = Parent;
+    return MDNode::get(Context, Ops);
+  }
+
+  /// \brief Return metadata for a TBAA tag node with the given
+  /// base type, access type and offset relative to the base type.
+  MDNode *createTBAAStructTagNode(MDNode *BaseType, MDNode *AccessType,
+                                  uint64_t Offset) {
+    Type *Int64 = IntegerType::get(Context, 64);
+    Value *Ops[3] = { BaseType, AccessType, ConstantInt::get(Int64, Offset) };
+    return MDNode::get(Context, Ops);
+  }
+
+};
+
+} // end namespace llvm
+
+#endif

thirdparty/clang/include/llvm/IR/Metadata.h

@@ -0,0 +1,242 @@
+//===-- llvm/Metadata.h - Metadata definitions ------------------*- C++ -*-===//
+//
+//                     The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure
+//
+// This file is distributed under the University of Illinois Open Source
+// License. See LICENSE.TXT for details.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+//
+/// @file
+/// This file contains the declarations for metadata subclasses.
+/// They represent the different flavors of metadata that live in LLVM.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+
+#ifndef LLVM_IR_METADATA_H
+#define LLVM_IR_METADATA_H
+
+#include "llvm/ADT/ArrayRef.h"
+#include "llvm/ADT/FoldingSet.h"
+#include "llvm/ADT/ilist_node.h"
+#include "llvm/IR/Value.h"
+
+namespace llvm {
+class Constant;
+class Instruction;
+class LLVMContext;
+class Module;
+template <typename T> class SmallVectorImpl;
+template<typename ValueSubClass, typename ItemParentClass>
+  class SymbolTableListTraits;
+
+
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+/// MDString - a single uniqued string.
+/// These are used to efficiently contain a byte sequence for metadata.
+/// MDString is always unnamed.
+class MDString : public Value {
+  virtual void anchor();
+  MDString(const MDString &) LLVM_DELETED_FUNCTION;
+
+  explicit MDString(LLVMContext &C);
+public:
+  static MDString *get(LLVMContext &Context, StringRef Str);
+  static MDString *get(LLVMContext &Context, const char *Str) {
+    return get(Context, Str ? StringRef(Str) : StringRef());
+  }
+
+  StringRef getString() const { return getName(); }
+
+  unsigned getLength() const { return (unsigned)getName().size(); }
+
+  typedef StringRef::iterator iterator;
+
+  /// begin() - Pointer to the first byte of the string.
+  iterator begin() const { return getName().begin(); }
+
+  /// end() - Pointer to one byte past the end of the string.
+  iterator end() const { return getName().end(); }
+
+  /// Methods for support type inquiry through isa, cast, and dyn_cast:
+  static bool classof(const Value *V) {
+    return V->getValueID() == MDStringVal;
+  }
+};
+
+
+class MDNodeOperand;
+
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+/// MDNode - a tuple of other values.
+class MDNode : public Value, public FoldingSetNode {
+  MDNode(const MDNode &) LLVM_DELETED_FUNCTION;
+  void operator=(const MDNode &) LLVM_DELETED_FUNCTION;
+  friend class MDNodeOperand;
+  friend class LLVMContextImpl;
+  friend struct FoldingSetTrait<MDNode>;
+
+  /// Hash - If the MDNode is uniqued cache the hash to speed up lookup.
+  unsigned Hash;
+
+  /// NumOperands - This many 'MDNodeOperand' items are co-allocated onto the
+  /// end of this MDNode.
+  unsigned NumOperands;
+
+  // Subclass data enums.
+  enum {
+    /// FunctionLocalBit - This bit is set if this MDNode is function local.
+    /// This is true when it (potentially transitively) contains a reference to
+    /// something in a function, like an argument, basicblock, or instruction.
+    FunctionLocalBit = 1 << 0,
+
+    /// NotUniquedBit - This is set on MDNodes that are not uniqued because they
+    /// have a null operand.
+    NotUniquedBit    = 1 << 1,
+
+    /// DestroyFlag - This bit is set by destroy() so the destructor can assert
+    /// that the node isn't being destroyed with a plain 'delete'.
+    DestroyFlag      = 1 << 2
+  };
+
+  // FunctionLocal enums.
+  enum FunctionLocalness {
+    FL_Unknown = -1,
+    FL_No = 0,
+    FL_Yes = 1
+  };
+
+  /// replaceOperand - Replace each instance of F from the operand list of this
+  /// node with T.
+  void replaceOperand(MDNodeOperand *Op, Value *NewVal);
+  ~MDNode();
+
+  MDNode(LLVMContext &C, ArrayRef<Value*> Vals, bool isFunctionLocal);
+
+  static MDNode *getMDNode(LLVMContext &C, ArrayRef<Value*> Vals,
+                           FunctionLocalness FL, bool Insert = true);
+public:
+  // Constructors and destructors.
+  static MDNode *get(LLVMContext &Context, ArrayRef<Value*> Vals);
+  // getWhenValsUnresolved - Construct MDNode determining function-localness
+  // from isFunctionLocal argument, not by analyzing Vals.
+  static MDNode *getWhenValsUnresolved(LLVMContext &Context,
+                                       ArrayRef<Value*> Vals,
+                                       bool isFunctionLocal);
+
+  static MDNode *getIfExists(LLVMContext &Context, ArrayRef<Value*> Vals);
+
+  /// getTemporary - Return a temporary MDNode, for use in constructing
+  /// cyclic MDNode structures. A temporary MDNode is not uniqued,
+  /// may be RAUW'd, and must be manually deleted with deleteTemporary.
+  static MDNode *getTemporary(LLVMContext &Context, ArrayRef<Value*> Vals);
+
+  /// deleteTemporary - Deallocate a node created by getTemporary. The
+  /// node must not have any users.
+  static void deleteTemporary(MDNode *N);
+
+  /// replaceOperandWith - Replace a specific operand.
+  void replaceOperandWith(unsigned i, Value *NewVal);
+
+  /// getOperand - Return specified operand.
+  Value *getOperand(unsigned i) const;
+
+  /// getNumOperands - Return number of MDNode operands.
+  unsigned getNumOperands() const { return NumOperands; }
+
+  /// isFunctionLocal - Return whether MDNode is local to a function.
+  bool isFunctionLocal() const {
+    return (getSubclassDataFromValue() & FunctionLocalBit) != 0;
+  }
+
+  // getFunction - If this metadata is function-local and recursively has a
+  // function-local operand, return the first such operand's parent function.
+  // Otherwise, return null. getFunction() should not be used for performance-
+  // critical code because it recursively visits all the MDNode's operands.
+  const Function *getFunction() const;
+
+  /// Profile - calculate a unique identifier for this MDNode to collapse
+  /// duplicates
+  void Profile(FoldingSetNodeID &ID) const;
+
+  /// Methods for support type inquiry through isa, cast, and dyn_cast:
+  static bool classof(const Value *V) {
+    return V->getValueID() == MDNodeVal;
+  }
+
+  /// Methods for metadata merging.
+  static MDNode *getMostGenericTBAA(MDNode *A, MDNode *B);
+  static MDNode *getMostGenericFPMath(MDNode *A, MDNode *B);
+  static MDNode *getMostGenericRange(MDNode *A, MDNode *B);
+private:
+  // destroy - Delete this node.  Only when there are no uses.
+  void destroy();
+
+  bool isNotUniqued() const {
+    return (getSubclassDataFromValue() & NotUniquedBit) != 0;
+  }
+  void setIsNotUniqued();
+
+  // Shadow Value::setValueSubclassData with a private forwarding method so that
+  // any future subclasses cannot accidentally use it.
+  void setValueSubclassData(unsigned short D) {
+    Value::setValueSubclassData(D);
+  }
+};
+
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+/// NamedMDNode - a tuple of MDNodes. Despite its name, a NamedMDNode isn't
+/// itself an MDNode. NamedMDNodes belong to modules, have names, and contain
+/// lists of MDNodes.
+class NamedMDNode : public ilist_node<NamedMDNode> {
+  friend class SymbolTableListTraits<NamedMDNode, Module>;
+  friend struct ilist_traits<NamedMDNode>;
+  friend class LLVMContextImpl;
+  friend class Module;
+  NamedMDNode(const NamedMDNode &) LLVM_DELETED_FUNCTION;
+
+  std::string Name;
+  Module *Parent;
+  void *Operands; // SmallVector<TrackingVH<MDNode>, 4>
+
+  void setParent(Module *M) { Parent = M; }
+
+  explicit NamedMDNode(const Twine &N);
+
+public:
+  /// eraseFromParent - Drop all references and remove the node from parent
+  /// module.
+  void eraseFromParent();
+
+  /// dropAllReferences - Remove all uses and clear node vector.
+  void dropAllReferences();
+
+  /// ~NamedMDNode - Destroy NamedMDNode.
+  ~NamedMDNode();
+
+  /// getParent - Get the module that holds this named metadata collection.
+  inline Module *getParent() { return Parent; }
+  inline const Module *getParent() const { return Parent; }
+
+  /// getOperand - Return specified operand.
+  MDNode *getOperand(unsigned i) const;
+
+  /// getNumOperands - Return the number of NamedMDNode operands.
+  unsigned getNumOperands() const;
+
+  /// addOperand - Add metadata operand.
+  void addOperand(MDNode *M);
+
+  /// getName - Return a constant reference to this named metadata's name.
+  StringRef getName() const;
+
+  /// print - Implement operator<< on NamedMDNode.
+  void print(raw_ostream &ROS, AssemblyAnnotationWriter *AAW = 0) const;
+
+  /// dump() - Allow printing of NamedMDNodes from the debugger.
+  void dump() const;
+};
+
+} // end llvm namespace
+
+#endif

thirdparty/clang/include/llvm/IR/Module.h

@@ -0,0 +1,589 @@
+//===-- llvm/Module.h - C++ class to represent a VM module ------*- C++ -*-===//
+//
+//                     The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure
+//
+// This file is distributed under the University of Illinois Open Source
+// License. See LICENSE.TXT for details.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+//
+/// @file
+/// Module.h This file contains the declarations for the Module class.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+
+#ifndef LLVM_IR_MODULE_H
+#define LLVM_IR_MODULE_H
+
+#include "llvm/ADT/OwningPtr.h"
+#include "llvm/IR/Function.h"
+#include "llvm/IR/GlobalAlias.h"
+#include "llvm/IR/GlobalVariable.h"
+#include "llvm/IR/Metadata.h"
+#include "llvm/Support/DataTypes.h"
+
+namespace llvm {
+
+class FunctionType;
+class GVMaterializer;
+class LLVMContext;
+class StructType;
+template<typename T> struct DenseMapInfo;
+template<typename KeyT, typename ValueT, typename KeyInfoT> class DenseMap;
+
+template<> struct ilist_traits<Function>
+  : public SymbolTableListTraits<Function, Module> {
+
+  // createSentinel is used to get hold of the node that marks the end of the
+  // list... (same trick used here as in ilist_traits<Instruction>)
+  Function *createSentinel() const {
+    return static_cast<Function*>(&Sentinel);
+  }
+  static void destroySentinel(Function*) {}
+
+  Function *provideInitialHead() const { return createSentinel(); }
+  Function *ensureHead(Function*) const { return createSentinel(); }
+  static void noteHead(Function*, Function*) {}
+
+private:
+  mutable ilist_node<Function> Sentinel;
+};
+
+template<> struct ilist_traits<GlobalVariable>
+  : public SymbolTableListTraits<GlobalVariable, Module> {
+  // createSentinel is used to create a node that marks the end of the list.
+  GlobalVariable *createSentinel() const {
+    return static_cast<GlobalVariable*>(&Sentinel);
+  }
+  static void destroySentinel(GlobalVariable*) {}
+
+  GlobalVariable *provideInitialHead() const { return createSentinel(); }
+  GlobalVariable *ensureHead(GlobalVariable*) const { return createSentinel(); }
+  static void noteHead(GlobalVariable*, GlobalVariable*) {}
+private:
+  mutable ilist_node<GlobalVariable> Sentinel;
+};
+
+template<> struct ilist_traits<GlobalAlias>
+  : public SymbolTableListTraits<GlobalAlias, Module> {
+  // createSentinel is used to create a node that marks the end of the list.
+  GlobalAlias *createSentinel() const {
+    return static_cast<GlobalAlias*>(&Sentinel);
+  }
+  static void destroySentinel(GlobalAlias*) {}
+
+  GlobalAlias *provideInitialHead() const { return createSentinel(); }
+  GlobalAlias *ensureHead(GlobalAlias*) const { return createSentinel(); }
+  static void noteHead(GlobalAlias*, GlobalAlias*) {}
+private:
+  mutable ilist_node<GlobalAlias> Sentinel;
+};
+
+template<> struct ilist_traits<NamedMDNode>
+  : public ilist_default_traits<NamedMDNode> {
+  // createSentinel is used to get hold of a node that marks the end of
+  // the list...
+  NamedMDNode *createSentinel() const {
+    return static_cast<NamedMDNode*>(&Sentinel);
+  }
+  static void destroySentinel(NamedMDNode*) {}
+
+  NamedMDNode *provideInitialHead() const { return createSentinel(); }
+  NamedMDNode *ensureHead(NamedMDNode*) const { return createSentinel(); }
+  static void noteHead(NamedMDNode*, NamedMDNode*) {}
+  void addNodeToList(NamedMDNode *) {}
+  void removeNodeFromList(NamedMDNode *) {}
+private:
+  mutable ilist_node<NamedMDNode> Sentinel;
+};
+
+/// A Module instance is used to store all the information related to an
+/// LLVM module. Modules are the top level container of all other LLVM
+/// Intermediate Representation (IR) objects. Each module directly contains a
+/// list of globals variables, a list of functions, a list of libraries (or
+/// other modules) this module depends on, a symbol table, and various data
+/// about the target's characteristics.
+///
+/// A module maintains a GlobalValRefMap object that is used to hold all
+/// constant references to global variables in the module.  When a global
+/// variable is destroyed, it should have no entries in the GlobalValueRefMap.
+/// @brief The main container class for the LLVM Intermediate Representation.
+class Module {
+/// @name Types And Enumerations
+/// @{
+public:
+  /// The type for the list of global variables.
+  typedef iplist<GlobalVariable> GlobalListType;
+  /// The type for the list of functions.
+  typedef iplist<Function> FunctionListType;
+  /// The type for the list of aliases.
+  typedef iplist<GlobalAlias> AliasListType;
+  /// The type for the list of named metadata.
+  typedef ilist<NamedMDNode> NamedMDListType;
+
+  /// The Global Variable iterator.
+  typedef GlobalListType::iterator                      global_iterator;
+  /// The Global Variable constant iterator.
+  typedef GlobalListType::const_iterator          const_global_iterator;
+
+  /// The Function iterators.
+  typedef FunctionListType::iterator                           iterator;
+  /// The Function constant iterator
+  typedef FunctionListType::const_iterator               const_iterator;
+
+  /// The Global Alias iterators.
+  typedef AliasListType::iterator                        alias_iterator;
+  /// The Global Alias constant iterator
+  typedef AliasListType::const_iterator            const_alias_iterator;
+
+  /// The named metadata iterators.
+  typedef NamedMDListType::iterator             named_metadata_iterator;
+  /// The named metadata constant interators.
+  typedef NamedMDListType::const_iterator const_named_metadata_iterator;
+
+  /// An enumeration for describing the endianess of the target machine.
+  enum Endianness  { AnyEndianness, LittleEndian, BigEndian };
+
+  /// An enumeration for describing the size of a pointer on the target machine.
+  enum PointerSize { AnyPointerSize, Pointer32, Pointer64 };
+
+  /// This enumeration defines the supported behaviors of module flags.
+  enum ModFlagBehavior {
+    /// Emits an error if two values disagree, otherwise the resulting value is
+    /// that of the operands.
+    Error = 1,
+
+    /// Emits a warning if two values disagree. The result value will be the
+    /// operand for the flag from the first module being linked.
+    Warning  = 2,
+
+    /// Adds a requirement that another module flag be present and have a
+    /// specified value after linking is performed. The value must be a metadata
+    /// pair, where the first element of the pair is the ID of the module flag
+    /// to be restricted, and the second element of the pair is the value the
+    /// module flag should be restricted to. This behavior can be used to
+    /// restrict the allowable results (via triggering of an error) of linking
+    /// IDs with the **Override** behavior.
+    Require = 3,
+
+    /// Uses the specified value, regardless of the behavior or value of the
+    /// other module. If both modules specify **Override**, but the values
+    /// differ, an error will be emitted.
+    Override = 4,
+
+    /// Appends the two values, which are required to be metadata nodes.
+    Append = 5,
+
+    /// Appends the two values, which are required to be metadata
+    /// nodes. However, duplicate entries in the second list are dropped
+    /// during the append operation.
+    AppendUnique = 6
+  };
+
+  struct ModuleFlagEntry {
+    ModFlagBehavior Behavior;
+    MDString *Key;
+    Value *Val;
+    ModuleFlagEntry(ModFlagBehavior B, MDString *K, Value *V)
+      : Behavior(B), Key(K), Val(V) {}
+  };
+
+/// @}
+/// @name Member Variables
+/// @{
+private:
+  LLVMContext &Context;           ///< The LLVMContext from which types and
+                                  ///< constants are allocated.
+  GlobalListType GlobalList;      ///< The Global Variables in the module
+  FunctionListType FunctionList;  ///< The Functions in the module
+  AliasListType AliasList;        ///< The Aliases in the module
+  NamedMDListType NamedMDList;    ///< The named metadata in the module
+  std::string GlobalScopeAsm;     ///< Inline Asm at global scope.
+  ValueSymbolTable *ValSymTab;    ///< Symbol table for values
+  OwningPtr<GVMaterializer> Materializer;  ///< Used to materialize GlobalValues
+  std::string ModuleID;           ///< Human readable identifier for the module
+  std::string TargetTriple;       ///< Platform target triple Module compiled on
+  std::string DataLayout;         ///< Target data description
+  void *NamedMDSymTab;            ///< NamedMDNode names.
+
+  friend class Constant;
+
+/// @}
+/// @name Constructors
+/// @{
+public:
+  /// The Module constructor. Note that there is no default constructor. You
+  /// must provide a name for the module upon construction.
+  explicit Module(StringRef ModuleID, LLVMContext& C);
+  /// The module destructor. This will dropAllReferences.
+  ~Module();
+
+/// @}
+/// @name Module Level Accessors
+/// @{
+
+  /// Get the module identifier which is, essentially, the name of the module.
+  /// @returns the module identifier as a string
+  const std::string &getModuleIdentifier() const { return ModuleID; }
+
+  /// Get the data layout string for the module's target platform.  This encodes
+  /// the type sizes and alignments expected by this module.
+  /// @returns the data layout as a string
+  const std::string &getDataLayout() const { return DataLayout; }
+
+  /// Get the target triple which is a string describing the target host.
+  /// @returns a string containing the target triple.
+  const std::string &getTargetTriple() const { return TargetTriple; }
+
+  /// Get the target endian information.
+  /// @returns Endianess - an enumeration for the endianess of the target
+  Endianness getEndianness() const;
+
+  /// Get the target pointer size.
+  /// @returns PointerSize - an enumeration for the size of the target's pointer
+  PointerSize getPointerSize() const;
+
+  /// Get the global data context.
+  /// @returns LLVMContext - a container for LLVM's global information
+  LLVMContext &getContext() const { return Context; }
+
+  /// Get any module-scope inline assembly blocks.
+  /// @returns a string containing the module-scope inline assembly blocks.
+  const std::string &getModuleInlineAsm() const { return GlobalScopeAsm; }
+
+/// @}
+/// @name Module Level Mutators
+/// @{
+
+  /// Set the module identifier.
+  void setModuleIdentifier(StringRef ID) { ModuleID = ID; }
+
+  /// Set the data layout
+  void setDataLayout(StringRef DL) { DataLayout = DL; }
+
+  /// Set the target triple.
+  void setTargetTriple(StringRef T) { TargetTriple = T; }
+
+  /// Set the module-scope inline assembly blocks.
+  void setModuleInlineAsm(StringRef Asm) {
+    GlobalScopeAsm = Asm;
+    if (!GlobalScopeAsm.empty() &&
+        GlobalScopeAsm[GlobalScopeAsm.size()-1] != '\n')
+      GlobalScopeAsm += '\n';
+  }
+
+  /// Append to the module-scope inline assembly blocks, automatically inserting
+  /// a separating newline if necessary.
+  void appendModuleInlineAsm(StringRef Asm) {
+    GlobalScopeAsm += Asm;
+    if (!GlobalScopeAsm.empty() &&
+        GlobalScopeAsm[GlobalScopeAsm.size()-1] != '\n')
+      GlobalScopeAsm += '\n';
+  }
+
+/// @}
+/// @name Generic Value Accessors
+/// @{
+
+  /// getNamedValue - Return the global value in the module with
+  /// the specified name, of arbitrary type.  This method returns null
+  /// if a global with the specified name is not found.
+  GlobalValue *getNamedValue(StringRef Name) const;
+
+  /// getMDKindID - Return a unique non-zero ID for the specified metadata kind.
+  /// This ID is uniqued across modules in the current LLVMContext.
+  unsigned getMDKindID(StringRef Name) const;
+
+  /// getMDKindNames - Populate client supplied SmallVector with the name for
+  /// custom metadata IDs registered in this LLVMContext.
+  void getMDKindNames(SmallVectorImpl<StringRef> &Result) const;
+
+  
+  typedef DenseMap<StructType*, unsigned, DenseMapInfo<StructType*> >
+                   NumeredTypesMapTy;
+
+  /// getTypeByName - Return the type with the specified name, or null if there
+  /// is none by that name.
+  StructType *getTypeByName(StringRef Name) const;
+
+/// @}
+/// @name Function Accessors
+/// @{
+
+  /// getOrInsertFunction - Look up the specified function in the module symbol
+  /// table.  Four possibilities:
+  ///   1. If it does not exist, add a prototype for the function and return it.
+  ///   2. If it exists, and has a local linkage, the existing function is
+  ///      renamed and a new one is inserted.
+  ///   3. Otherwise, if the existing function has the correct prototype, return
+  ///      the existing function.
+  ///   4. Finally, the function exists but has the wrong prototype: return the
+  ///      function with a constantexpr cast to the right prototype.
+  Constant *getOrInsertFunction(StringRef Name, FunctionType *T,
+                                AttributeSet AttributeList);
+
+  Constant *getOrInsertFunction(StringRef Name, FunctionType *T);
+
+  /// getOrInsertFunction - Look up the specified function in the module symbol
+  /// table.  If it does not exist, add a prototype for the function and return
+  /// it.  This function guarantees to return a constant of pointer to the
+  /// specified function type or a ConstantExpr BitCast of that type if the
+  /// named function has a different type.  This version of the method takes a
+  /// null terminated list of function arguments, which makes it easier for
+  /// clients to use.
+  Constant *getOrInsertFunction(StringRef Name,
+                                AttributeSet AttributeList,
+                                Type *RetTy, ...)  END_WITH_NULL;
+
+  /// getOrInsertFunction - Same as above, but without the attributes.
+  Constant *getOrInsertFunction(StringRef Name, Type *RetTy, ...)
+    END_WITH_NULL;
+
+  Constant *getOrInsertTargetIntrinsic(StringRef Name,
+                                       FunctionType *Ty,
+                                       AttributeSet AttributeList);
+
+  /// getFunction - Look up the specified function in the module symbol table.
+  /// If it does not exist, return null.
+  Function *getFunction(StringRef Name) const;
+
+/// @}
+/// @name Global Variable Accessors
+/// @{
+
+  /// getGlobalVariable - Look up the specified global variable in the module
+  /// symbol table.  If it does not exist, return null. If AllowInternal is set
+  /// to true, this function will return types that have InternalLinkage. By
+  /// default, these types are not returned.
+  GlobalVariable *getGlobalVariable(StringRef Name,
+                                    bool AllowInternal = false) const;
+
+  /// getNamedGlobal - Return the global variable in the module with the
+  /// specified name, of arbitrary type.  This method returns null if a global
+  /// with the specified name is not found.
+  GlobalVariable *getNamedGlobal(StringRef Name) const {
+    return getGlobalVariable(Name, true);
+  }
+
+  /// getOrInsertGlobal - Look up the specified global in the module symbol
+  /// table.
+  ///   1. If it does not exist, add a declaration of the global and return it.
+  ///   2. Else, the global exists but has the wrong type: return the function
+  ///      with a constantexpr cast to the right type.
+  ///   3. Finally, if the existing global is the correct declaration, return
+  ///      the existing global.
+  Constant *getOrInsertGlobal(StringRef Name, Type *Ty);
+
+/// @}
+/// @name Global Alias Accessors
+/// @{
+
+  /// getNamedAlias - Return the global alias in the module with the
+  /// specified name, of arbitrary type.  This method returns null if a global
+  /// with the specified name is not found.
+  GlobalAlias *getNamedAlias(StringRef Name) const;
+
+/// @}
+/// @name Named Metadata Accessors
+/// @{
+
+  /// getNamedMetadata - Return the NamedMDNode in the module with the
+  /// specified name. This method returns null if a NamedMDNode with the
+  /// specified name is not found.
+  NamedMDNode *getNamedMetadata(const Twine &Name) const;
+
+  /// getOrInsertNamedMetadata - Return the named MDNode in the module
+  /// with the specified name. This method returns a new NamedMDNode if a
+  /// NamedMDNode with the specified name is not found.
+  NamedMDNode *getOrInsertNamedMetadata(StringRef Name);
+
+  /// eraseNamedMetadata - Remove the given NamedMDNode from this module
+  /// and delete it.
+  void eraseNamedMetadata(NamedMDNode *NMD);
+
+/// @}
+/// @name Module Flags Accessors
+/// @{
+
+  /// getModuleFlagsMetadata - Returns the module flags in the provided vector.
+  void getModuleFlagsMetadata(SmallVectorImpl<ModuleFlagEntry> &Flags) const;
+
+  /// getModuleFlagsMetadata - Returns the NamedMDNode in the module that
+  /// represents module-level flags. This method returns null if there are no
+  /// module-level flags.
+  NamedMDNode *getModuleFlagsMetadata() const;
+
+  /// getOrInsertModuleFlagsMetadata - Returns the NamedMDNode in the module
+  /// that represents module-level flags. If module-level flags aren't found,
+  /// it creates the named metadata that contains them.
+  NamedMDNode *getOrInsertModuleFlagsMetadata();
+
+  /// addModuleFlag - Add a module-level flag to the module-level flags
+  /// metadata. It will create the module-level flags named metadata if it
+  /// doesn't already exist.
+  void addModuleFlag(ModFlagBehavior Behavior, StringRef Key, Value *Val);
+  void addModuleFlag(ModFlagBehavior Behavior, StringRef Key, uint32_t Val);
+  void addModuleFlag(MDNode *Node);
+
+/// @}
+/// @name Materialization
+/// @{
+
+  /// setMaterializer - Sets the GVMaterializer to GVM.  This module must not
+  /// yet have a Materializer.  To reset the materializer for a module that
+  /// already has one, call MaterializeAllPermanently first.  Destroying this
+  /// module will destroy its materializer without materializing any more
+  /// GlobalValues.  Without destroying the Module, there is no way to detach or
+  /// destroy a materializer without materializing all the GVs it controls, to
+  /// avoid leaving orphan unmaterialized GVs.
+  void setMaterializer(GVMaterializer *GVM);
+  /// getMaterializer - Retrieves the GVMaterializer, if any, for this Module.
+  GVMaterializer *getMaterializer() const { return Materializer.get(); }
+
+  /// isMaterializable - True if the definition of GV has yet to be materialized
+  /// from the GVMaterializer.
+  bool isMaterializable(const GlobalValue *GV) const;
+  /// isDematerializable - Returns true if this GV was loaded from this Module's
+  /// GVMaterializer and the GVMaterializer knows how to dematerialize the GV.
+  bool isDematerializable(const GlobalValue *GV) const;
+
+  /// Materialize - Make sure the GlobalValue is fully read.  If the module is
+  /// corrupt, this returns true and fills in the optional string with
+  /// information about the problem.  If successful, this returns false.
+  bool Materialize(GlobalValue *GV, std::string *ErrInfo = 0);
+  /// Dematerialize - If the GlobalValue is read in, and if the GVMaterializer
+  /// supports it, release the memory for the function, and set it up to be
+  /// materialized lazily.  If !isDematerializable(), this method is a noop.
+  void Dematerialize(GlobalValue *GV);
+
+  /// MaterializeAll - Make sure all GlobalValues in this Module are fully read.
+  /// If the module is corrupt, this returns true and fills in the optional
+  /// string with information about the problem.  If successful, this returns
+  /// false.
+  bool MaterializeAll(std::string *ErrInfo = 0);
+
+  /// MaterializeAllPermanently - Make sure all GlobalValues in this Module are
+  /// fully read and clear the Materializer.  If the module is corrupt, this
+  /// returns true, fills in the optional string with information about the
+  /// problem, and DOES NOT clear the old Materializer.  If successful, this
+  /// returns false.
+  bool MaterializeAllPermanently(std::string *ErrInfo = 0);
+
+/// @}
+/// @name Direct access to the globals list, functions list, and symbol table
+/// @{
+
+  /// Get the Module's list of global variables (constant).
+  const GlobalListType   &getGlobalList() const       { return GlobalList; }
+  /// Get the Module's list of global variables.
+  GlobalListType         &getGlobalList()             { return GlobalList; }
+  static iplist<GlobalVariable> Module::*getSublistAccess(GlobalVariable*) {
+    return &Module::GlobalList;
+  }
+  /// Get the Module's list of functions (constant).
+  const FunctionListType &getFunctionList() const     { return FunctionList; }
+  /// Get the Module's list of functions.
+  FunctionListType       &getFunctionList()           { return FunctionList; }
+  static iplist<Function> Module::*getSublistAccess(Function*) {
+    return &Module::FunctionList;
+  }
+  /// Get the Module's list of aliases (constant).
+  const AliasListType    &getAliasList() const        { return AliasList; }
+  /// Get the Module's list of aliases.
+  AliasListType          &getAliasList()              { return AliasList; }
+  static iplist<GlobalAlias> Module::*getSublistAccess(GlobalAlias*) {
+    return &Module::AliasList;
+  }
+  /// Get the Module's list of named metadata (constant).
+  const NamedMDListType  &getNamedMDList() const      { return NamedMDList; }
+  /// Get the Module's list of named metadata.
+  NamedMDListType        &getNamedMDList()            { return NamedMDList; }
+  static ilist<NamedMDNode> Module::*getSublistAccess(NamedMDNode*) {
+    return &Module::NamedMDList;
+  }
+  /// Get the symbol table of global variable and function identifiers
+  const ValueSymbolTable &getValueSymbolTable() const { return *ValSymTab; }
+  /// Get the Module's symbol table of global variable and function identifiers.
+  ValueSymbolTable       &getValueSymbolTable()       { return *ValSymTab; }
+
+/// @}
+/// @name Global Variable Iteration
+/// @{
+
+  global_iterator       global_begin()       { return GlobalList.begin(); }
+  const_global_iterator global_begin() const { return GlobalList.begin(); }
+  global_iterator       global_end  ()       { return GlobalList.end(); }
+  const_global_iterator global_end  () const { return GlobalList.end(); }
+  bool                  global_empty() const { return GlobalList.empty(); }
+
+/// @}
+/// @name Function Iteration
+/// @{
+
+  iterator                begin()       { return FunctionList.begin(); }
+  const_iterator          begin() const { return FunctionList.begin(); }
+  iterator                end  ()       { return FunctionList.end();   }
+  const_iterator          end  () const { return FunctionList.end();   }
+  size_t                  size() const  { return FunctionList.size(); }
+  bool                    empty() const { return FunctionList.empty(); }
+
+/// @}
+/// @name Alias Iteration
+/// @{
+
+  alias_iterator       alias_begin()            { return AliasList.begin(); }
+  const_alias_iterator alias_begin() const      { return AliasList.begin(); }
+  alias_iterator       alias_end  ()            { return AliasList.end();   }
+  const_alias_iterator alias_end  () const      { return AliasList.end();   }
+  size_t               alias_size () const      { return AliasList.size();  }
+  bool                 alias_empty() const      { return AliasList.empty(); }
+
+
+/// @}
+/// @name Named Metadata Iteration
+/// @{
+
+  named_metadata_iterator named_metadata_begin() { return NamedMDList.begin(); }
+  const_named_metadata_iterator named_metadata_begin() const {
+    return NamedMDList.begin();
+  }
+
+  named_metadata_iterator named_metadata_end() { return NamedMDList.end(); }
+  const_named_metadata_iterator named_metadata_end() const {
+    return NamedMDList.end();
+  }
+
+  size_t named_metadata_size() const { return NamedMDList.size();  }
+  bool named_metadata_empty() const { return NamedMDList.empty(); }
+
+
+/// @}
+/// @name Utility functions for printing and dumping Module objects
+/// @{
+
+  /// Print the module to an output stream with an optional
+  /// AssemblyAnnotationWriter.
+  void print(raw_ostream &OS, AssemblyAnnotationWriter *AAW) const;
+
+  /// Dump the module to stderr (for debugging).
+  void dump() const;
+  
+  /// This function causes all the subinstructions to "let go" of all references
+  /// that they are maintaining.  This allows one to 'delete' a whole class at
+  /// a time, even though there may be circular references... first all
+  /// references are dropped, and all use counts go to zero.  Then everything
+  /// is delete'd for real.  Note that no operations are valid on an object
+  /// that has "dropped all references", except operator delete.
+  void dropAllReferences();
+/// @}
+};
+
+/// An raw_ostream inserter for modules.
+inline raw_ostream &operator<<(raw_ostream &O, const Module &M) {
+  M.print(O, 0);
+  return O;
+}
+
+} // End llvm namespace
+
+#endif

thirdparty/clang/include/llvm/IR/OperandTraits.h

@@ -0,0 +1,160 @@
+//===-- llvm/OperandTraits.h - OperandTraits class definition ---*- C++ -*-===//
+//
+//                     The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure
+//
+// This file is distributed under the University of Illinois Open Source
+// License. See LICENSE.TXT for details.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+//
+// This file defines the traits classes that are handy for enforcing the correct
+// layout of various User subclasses. It also provides the means for accessing
+// the operands in the most efficient manner.
+//
+
+#ifndef LLVM_IR_OPERANDTRAITS_H
+#define LLVM_IR_OPERANDTRAITS_H
+
+#include "llvm/IR/User.h"
+
+namespace llvm {
+
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+//                          FixedNumOperand Trait Class
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+
+/// FixedNumOperandTraits - determine the allocation regime of the Use array
+/// when it is a prefix to the User object, and the number of Use objects is
+/// known at compile time.
+
+template <typename SubClass, unsigned ARITY>
+struct FixedNumOperandTraits {
+  static Use *op_begin(SubClass* U) {
+    return reinterpret_cast<Use*>(U) - ARITY;
+  }
+  static Use *op_end(SubClass* U) {
+    return reinterpret_cast<Use*>(U);
+  }
+  static unsigned operands(const User*) {
+    return ARITY;
+  }
+};
+
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+//                          OptionalOperand Trait Class
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+
+/// OptionalOperandTraits - when the number of operands may change at runtime.
+/// Naturally it may only decrease, because the allocations may not change.
+
+template <typename SubClass, unsigned ARITY = 1>
+struct OptionalOperandTraits : public FixedNumOperandTraits<SubClass, ARITY> {
+  static unsigned operands(const User *U) {
+    return U->getNumOperands();
+  }
+};
+
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+//                          VariadicOperand Trait Class
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+
+/// VariadicOperandTraits - determine the allocation regime of the Use array
+/// when it is a prefix to the User object, and the number of Use objects is
+/// only known at allocation time.
+
+template <typename SubClass, unsigned MINARITY = 0>
+struct VariadicOperandTraits {
+  static Use *op_begin(SubClass* U) {
+    return reinterpret_cast<Use*>(U) - static_cast<User*>(U)->getNumOperands();
+  }
+  static Use *op_end(SubClass* U) {
+    return reinterpret_cast<Use*>(U);
+  }
+  static unsigned operands(const User *U) {
+    return U->getNumOperands();
+  }
+};
+
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+//                          HungoffOperand Trait Class
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+
+/// HungoffOperandTraits - determine the allocation regime of the Use array
+/// when it is not a prefix to the User object, but allocated at an unrelated
+/// heap address.
+/// Assumes that the User subclass that is determined by this traits class
+/// has an OperandList member of type User::op_iterator. [Note: this is now
+/// trivially satisfied, because User has that member for historic reasons.]
+///
+/// This is the traits class that is needed when the Use array must be
+/// resizable.
+
+template <unsigned MINARITY = 1>
+struct HungoffOperandTraits {
+  static Use *op_begin(User* U) {
+    return U->OperandList;
+  }
+  static Use *op_end(User* U) {
+    return U->OperandList + U->getNumOperands();
+  }
+  static unsigned operands(const User *U) {
+    return U->getNumOperands();
+  }
+};
+
+/// Macro for generating in-class operand accessor declarations.
+/// It should only be called in the public section of the interface.
+///
+#define DECLARE_TRANSPARENT_OPERAND_ACCESSORS(VALUECLASS) \
+  public: \
+  inline VALUECLASS *getOperand(unsigned) const; \
+  inline void setOperand(unsigned, VALUECLASS*); \
+  inline op_iterator op_begin(); \
+  inline const_op_iterator op_begin() const; \
+  inline op_iterator op_end(); \
+  inline const_op_iterator op_end() const; \
+  protected: \
+  template <int> inline Use &Op(); \
+  template <int> inline const Use &Op() const; \
+  public: \
+  inline unsigned getNumOperands() const
+
+/// Macro for generating out-of-class operand accessor definitions
+#define DEFINE_TRANSPARENT_OPERAND_ACCESSORS(CLASS, VALUECLASS) \
+CLASS::op_iterator CLASS::op_begin() { \
+  return OperandTraits<CLASS>::op_begin(this); \
+} \
+CLASS::const_op_iterator CLASS::op_begin() const { \
+  return OperandTraits<CLASS>::op_begin(const_cast<CLASS*>(this)); \
+} \
+CLASS::op_iterator CLASS::op_end() { \
+  return OperandTraits<CLASS>::op_end(this); \
+} \
+CLASS::const_op_iterator CLASS::op_end() const { \
+  return OperandTraits<CLASS>::op_end(const_cast<CLASS*>(this)); \
+} \
+VALUECLASS *CLASS::getOperand(unsigned i_nocapture) const { \
+  assert(i_nocapture < OperandTraits<CLASS>::operands(this) \
+         && "getOperand() out of range!"); \
+  return cast_or_null<VALUECLASS>( \
+    OperandTraits<CLASS>::op_begin(const_cast<CLASS*>(this))[i_nocapture].get()); \
+} \
+void CLASS::setOperand(unsigned i_nocapture, VALUECLASS *Val_nocapture) { \
+  assert(i_nocapture < OperandTraits<CLASS>::operands(this) \
+         && "setOperand() out of range!"); \
+  OperandTraits<CLASS>::op_begin(this)[i_nocapture] = Val_nocapture; \
+} \
+unsigned CLASS::getNumOperands() const { \
+  return OperandTraits<CLASS>::operands(this); \
+} \
+template <int Idx_nocapture> Use &CLASS::Op() { \
+  return this->OpFrom<Idx_nocapture>(this); \
+} \
+template <int Idx_nocapture> const Use &CLASS::Op() const { \
+  return this->OpFrom<Idx_nocapture>(this); \
+}
+
+
+} // End llvm namespace
+
+#endif

thirdparty/clang/include/llvm/IR/Operator.h

@@ -0,0 +1,478 @@
+//===-- llvm/Operator.h - Operator utility subclass -------------*- C++ -*-===//
+//
+//                     The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure
+//
+// This file is distributed under the University of Illinois Open Source
+// License. See LICENSE.TXT for details.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+//
+// This file defines various classes for working with Instructions and
+// ConstantExprs.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+
+#ifndef LLVM_IR_OPERATOR_H
+#define LLVM_IR_OPERATOR_H
+
+#include "llvm/IR/Constants.h"
+#include "llvm/IR/DataLayout.h"
+#include "llvm/IR/DerivedTypes.h"
+#include "llvm/IR/Instruction.h"
+#include "llvm/IR/Type.h"
+#include "llvm/Support/GetElementPtrTypeIterator.h"
+
+namespace llvm {
+
+class GetElementPtrInst;
+class BinaryOperator;
+class ConstantExpr;
+
+/// Operator - This is a utility class that provides an abstraction for the
+/// common functionality between Instructions and ConstantExprs.
+///
+class Operator : public User {
+private:
+  // The Operator class is intended to be used as a utility, and is never itself
+  // instantiated.
+  void *operator new(size_t, unsigned) LLVM_DELETED_FUNCTION;
+  void *operator new(size_t s) LLVM_DELETED_FUNCTION;
+  Operator() LLVM_DELETED_FUNCTION;
+
+protected:
+  // NOTE: Cannot use LLVM_DELETED_FUNCTION because it's not legal to delete
+  // an overridden method that's not deleted in the base class. Cannot leave
+  // this unimplemented because that leads to an ODR-violation.
+  ~Operator();
+
+public:
+  /// getOpcode - Return the opcode for this Instruction or ConstantExpr.
+  ///
+  unsigned getOpcode() const {
+    if (const Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(this))
+      return I->getOpcode();
+    return cast<ConstantExpr>(this)->getOpcode();
+  }
+
+  /// getOpcode - If V is an Instruction or ConstantExpr, return its
+  /// opcode. Otherwise return UserOp1.
+  ///
+  static unsigned getOpcode(const Value *V) {
+    if (const Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(V))
+      return I->getOpcode();
+    if (const ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(V))
+      return CE->getOpcode();
+    return Instruction::UserOp1;
+  }
+
+  static inline bool classof(const Instruction *) { return true; }
+  static inline bool classof(const ConstantExpr *) { return true; }
+  static inline bool classof(const Value *V) {
+    return isa<Instruction>(V) || isa<ConstantExpr>(V);
+  }
+};
+
+/// OverflowingBinaryOperator - Utility class for integer arithmetic operators
+/// which may exhibit overflow - Add, Sub, and Mul. It does not include SDiv,
+/// despite that operator having the potential for overflow.
+///
+class OverflowingBinaryOperator : public Operator {
+public:
+  enum {
+    NoUnsignedWrap = (1 << 0),
+    NoSignedWrap   = (1 << 1)
+  };
+
+private:
+  friend class BinaryOperator;
+  friend class ConstantExpr;
+  void setHasNoUnsignedWrap(bool B) {
+    SubclassOptionalData =
+      (SubclassOptionalData & ~NoUnsignedWrap) | (B * NoUnsignedWrap);
+  }
+  void setHasNoSignedWrap(bool B) {
+    SubclassOptionalData =
+      (SubclassOptionalData & ~NoSignedWrap) | (B * NoSignedWrap);
+  }
+
+public:
+  /// hasNoUnsignedWrap - Test whether this operation is known to never
+  /// undergo unsigned overflow, aka the nuw property.
+  bool hasNoUnsignedWrap() const {
+    return SubclassOptionalData & NoUnsignedWrap;
+  }
+
+  /// hasNoSignedWrap - Test whether this operation is known to never
+  /// undergo signed overflow, aka the nsw property.
+  bool hasNoSignedWrap() const {
+    return (SubclassOptionalData & NoSignedWrap) != 0;
+  }
+
+  static inline bool classof(const Instruction *I) {
+    return I->getOpcode() == Instruction::Add ||
+           I->getOpcode() == Instruction::Sub ||
+           I->getOpcode() == Instruction::Mul ||
+           I->getOpcode() == Instruction::Shl;
+  }
+  static inline bool classof(const ConstantExpr *CE) {
+    return CE->getOpcode() == Instruction::Add ||
+           CE->getOpcode() == Instruction::Sub ||
+           CE->getOpcode() == Instruction::Mul ||
+           CE->getOpcode() == Instruction::Shl;
+  }
+  static inline bool classof(const Value *V) {
+    return (isa<Instruction>(V) && classof(cast<Instruction>(V))) ||
+           (isa<ConstantExpr>(V) && classof(cast<ConstantExpr>(V)));
+  }
+};
+
+/// PossiblyExactOperator - A udiv or sdiv instruction, which can be marked as
+/// "exact", indicating that no bits are destroyed.
+class PossiblyExactOperator : public Operator {
+public:
+  enum {
+    IsExact = (1 << 0)
+  };
+
+private:
+  friend class BinaryOperator;
+  friend class ConstantExpr;
+  void setIsExact(bool B) {
+    SubclassOptionalData = (SubclassOptionalData & ~IsExact) | (B * IsExact);
+  }
+
+public:
+  /// isExact - Test whether this division is known to be exact, with
+  /// zero remainder.
+  bool isExact() const {
+    return SubclassOptionalData & IsExact;
+  }
+
+  static bool isPossiblyExactOpcode(unsigned OpC) {
+    return OpC == Instruction::SDiv ||
+           OpC == Instruction::UDiv ||
+           OpC == Instruction::AShr ||
+           OpC == Instruction::LShr;
+  }
+  static inline bool classof(const ConstantExpr *CE) {
+    return isPossiblyExactOpcode(CE->getOpcode());
+  }
+  static inline bool classof(const Instruction *I) {
+    return isPossiblyExactOpcode(I->getOpcode());
+  }
+  static inline bool classof(const Value *V) {
+    return (isa<Instruction>(V) && classof(cast<Instruction>(V))) ||
+           (isa<ConstantExpr>(V) && classof(cast<ConstantExpr>(V)));
+  }
+};
+
+/// Convenience struct for specifying and reasoning about fast-math flags.
+class FastMathFlags {
+private:
+  friend class FPMathOperator;
+  unsigned Flags;
+  FastMathFlags(unsigned F) : Flags(F) { }
+
+public:
+  enum {
+    UnsafeAlgebra   = (1 << 0),
+    NoNaNs          = (1 << 1),
+    NoInfs          = (1 << 2),
+    NoSignedZeros   = (1 << 3),
+    AllowReciprocal = (1 << 4)
+  };
+
+  FastMathFlags() : Flags(0)
+  { }
+
+  /// Whether any flag is set
+  bool any() { return Flags != 0; }
+
+  /// Set all the flags to false
+  void clear() { Flags = 0; }
+
+  /// Flag queries
+  bool noNaNs()          { return 0 != (Flags & NoNaNs); }
+  bool noInfs()          { return 0 != (Flags & NoInfs); }
+  bool noSignedZeros()   { return 0 != (Flags & NoSignedZeros); }
+  bool allowReciprocal() { return 0 != (Flags & AllowReciprocal); }
+  bool unsafeAlgebra()   { return 0 != (Flags & UnsafeAlgebra); }
+
+  /// Flag setters
+  void setNoNaNs()          { Flags |= NoNaNs; }
+  void setNoInfs()          { Flags |= NoInfs; }
+  void setNoSignedZeros()   { Flags |= NoSignedZeros; }
+  void setAllowReciprocal() { Flags |= AllowReciprocal; }
+  void setUnsafeAlgebra() {
+    Flags |= UnsafeAlgebra;
+    setNoNaNs();
+    setNoInfs();
+    setNoSignedZeros();
+    setAllowReciprocal();
+  }
+};
+
+
+/// FPMathOperator - Utility class for floating point operations which can have
+/// information about relaxed accuracy requirements attached to them.
+class FPMathOperator : public Operator {
+private:
+  friend class Instruction;
+
+  void setHasUnsafeAlgebra(bool B) {
+    SubclassOptionalData =
+      (SubclassOptionalData & ~FastMathFlags::UnsafeAlgebra) |
+      (B * FastMathFlags::UnsafeAlgebra);
+
+    // Unsafe algebra implies all the others
+    if (B) {
+      setHasNoNaNs(true);
+      setHasNoInfs(true);
+      setHasNoSignedZeros(true);
+      setHasAllowReciprocal(true);
+    }
+  }
+  void setHasNoNaNs(bool B) {
+    SubclassOptionalData =
+      (SubclassOptionalData & ~FastMathFlags::NoNaNs) |
+      (B * FastMathFlags::NoNaNs);
+  }
+  void setHasNoInfs(bool B) {
+    SubclassOptionalData =
+      (SubclassOptionalData & ~FastMathFlags::NoInfs) |
+      (B * FastMathFlags::NoInfs);
+  }
+  void setHasNoSignedZeros(bool B) {
+    SubclassOptionalData =
+      (SubclassOptionalData & ~FastMathFlags::NoSignedZeros) |
+      (B * FastMathFlags::NoSignedZeros);
+  }
+  void setHasAllowReciprocal(bool B) {
+    SubclassOptionalData =
+      (SubclassOptionalData & ~FastMathFlags::AllowReciprocal) |
+      (B * FastMathFlags::AllowReciprocal);
+  }
+
+  /// Convenience function for setting all the fast-math flags
+  void setFastMathFlags(FastMathFlags FMF) {
+    SubclassOptionalData |= FMF.Flags;
+  }
+
+public:
+  /// Test whether this operation is permitted to be
+  /// algebraically transformed, aka the 'A' fast-math property.
+  bool hasUnsafeAlgebra() const {
+    return (SubclassOptionalData & FastMathFlags::UnsafeAlgebra) != 0;
+  }
+
+  /// Test whether this operation's arguments and results are to be
+  /// treated as non-NaN, aka the 'N' fast-math property.
+  bool hasNoNaNs() const {
+    return (SubclassOptionalData & FastMathFlags::NoNaNs) != 0;
+  }
+
+  /// Test whether this operation's arguments and results are to be
+  /// treated as NoN-Inf, aka the 'I' fast-math property.
+  bool hasNoInfs() const {
+    return (SubclassOptionalData & FastMathFlags::NoInfs) != 0;
+  }
+
+  /// Test whether this operation can treat the sign of zero
+  /// as insignificant, aka the 'S' fast-math property.
+  bool hasNoSignedZeros() const {
+    return (SubclassOptionalData & FastMathFlags::NoSignedZeros) != 0;
+  }
+
+  /// Test whether this operation is permitted to use
+  /// reciprocal instead of division, aka the 'R' fast-math property.
+  bool hasAllowReciprocal() const {
+    return (SubclassOptionalData & FastMathFlags::AllowReciprocal) != 0;
+  }
+
+  /// Convenience function for getting all the fast-math flags
+  FastMathFlags getFastMathFlags() const {
+    return FastMathFlags(SubclassOptionalData);
+  }
+
+  /// \brief Get the maximum error permitted by this operation in ULPs.  An
+  /// accuracy of 0.0 means that the operation should be performed with the
+  /// default precision.
+  float getFPAccuracy() const;
+
+  static inline bool classof(const Instruction *I) {
+    return I->getType()->isFPOrFPVectorTy();
+  }
+  static inline bool classof(const Value *V) {
+    return isa<Instruction>(V) && classof(cast<Instruction>(V));
+  }
+};
+
+
+/// ConcreteOperator - A helper template for defining operators for individual
+/// opcodes.
+template<typename SuperClass, unsigned Opc>
+class ConcreteOperator : public SuperClass {
+public:
+  static inline bool classof(const Instruction *I) {
+    return I->getOpcode() == Opc;
+  }
+  static inline bool classof(const ConstantExpr *CE) {
+    return CE->getOpcode() == Opc;
+  }
+  static inline bool classof(const Value *V) {
+    return (isa<Instruction>(V) && classof(cast<Instruction>(V))) ||
+           (isa<ConstantExpr>(V) && classof(cast<ConstantExpr>(V)));
+  }
+};
+
+class AddOperator
+  : public ConcreteOperator<OverflowingBinaryOperator, Instruction::Add> {
+};
+class SubOperator
+  : public ConcreteOperator<OverflowingBinaryOperator, Instruction::Sub> {
+};
+class MulOperator
+  : public ConcreteOperator<OverflowingBinaryOperator, Instruction::Mul> {
+};
+class ShlOperator
+  : public ConcreteOperator<OverflowingBinaryOperator, Instruction::Shl> {
+};
+
+
+class SDivOperator
+  : public ConcreteOperator<PossiblyExactOperator, Instruction::SDiv> {
+};
+class UDivOperator
+  : public ConcreteOperator<PossiblyExactOperator, Instruction::UDiv> {
+};
+class AShrOperator
+  : public ConcreteOperator<PossiblyExactOperator, Instruction::AShr> {
+};
+class LShrOperator
+  : public ConcreteOperator<PossiblyExactOperator, Instruction::LShr> {
+};
+
+
+
+class GEPOperator
+  : public ConcreteOperator<Operator, Instruction::GetElementPtr> {
+  enum {
+    IsInBounds = (1 << 0)
+  };
+
+  friend class GetElementPtrInst;
+  friend class ConstantExpr;
+  void setIsInBounds(bool B) {
+    SubclassOptionalData =
+      (SubclassOptionalData & ~IsInBounds) | (B * IsInBounds);
+  }
+
+public:
+  /// isInBounds - Test whether this is an inbounds GEP, as defined
+  /// by LangRef.html.
+  bool isInBounds() const {
+    return SubclassOptionalData & IsInBounds;
+  }
+
+  inline op_iterator       idx_begin()       { return op_begin()+1; }
+  inline const_op_iterator idx_begin() const { return op_begin()+1; }
+  inline op_iterator       idx_end()         { return op_end(); }
+  inline const_op_iterator idx_end()   const { return op_end(); }
+
+  Value *getPointerOperand() {
+    return getOperand(0);
+  }
+  const Value *getPointerOperand() const {
+    return getOperand(0);
+  }
+  static unsigned getPointerOperandIndex() {
+    return 0U;                      // get index for modifying correct operand
+  }
+
+  /// getPointerOperandType - Method to return the pointer operand as a
+  /// PointerType.
+  Type *getPointerOperandType() const {
+    return getPointerOperand()->getType();
+  }
+
+  /// getPointerAddressSpace - Method to return the address space of the
+  /// pointer operand.
+  unsigned getPointerAddressSpace() const {
+    return cast<PointerType>(getPointerOperandType())->getAddressSpace();
+  }
+
+  unsigned getNumIndices() const {  // Note: always non-negative
+    return getNumOperands() - 1;
+  }
+
+  bool hasIndices() const {
+    return getNumOperands() > 1;
+  }
+
+  /// hasAllZeroIndices - Return true if all of the indices of this GEP are
+  /// zeros.  If so, the result pointer and the first operand have the same
+  /// value, just potentially different types.
+  bool hasAllZeroIndices() const {
+    for (const_op_iterator I = idx_begin(), E = idx_end(); I != E; ++I) {
+      if (ConstantInt *C = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(I))
+        if (C->isZero())
+          continue;
+      return false;
+    }
+    return true;
+  }
+
+  /// hasAllConstantIndices - Return true if all of the indices of this GEP are
+  /// constant integers.  If so, the result pointer and the first operand have
+  /// a constant offset between them.
+  bool hasAllConstantIndices() const {
+    for (const_op_iterator I = idx_begin(), E = idx_end(); I != E; ++I) {
+      if (!isa<ConstantInt>(I))
+        return false;
+    }
+    return true;
+  }
+
+  /// \brief Accumulate the constant address offset of this GEP if possible.
+  ///
+  /// This routine accepts an APInt into which it will accumulate the constant
+  /// offset of this GEP if the GEP is in fact constant. If the GEP is not
+  /// all-constant, it returns false and the value of the offset APInt is
+  /// undefined (it is *not* preserved!). The APInt passed into this routine
+  /// must be at least as wide as the IntPtr type for the address space of
+  /// the base GEP pointer.
+  bool accumulateConstantOffset(const DataLayout &DL, APInt &Offset) const {
+    assert(Offset.getBitWidth() ==
+           DL.getPointerSizeInBits(getPointerAddressSpace()) &&
+           "The offset must have exactly as many bits as our pointer.");
+
+    for (gep_type_iterator GTI = gep_type_begin(this), GTE = gep_type_end(this);
+         GTI != GTE; ++GTI) {
+      ConstantInt *OpC = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(GTI.getOperand());
+      if (!OpC)
+        return false;
+      if (OpC->isZero())
+        continue;
+
+      // Handle a struct index, which adds its field offset to the pointer.
+      if (StructType *STy = dyn_cast<StructType>(*GTI)) {
+        unsigned ElementIdx = OpC->getZExtValue();
+        const StructLayout *SL = DL.getStructLayout(STy);
+        Offset += APInt(Offset.getBitWidth(),
+                        SL->getElementOffset(ElementIdx));
+        continue;
+      }
+
+      // For array or vector indices, scale the index by the size of the type.
+      APInt Index = OpC->getValue().sextOrTrunc(Offset.getBitWidth());
+      Offset += Index * APInt(Offset.getBitWidth(),
+                              DL.getTypeAllocSize(GTI.getIndexedType()));
+    }
+    return true;
+  }
+
+};
+
+} // End llvm namespace
+
+#endif

thirdparty/clang/include/llvm/IR/SymbolTableListTraits.h

@@ -0,0 +1,78 @@
+//===-- llvm/SymbolTableListTraits.h - Traits for iplist --------*- C++ -*-===//
+//
+//                     The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure
+//
+// This file is distributed under the University of Illinois Open Source
+// License. See LICENSE.TXT for details.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+//
+// This file defines a generic class that is used to implement the automatic
+// symbol table manipulation that occurs when you put (for example) a named
+// instruction into a basic block.
+//
+// The way that this is implemented is by using a special traits class with the
+// intrusive list that makes up the list of instructions in a basic block.  When
+// a new element is added to the list of instructions, the traits class is
+// notified, allowing the symbol table to be updated.
+//
+// This generic class implements the traits class.  It must be generic so that
+// it can work for all uses it, which include lists of instructions, basic
+// blocks, arguments, functions, global variables, etc...
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+
+#ifndef LLVM_IR_SYMBOLTABLELISTTRAITS_H
+#define LLVM_IR_SYMBOLTABLELISTTRAITS_H
+
+#include "llvm/ADT/ilist.h"
+
+namespace llvm {
+class ValueSymbolTable;
+  
+template<typename NodeTy> class ilist_iterator;
+template<typename NodeTy, typename Traits> class iplist;
+template<typename Ty> struct ilist_traits;
+
+// ValueSubClass   - The type of objects that I hold, e.g. Instruction.
+// ItemParentClass - The type of object that owns the list, e.g. BasicBlock.
+//
+template<typename ValueSubClass, typename ItemParentClass>
+class SymbolTableListTraits : public ilist_default_traits<ValueSubClass> {
+  typedef ilist_traits<ValueSubClass> TraitsClass;
+public:
+  SymbolTableListTraits() {}
+
+  /// getListOwner - Return the object that owns this list.  If this is a list
+  /// of instructions, it returns the BasicBlock that owns them.
+  ItemParentClass *getListOwner() {
+    size_t Offset(size_t(&((ItemParentClass*)0->*ItemParentClass::
+                           getSublistAccess(static_cast<ValueSubClass*>(0)))));
+    iplist<ValueSubClass>* Anchor(static_cast<iplist<ValueSubClass>*>(this));
+    return reinterpret_cast<ItemParentClass*>(reinterpret_cast<char*>(Anchor)-
+                                              Offset);
+  }
+
+  static iplist<ValueSubClass> &getList(ItemParentClass *Par) {
+    return Par->*(Par->getSublistAccess((ValueSubClass*)0));
+  }
+
+  static ValueSymbolTable *getSymTab(ItemParentClass *Par) {
+    return Par ? toPtr(Par->getValueSymbolTable()) : 0;
+  }
+
+  void addNodeToList(ValueSubClass *V);
+  void removeNodeFromList(ValueSubClass *V);
+  void transferNodesFromList(ilist_traits<ValueSubClass> &L2,
+                             ilist_iterator<ValueSubClass> first,
+                             ilist_iterator<ValueSubClass> last);
+//private:
+  template<typename TPtr>
+  void setSymTabObject(TPtr *, TPtr);
+  static ValueSymbolTable *toPtr(ValueSymbolTable *P) { return P; }
+  static ValueSymbolTable *toPtr(ValueSymbolTable &R) { return &R; }
+};
+
+} // End llvm namespace
+
+#endif

thirdparty/clang/include/llvm/IR/Type.h

@@ -0,0 +1,472 @@
+//===-- llvm/Type.h - Classes for handling data types -----------*- C++ -*-===//
+//
+//                     The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure
+//
+// This file is distributed under the University of Illinois Open Source
+// License. See LICENSE.TXT for details.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+//
+// This file contains the declaration of the Type class.  For more "Type"
+// stuff, look in DerivedTypes.h.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+
+#ifndef LLVM_IR_TYPE_H
+#define LLVM_IR_TYPE_H
+
+#include "llvm/ADT/APFloat.h"
+#include "llvm/Support/Casting.h"
+#include "llvm/Support/DataTypes.h"
+#include "llvm/Support/ErrorHandling.h"
+
+namespace llvm {
+
+class PointerType;
+class IntegerType;
+class raw_ostream;
+class Module;
+class LLVMContext;
+class LLVMContextImpl;
+class StringRef;
+template<class GraphType> struct GraphTraits;
+
+/// The instances of the Type class are immutable: once they are created,
+/// they are never changed.  Also note that only one instance of a particular
+/// type is ever created.  Thus seeing if two types are equal is a matter of
+/// doing a trivial pointer comparison. To enforce that no two equal instances
+/// are created, Type instances can only be created via static factory methods 
+/// in class Type and in derived classes.  Once allocated, Types are never
+/// free'd.
+/// 
+class Type {
+public:
+  //===--------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+  /// Definitions of all of the base types for the Type system.  Based on this
+  /// value, you can cast to a class defined in DerivedTypes.h.
+  /// Note: If you add an element to this, you need to add an element to the
+  /// Type::getPrimitiveType function, or else things will break!
+  /// Also update LLVMTypeKind and LLVMGetTypeKind () in the C binding.
+  ///
+  enum TypeID {
+    // PrimitiveTypes - make sure LastPrimitiveTyID stays up to date.
+    VoidTyID = 0,    ///<  0: type with no size
+    HalfTyID,        ///<  1: 16-bit floating point type
+    FloatTyID,       ///<  2: 32-bit floating point type
+    DoubleTyID,      ///<  3: 64-bit floating point type
+    X86_FP80TyID,    ///<  4: 80-bit floating point type (X87)
+    FP128TyID,       ///<  5: 128-bit floating point type (112-bit mantissa)
+    PPC_FP128TyID,   ///<  6: 128-bit floating point type (two 64-bits, PowerPC)
+    LabelTyID,       ///<  7: Labels
+    MetadataTyID,    ///<  8: Metadata
+    X86_MMXTyID,     ///<  9: MMX vectors (64 bits, X86 specific)
+
+    // Derived types... see DerivedTypes.h file.
+    // Make sure FirstDerivedTyID stays up to date!
+    IntegerTyID,     ///< 10: Arbitrary bit width integers
+    FunctionTyID,    ///< 11: Functions
+    StructTyID,      ///< 12: Structures
+    ArrayTyID,       ///< 13: Arrays
+    PointerTyID,     ///< 14: Pointers
+    VectorTyID,      ///< 15: SIMD 'packed' format, or other vector type
+
+    NumTypeIDs,                         // Must remain as last defined ID
+    LastPrimitiveTyID = X86_MMXTyID,
+    FirstDerivedTyID = IntegerTyID
+  };
+
+private:
+  /// Context - This refers to the LLVMContext in which this type was uniqued.
+  LLVMContext &Context;
+
+  // Due to Ubuntu GCC bug 910363:
+  // https://bugs.launchpad.net/ubuntu/+source/gcc-4.5/+bug/910363
+  // Bitpack ID and SubclassData manually.
+  // Note: TypeID : low 8 bit; SubclassData : high 24 bit.
+  uint32_t IDAndSubclassData;
+
+protected:
+  friend class LLVMContextImpl;
+  explicit Type(LLVMContext &C, TypeID tid)
+    : Context(C), IDAndSubclassData(0),
+      NumContainedTys(0), ContainedTys(0) {
+    setTypeID(tid);
+  }
+  ~Type() {}
+  
+  void setTypeID(TypeID ID) {
+    IDAndSubclassData = (ID & 0xFF) | (IDAndSubclassData & 0xFFFFFF00);
+    assert(getTypeID() == ID && "TypeID data too large for field");
+  }
+  
+  unsigned getSubclassData() const { return IDAndSubclassData >> 8; }
+  
+  void setSubclassData(unsigned val) {
+    IDAndSubclassData = (IDAndSubclassData & 0xFF) | (val << 8);
+    // Ensure we don't have any accidental truncation.
+    assert(getSubclassData() == val && "Subclass data too large for field");
+  }
+
+  /// NumContainedTys - Keeps track of how many Type*'s there are in the
+  /// ContainedTys list.
+  unsigned NumContainedTys;
+
+  /// ContainedTys - A pointer to the array of Types contained by this Type.
+  /// For example, this includes the arguments of a function type, the elements
+  /// of a structure, the pointee of a pointer, the element type of an array,
+  /// etc.  This pointer may be 0 for types that don't contain other types
+  /// (Integer, Double, Float).
+  Type * const *ContainedTys;
+
+public:
+  void print(raw_ostream &O) const;
+  void dump() const;
+
+  /// getContext - Return the LLVMContext in which this type was uniqued.
+  LLVMContext &getContext() const { return Context; }
+
+  //===--------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+  // Accessors for working with types.
+  //
+
+  /// getTypeID - Return the type id for the type.  This will return one
+  /// of the TypeID enum elements defined above.
+  ///
+  TypeID getTypeID() const { return (TypeID)(IDAndSubclassData & 0xFF); }
+
+  /// isVoidTy - Return true if this is 'void'.
+  bool isVoidTy() const { return getTypeID() == VoidTyID; }
+
+  /// isHalfTy - Return true if this is 'half', a 16-bit IEEE fp type.
+  bool isHalfTy() const { return getTypeID() == HalfTyID; }
+
+  /// isFloatTy - Return true if this is 'float', a 32-bit IEEE fp type.
+  bool isFloatTy() const { return getTypeID() == FloatTyID; }
+  
+  /// isDoubleTy - Return true if this is 'double', a 64-bit IEEE fp type.
+  bool isDoubleTy() const { return getTypeID() == DoubleTyID; }
+
+  /// isX86_FP80Ty - Return true if this is x86 long double.
+  bool isX86_FP80Ty() const { return getTypeID() == X86_FP80TyID; }
+
+  /// isFP128Ty - Return true if this is 'fp128'.
+  bool isFP128Ty() const { return getTypeID() == FP128TyID; }
+
+  /// isPPC_FP128Ty - Return true if this is powerpc long double.
+  bool isPPC_FP128Ty() const { return getTypeID() == PPC_FP128TyID; }
+
+  /// isFloatingPointTy - Return true if this is one of the six floating point
+  /// types
+  bool isFloatingPointTy() const {
+    return getTypeID() == HalfTyID || getTypeID() == FloatTyID ||
+           getTypeID() == DoubleTyID ||
+           getTypeID() == X86_FP80TyID || getTypeID() == FP128TyID ||
+           getTypeID() == PPC_FP128TyID;
+  }
+
+  const fltSemantics &getFltSemantics() const {
+    switch (getTypeID()) {
+    case HalfTyID: return APFloat::IEEEhalf;
+    case FloatTyID: return APFloat::IEEEsingle;
+    case DoubleTyID: return APFloat::IEEEdouble;
+    case X86_FP80TyID: return APFloat::x87DoubleExtended;
+    case FP128TyID: return APFloat::IEEEquad;
+    case PPC_FP128TyID: return APFloat::PPCDoubleDouble;
+    default: llvm_unreachable("Invalid floating type");
+    }
+  }
+
+  /// isX86_MMXTy - Return true if this is X86 MMX.
+  bool isX86_MMXTy() const { return getTypeID() == X86_MMXTyID; }
+
+  /// isFPOrFPVectorTy - Return true if this is a FP type or a vector of FP.
+  ///
+  bool isFPOrFPVectorTy() const { return getScalarType()->isFloatingPointTy(); }
+ 
+  /// isLabelTy - Return true if this is 'label'.
+  bool isLabelTy() const { return getTypeID() == LabelTyID; }
+
+  /// isMetadataTy - Return true if this is 'metadata'.
+  bool isMetadataTy() const { return getTypeID() == MetadataTyID; }
+
+  /// isIntegerTy - True if this is an instance of IntegerType.
+  ///
+  bool isIntegerTy() const { return getTypeID() == IntegerTyID; } 
+
+  /// isIntegerTy - Return true if this is an IntegerType of the given width.
+  bool isIntegerTy(unsigned Bitwidth) const;
+
+  /// isIntOrIntVectorTy - Return true if this is an integer type or a vector of
+  /// integer types.
+  ///
+  bool isIntOrIntVectorTy() const { return getScalarType()->isIntegerTy(); }
+  
+  /// isFunctionTy - True if this is an instance of FunctionType.
+  ///
+  bool isFunctionTy() const { return getTypeID() == FunctionTyID; }
+
+  /// isStructTy - True if this is an instance of StructType.
+  ///
+  bool isStructTy() const { return getTypeID() == StructTyID; }
+
+  /// isArrayTy - True if this is an instance of ArrayType.
+  ///
+  bool isArrayTy() const { return getTypeID() == ArrayTyID; }
+
+  /// isPointerTy - True if this is an instance of PointerType.
+  ///
+  bool isPointerTy() const { return getTypeID() == PointerTyID; }
+
+  /// isPtrOrPtrVectorTy - Return true if this is a pointer type or a vector of
+  /// pointer types.
+  ///
+  bool isPtrOrPtrVectorTy() const { return getScalarType()->isPointerTy(); }
+ 
+  /// isVectorTy - True if this is an instance of VectorType.
+  ///
+  bool isVectorTy() const { return getTypeID() == VectorTyID; }
+
+  /// canLosslesslyBitCastTo - Return true if this type could be converted 
+  /// with a lossless BitCast to type 'Ty'. For example, i8* to i32*. BitCasts 
+  /// are valid for types of the same size only where no re-interpretation of 
+  /// the bits is done.
+  /// @brief Determine if this type could be losslessly bitcast to Ty
+  bool canLosslesslyBitCastTo(Type *Ty) const;
+
+  /// isEmptyTy - Return true if this type is empty, that is, it has no
+  /// elements or all its elements are empty.
+  bool isEmptyTy() const;
+
+  /// Here are some useful little methods to query what type derived types are
+  /// Note that all other types can just compare to see if this == Type::xxxTy;
+  ///
+  bool isPrimitiveType() const { return getTypeID() <= LastPrimitiveTyID; }
+  bool isDerivedType()   const { return getTypeID() >= FirstDerivedTyID; }
+
+  /// isFirstClassType - Return true if the type is "first class", meaning it
+  /// is a valid type for a Value.
+  ///
+  bool isFirstClassType() const {
+    return getTypeID() != FunctionTyID && getTypeID() != VoidTyID;
+  }
+
+  /// isSingleValueType - Return true if the type is a valid type for a
+  /// register in codegen.  This includes all first-class types except struct
+  /// and array types.
+  ///
+  bool isSingleValueType() const {
+    return (getTypeID() != VoidTyID && isPrimitiveType()) ||
+            getTypeID() == IntegerTyID || getTypeID() == PointerTyID ||
+            getTypeID() == VectorTyID;
+  }
+
+  /// isAggregateType - Return true if the type is an aggregate type. This
+  /// means it is valid as the first operand of an insertvalue or
+  /// extractvalue instruction. This includes struct and array types, but
+  /// does not include vector types.
+  ///
+  bool isAggregateType() const {
+    return getTypeID() == StructTyID || getTypeID() == ArrayTyID;
+  }
+
+  /// isSized - Return true if it makes sense to take the size of this type.  To
+  /// get the actual size for a particular target, it is reasonable to use the
+  /// DataLayout subsystem to do this.
+  ///
+  bool isSized() const {
+    // If it's a primitive, it is always sized.
+    if (getTypeID() == IntegerTyID || isFloatingPointTy() ||
+        getTypeID() == PointerTyID ||
+        getTypeID() == X86_MMXTyID)
+      return true;
+    // If it is not something that can have a size (e.g. a function or label),
+    // it doesn't have a size.
+    if (getTypeID() != StructTyID && getTypeID() != ArrayTyID &&
+        getTypeID() != VectorTyID)
+      return false;
+    // Otherwise we have to try harder to decide.
+    return isSizedDerivedType();
+  }
+
+  /// getPrimitiveSizeInBits - Return the basic size of this type if it is a
+  /// primitive type.  These are fixed by LLVM and are not target dependent.
+  /// This will return zero if the type does not have a size or is not a
+  /// primitive type.
+  ///
+  /// Note that this may not reflect the size of memory allocated for an
+  /// instance of the type or the number of bytes that are written when an
+  /// instance of the type is stored to memory. The DataLayout class provides
+  /// additional query functions to provide this information.
+  ///
+  unsigned getPrimitiveSizeInBits() const;
+
+  /// getScalarSizeInBits - If this is a vector type, return the
+  /// getPrimitiveSizeInBits value for the element type. Otherwise return the
+  /// getPrimitiveSizeInBits value for this type.
+  unsigned getScalarSizeInBits();
+
+  /// getFPMantissaWidth - Return the width of the mantissa of this type.  This
+  /// is only valid on floating point types.  If the FP type does not
+  /// have a stable mantissa (e.g. ppc long double), this method returns -1.
+  int getFPMantissaWidth() const;
+
+  /// getScalarType - If this is a vector type, return the element type,
+  /// otherwise return 'this'.
+  const Type *getScalarType() const;
+  Type *getScalarType();
+
+  //===--------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+  // Type Iteration support.
+  //
+  typedef Type * const *subtype_iterator;
+  subtype_iterator subtype_begin() const { return ContainedTys; }
+  subtype_iterator subtype_end() const { return &ContainedTys[NumContainedTys];}
+
+  /// getContainedType - This method is used to implement the type iterator
+  /// (defined a the end of the file).  For derived types, this returns the
+  /// types 'contained' in the derived type.
+  ///
+  Type *getContainedType(unsigned i) const {
+    assert(i < NumContainedTys && "Index out of range!");
+    return ContainedTys[i];
+  }
+
+  /// getNumContainedTypes - Return the number of types in the derived type.
+  ///
+  unsigned getNumContainedTypes() const { return NumContainedTys; }
+
+  //===--------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+  // Helper methods corresponding to subclass methods.  This forces a cast to
+  // the specified subclass and calls its accessor.  "getVectorNumElements" (for
+  // example) is shorthand for cast<VectorType>(Ty)->getNumElements().  This is
+  // only intended to cover the core methods that are frequently used, helper
+  // methods should not be added here.
+  
+  unsigned getIntegerBitWidth() const;
+
+  Type *getFunctionParamType(unsigned i) const;
+  unsigned getFunctionNumParams() const;
+  bool isFunctionVarArg() const;
+  
+  StringRef getStructName() const;
+  unsigned getStructNumElements() const;
+  Type *getStructElementType(unsigned N) const;
+  
+  Type *getSequentialElementType() const;
+  
+  uint64_t getArrayNumElements() const;
+  Type *getArrayElementType() const { return getSequentialElementType(); }
+
+  unsigned getVectorNumElements() const;
+  Type *getVectorElementType() const { return getSequentialElementType(); }
+
+  Type *getPointerElementType() const { return getSequentialElementType(); }
+
+  /// \brief Get the address space of this pointer or pointer vector type.
+  unsigned getPointerAddressSpace() const;
+  
+  //===--------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+  // Static members exported by the Type class itself.  Useful for getting
+  // instances of Type.
+  //
+
+  /// getPrimitiveType - Return a type based on an identifier.
+  static Type *getPrimitiveType(LLVMContext &C, TypeID IDNumber);
+
+  //===--------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+  // These are the builtin types that are always available.
+  //
+  static Type *getVoidTy(LLVMContext &C);
+  static Type *getLabelTy(LLVMContext &C);
+  static Type *getHalfTy(LLVMContext &C);
+  static Type *getFloatTy(LLVMContext &C);
+  static Type *getDoubleTy(LLVMContext &C);
+  static Type *getMetadataTy(LLVMContext &C);
+  static Type *getX86_FP80Ty(LLVMContext &C);
+  static Type *getFP128Ty(LLVMContext &C);
+  static Type *getPPC_FP128Ty(LLVMContext &C);
+  static Type *getX86_MMXTy(LLVMContext &C);
+  static IntegerType *getIntNTy(LLVMContext &C, unsigned N);
+  static IntegerType *getInt1Ty(LLVMContext &C);
+  static IntegerType *getInt8Ty(LLVMContext &C);
+  static IntegerType *getInt16Ty(LLVMContext &C);
+  static IntegerType *getInt32Ty(LLVMContext &C);
+  static IntegerType *getInt64Ty(LLVMContext &C);
+
+  //===--------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+  // Convenience methods for getting pointer types with one of the above builtin
+  // types as pointee.
+  //
+  static PointerType *getHalfPtrTy(LLVMContext &C, unsigned AS = 0);
+  static PointerType *getFloatPtrTy(LLVMContext &C, unsigned AS = 0);
+  static PointerType *getDoublePtrTy(LLVMContext &C, unsigned AS = 0);
+  static PointerType *getX86_FP80PtrTy(LLVMContext &C, unsigned AS = 0);
+  static PointerType *getFP128PtrTy(LLVMContext &C, unsigned AS = 0);
+  static PointerType *getPPC_FP128PtrTy(LLVMContext &C, unsigned AS = 0);
+  static PointerType *getX86_MMXPtrTy(LLVMContext &C, unsigned AS = 0);
+  static PointerType *getIntNPtrTy(LLVMContext &C, unsigned N, unsigned AS = 0);
+  static PointerType *getInt1PtrTy(LLVMContext &C, unsigned AS = 0);
+  static PointerType *getInt8PtrTy(LLVMContext &C, unsigned AS = 0);
+  static PointerType *getInt16PtrTy(LLVMContext &C, unsigned AS = 0);
+  static PointerType *getInt32PtrTy(LLVMContext &C, unsigned AS = 0);
+  static PointerType *getInt64PtrTy(LLVMContext &C, unsigned AS = 0);
+
+  /// getPointerTo - Return a pointer to the current type.  This is equivalent
+  /// to PointerType::get(Foo, AddrSpace).
+  PointerType *getPointerTo(unsigned AddrSpace = 0);
+
+private:
+  /// isSizedDerivedType - Derived types like structures and arrays are sized
+  /// iff all of the members of the type are sized as well.  Since asking for
+  /// their size is relatively uncommon, move this operation out of line.
+  bool isSizedDerivedType() const;
+};
+
+// Printing of types.
+static inline raw_ostream &operator<<(raw_ostream &OS, Type &T) {
+  T.print(OS);
+  return OS;
+}
+
+// allow isa<PointerType>(x) to work without DerivedTypes.h included.
+template <> struct isa_impl<PointerType, Type> {
+  static inline bool doit(const Type &Ty) {
+    return Ty.getTypeID() == Type::PointerTyID;
+  }
+};
+
+  
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+// Provide specializations of GraphTraits to be able to treat a type as a
+// graph of sub types.
+
+
+template <> struct GraphTraits<Type*> {
+  typedef Type NodeType;
+  typedef Type::subtype_iterator ChildIteratorType;
+
+  static inline NodeType *getEntryNode(Type *T) { return T; }
+  static inline ChildIteratorType child_begin(NodeType *N) {
+    return N->subtype_begin();
+  }
+  static inline ChildIteratorType child_end(NodeType *N) {
+    return N->subtype_end();
+  }
+};
+
+template <> struct GraphTraits<const Type*> {
+  typedef const Type NodeType;
+  typedef Type::subtype_iterator ChildIteratorType;
+
+  static inline NodeType *getEntryNode(NodeType *T) { return T; }
+  static inline ChildIteratorType child_begin(NodeType *N) {
+    return N->subtype_begin();
+  }
+  static inline ChildIteratorType child_end(NodeType *N) {
+    return N->subtype_end();
+  }
+};
+
+} // End llvm namespace
+
+#endif

thirdparty/clang/include/llvm/IR/TypeBuilder.h

@@ -0,0 +1,399 @@
+//===---- llvm/TypeBuilder.h - Builder for LLVM types -----------*- C++ -*-===//
+//
+//                     The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure
+//
+// This file is distributed under the University of Illinois Open Source
+// License. See LICENSE.TXT for details.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+//
+// This file defines the TypeBuilder class, which is used as a convenient way to
+// create LLVM types with a consistent and simplified interface.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+
+#ifndef LLVM_IR_TYPEBUILDER_H
+#define LLVM_IR_TYPEBUILDER_H
+
+#include "llvm/IR/DerivedTypes.h"
+#include "llvm/IR/LLVMContext.h"
+#include <limits.h>
+
+namespace llvm {
+
+/// TypeBuilder - This provides a uniform API for looking up types
+/// known at compile time.  To support cross-compilation, we define a
+/// series of tag types in the llvm::types namespace, like i<N>,
+/// ieee_float, ppc_fp128, etc.  TypeBuilder<T, false> allows T to be
+/// any of these, a native C type (whose size may depend on the host
+/// compiler), or a pointer, function, or struct type built out of
+/// these.  TypeBuilder<T, true> removes native C types from this set
+/// to guarantee that its result is suitable for cross-compilation.
+/// We define the primitive types, pointer types, and functions up to
+/// 5 arguments here, but to use this class with your own types,
+/// you'll need to specialize it.  For example, say you want to call a
+/// function defined externally as:
+///
+///   struct MyType {
+///     int32 a;
+///     int32 *b;
+///     void *array[1];  // Intended as a flexible array.
+///   };
+///   int8 AFunction(struct MyType *value);
+///
+/// You'll want to use
+///   Function::Create(TypeBuilder<types::i<8>(MyType*), true>::get(), ...)
+/// to declare the function, but when you first try this, your compiler will
+/// complain that TypeBuilder<MyType, true>::get() doesn't exist. To fix this,
+/// write:
+///
+///   namespace llvm {
+///   template<bool xcompile> class TypeBuilder<MyType, xcompile> {
+///   public:
+///     static StructType *get(LLVMContext &Context) {
+///       // If you cache this result, be sure to cache it separately
+///       // for each LLVMContext.
+///       return StructType::get(
+///         TypeBuilder<types::i<32>, xcompile>::get(Context),
+///         TypeBuilder<types::i<32>*, xcompile>::get(Context),
+///         TypeBuilder<types::i<8>*[], xcompile>::get(Context),
+///         NULL);
+///     }
+///
+///     // You may find this a convenient place to put some constants
+///     // to help with getelementptr.  They don't have any effect on
+///     // the operation of TypeBuilder.
+///     enum Fields {
+///       FIELD_A,
+///       FIELD_B,
+///       FIELD_ARRAY
+///     };
+///   }
+///   }  // namespace llvm
+///
+/// TypeBuilder cannot handle recursive types or types you only know at runtime.
+/// If you try to give it a recursive type, it will deadlock, infinitely
+/// recurse, or do something similarly undesirable.
+template<typename T, bool cross_compilable> class TypeBuilder {};
+
+// Types for use with cross-compilable TypeBuilders.  These correspond
+// exactly with an LLVM-native type.
+namespace types {
+/// i<N> corresponds to the LLVM IntegerType with N bits.
+template<uint32_t num_bits> class i {};
+
+// The following classes represent the LLVM floating types.
+class ieee_float {};
+class ieee_double {};
+class x86_fp80 {};
+class fp128 {};
+class ppc_fp128 {};
+// X86 MMX.
+class x86_mmx {};
+}  // namespace types
+
+// LLVM doesn't have const or volatile types.
+template<typename T, bool cross> class TypeBuilder<const T, cross>
+  : public TypeBuilder<T, cross> {};
+template<typename T, bool cross> class TypeBuilder<volatile T, cross>
+  : public TypeBuilder<T, cross> {};
+template<typename T, bool cross> class TypeBuilder<const volatile T, cross>
+  : public TypeBuilder<T, cross> {};
+
+// Pointers
+template<typename T, bool cross> class TypeBuilder<T*, cross> {
+public:
+  static PointerType *get(LLVMContext &Context) {
+    return PointerType::getUnqual(TypeBuilder<T,cross>::get(Context));
+  }
+};
+
+/// There is no support for references
+template<typename T, bool cross> class TypeBuilder<T&, cross> {};
+
+// Arrays
+template<typename T, size_t N, bool cross> class TypeBuilder<T[N], cross> {
+public:
+  static ArrayType *get(LLVMContext &Context) {
+    return ArrayType::get(TypeBuilder<T, cross>::get(Context), N);
+  }
+};
+/// LLVM uses an array of length 0 to represent an unknown-length array.
+template<typename T, bool cross> class TypeBuilder<T[], cross> {
+public:
+  static ArrayType *get(LLVMContext &Context) {
+    return ArrayType::get(TypeBuilder<T, cross>::get(Context), 0);
+  }
+};
+
+// Define the C integral types only for TypeBuilder<T, false>.
+//
+// C integral types do not have a defined size. It would be nice to use the
+// stdint.h-defined typedefs that do have defined sizes, but we'd run into the
+// following problem:
+//
+// On an ILP32 machine, stdint.h might define:
+//
+//   typedef int int32_t;
+//   typedef long long int64_t;
+//   typedef long size_t;
+//
+// If we defined TypeBuilder<int32_t> and TypeBuilder<int64_t>, then any use of
+// TypeBuilder<size_t> would fail.  We couldn't define TypeBuilder<size_t> in
+// addition to the defined-size types because we'd get duplicate definitions on
+// platforms where stdint.h instead defines:
+//
+//   typedef int int32_t;
+//   typedef long long int64_t;
+//   typedef int size_t;
+//
+// So we define all the primitive C types and nothing else.
+#define DEFINE_INTEGRAL_TYPEBUILDER(T) \
+template<> class TypeBuilder<T, false> { \
+public: \
+  static IntegerType *get(LLVMContext &Context) { \
+    return IntegerType::get(Context, sizeof(T) * CHAR_BIT); \
+  } \
+}; \
+template<> class TypeBuilder<T, true> { \
+  /* We provide a definition here so users don't accidentally */ \
+  /* define these types to work. */ \
+}
+DEFINE_INTEGRAL_TYPEBUILDER(char);
+DEFINE_INTEGRAL_TYPEBUILDER(signed char);
+DEFINE_INTEGRAL_TYPEBUILDER(unsigned char);
+DEFINE_INTEGRAL_TYPEBUILDER(short);
+DEFINE_INTEGRAL_TYPEBUILDER(unsigned short);
+DEFINE_INTEGRAL_TYPEBUILDER(int);
+DEFINE_INTEGRAL_TYPEBUILDER(unsigned int);
+DEFINE_INTEGRAL_TYPEBUILDER(long);
+DEFINE_INTEGRAL_TYPEBUILDER(unsigned long);
+#ifdef _MSC_VER
+DEFINE_INTEGRAL_TYPEBUILDER(__int64);
+DEFINE_INTEGRAL_TYPEBUILDER(unsigned __int64);
+#else /* _MSC_VER */
+DEFINE_INTEGRAL_TYPEBUILDER(long long);
+DEFINE_INTEGRAL_TYPEBUILDER(unsigned long long);
+#endif /* _MSC_VER */
+#undef DEFINE_INTEGRAL_TYPEBUILDER
+
+template<uint32_t num_bits, bool cross>
+class TypeBuilder<types::i<num_bits>, cross> {
+public:
+  static IntegerType *get(LLVMContext &C) {
+    return IntegerType::get(C, num_bits);
+  }
+};
+
+template<> class TypeBuilder<float, false> {
+public:
+  static Type *get(LLVMContext& C) {
+    return Type::getFloatTy(C);
+  }
+};
+template<> class TypeBuilder<float, true> {};
+
+template<> class TypeBuilder<double, false> {
+public:
+  static Type *get(LLVMContext& C) {
+    return Type::getDoubleTy(C);
+  }
+};
+template<> class TypeBuilder<double, true> {};
+
+template<bool cross> class TypeBuilder<types::ieee_float, cross> {
+public:
+  static Type *get(LLVMContext& C) { return Type::getFloatTy(C); }
+};
+template<bool cross> class TypeBuilder<types::ieee_double, cross> {
+public:
+  static Type *get(LLVMContext& C) { return Type::getDoubleTy(C); }
+};
+template<bool cross> class TypeBuilder<types::x86_fp80, cross> {
+public:
+  static Type *get(LLVMContext& C) { return Type::getX86_FP80Ty(C); }
+};
+template<bool cross> class TypeBuilder<types::fp128, cross> {
+public:
+  static Type *get(LLVMContext& C) { return Type::getFP128Ty(C); }
+};
+template<bool cross> class TypeBuilder<types::ppc_fp128, cross> {
+public:
+  static Type *get(LLVMContext& C) { return Type::getPPC_FP128Ty(C); }
+};
+template<bool cross> class TypeBuilder<types::x86_mmx, cross> {
+public:
+  static Type *get(LLVMContext& C) { return Type::getX86_MMXTy(C); }
+};
+
+template<bool cross> class TypeBuilder<void, cross> {
+public:
+  static Type *get(LLVMContext &C) {
+    return Type::getVoidTy(C);
+  }
+};
+
+/// void* is disallowed in LLVM types, but it occurs often enough in C code that
+/// we special case it.
+template<> class TypeBuilder<void*, false>
+  : public TypeBuilder<types::i<8>*, false> {};
+template<> class TypeBuilder<const void*, false>
+  : public TypeBuilder<types::i<8>*, false> {};
+template<> class TypeBuilder<volatile void*, false>
+  : public TypeBuilder<types::i<8>*, false> {};
+template<> class TypeBuilder<const volatile void*, false>
+  : public TypeBuilder<types::i<8>*, false> {};
+
+template<typename R, bool cross> class TypeBuilder<R(), cross> {
+public:
+  static FunctionType *get(LLVMContext &Context) {
+    return FunctionType::get(TypeBuilder<R, cross>::get(Context), false);
+  }
+};
+template<typename R, typename A1, bool cross> class TypeBuilder<R(A1), cross> {
+public:
+  static FunctionType *get(LLVMContext &Context) {
+    Type *params[] = {
+      TypeBuilder<A1, cross>::get(Context),
+    };
+    return FunctionType::get(TypeBuilder<R, cross>::get(Context),
+                             params, false);
+  }
+};
+template<typename R, typename A1, typename A2, bool cross>
+class TypeBuilder<R(A1, A2), cross> {
+public:
+  static FunctionType *get(LLVMContext &Context) {
+    Type *params[] = {
+      TypeBuilder<A1, cross>::get(Context),
+      TypeBuilder<A2, cross>::get(Context),
+    };
+    return FunctionType::get(TypeBuilder<R, cross>::get(Context),
+                             params, false);
+  }
+};
+template<typename R, typename A1, typename A2, typename A3, bool cross>
+class TypeBuilder<R(A1, A2, A3), cross> {
+public:
+  static FunctionType *get(LLVMContext &Context) {
+    Type *params[] = {
+      TypeBuilder<A1, cross>::get(Context),
+      TypeBuilder<A2, cross>::get(Context),
+      TypeBuilder<A3, cross>::get(Context),
+    };
+    return FunctionType::get(TypeBuilder<R, cross>::get(Context),
+                             params, false);
+  }
+};
+
+template<typename R, typename A1, typename A2, typename A3, typename A4,
+         bool cross>
+class TypeBuilder<R(A1, A2, A3, A4), cross> {
+public:
+  static FunctionType *get(LLVMContext &Context) {
+    Type *params[] = {
+      TypeBuilder<A1, cross>::get(Context),
+      TypeBuilder<A2, cross>::get(Context),
+      TypeBuilder<A3, cross>::get(Context),
+      TypeBuilder<A4, cross>::get(Context),
+    };
+    return FunctionType::get(TypeBuilder<R, cross>::get(Context),
+                             params, false);
+  }
+};
+
+template<typename R, typename A1, typename A2, typename A3, typename A4,
+         typename A5, bool cross>
+class TypeBuilder<R(A1, A2, A3, A4, A5), cross> {
+public:
+  static FunctionType *get(LLVMContext &Context) {
+    Type *params[] = {
+      TypeBuilder<A1, cross>::get(Context),
+      TypeBuilder<A2, cross>::get(Context),
+      TypeBuilder<A3, cross>::get(Context),
+      TypeBuilder<A4, cross>::get(Context),
+      TypeBuilder<A5, cross>::get(Context),
+    };
+    return FunctionType::get(TypeBuilder<R, cross>::get(Context),
+                             params, false);
+  }
+};
+
+template<typename R, bool cross> class TypeBuilder<R(...), cross> {
+public:
+  static FunctionType *get(LLVMContext &Context) {
+    return FunctionType::get(TypeBuilder<R, cross>::get(Context), true);
+  }
+};
+template<typename R, typename A1, bool cross>
+class TypeBuilder<R(A1, ...), cross> {
+public:
+  static FunctionType *get(LLVMContext &Context) {
+    Type *params[] = {
+      TypeBuilder<A1, cross>::get(Context),
+    };
+    return FunctionType::get(TypeBuilder<R, cross>::get(Context), params, true);
+  }
+};
+template<typename R, typename A1, typename A2, bool cross>
+class TypeBuilder<R(A1, A2, ...), cross> {
+public:
+  static FunctionType *get(LLVMContext &Context) {
+    Type *params[] = {
+      TypeBuilder<A1, cross>::get(Context),
+      TypeBuilder<A2, cross>::get(Context),
+    };
+    return FunctionType::get(TypeBuilder<R, cross>::get(Context),
+                                   params, true);
+  }
+};
+template<typename R, typename A1, typename A2, typename A3, bool cross>
+class TypeBuilder<R(A1, A2, A3, ...), cross> {
+public:
+  static FunctionType *get(LLVMContext &Context) {
+    Type *params[] = {
+      TypeBuilder<A1, cross>::get(Context),
+      TypeBuilder<A2, cross>::get(Context),
+      TypeBuilder<A3, cross>::get(Context),
+    };
+    return FunctionType::get(TypeBuilder<R, cross>::get(Context),
+                                   params, true);
+  }
+};
+
+template<typename R, typename A1, typename A2, typename A3, typename A4,
+         bool cross>
+class TypeBuilder<R(A1, A2, A3, A4, ...), cross> {
+public:
+  static FunctionType *get(LLVMContext &Context) {
+    Type *params[] = {
+      TypeBuilder<A1, cross>::get(Context),
+      TypeBuilder<A2, cross>::get(Context),
+      TypeBuilder<A3, cross>::get(Context),
+      TypeBuilder<A4, cross>::get(Context),
+    };
+    return FunctionType::get(TypeBuilder<R, cross>::get(Context),
+                             params, true);
+  }
+};
+
+template<typename R, typename A1, typename A2, typename A3, typename A4,
+         typename A5, bool cross>
+class TypeBuilder<R(A1, A2, A3, A4, A5, ...), cross> {
+public:
+  static FunctionType *get(LLVMContext &Context) {
+    Type *params[] = {
+      TypeBuilder<A1, cross>::get(Context),
+      TypeBuilder<A2, cross>::get(Context),
+      TypeBuilder<A3, cross>::get(Context),
+      TypeBuilder<A4, cross>::get(Context),
+      TypeBuilder<A5, cross>::get(Context),
+    };
+    return FunctionType::get(TypeBuilder<R, cross>::get(Context),
+                                   params, true);
+  }
+};
+
+}  // namespace llvm
+
+#endif

thirdparty/clang/include/llvm/IR/TypeFinder.h

@@ -0,0 +1,78 @@
+//===-- llvm/IR/TypeFinder.h - Class to find used struct types --*- C++ -*-===//
+//
+//                     The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure
+//
+// This file is distributed under the University of Illinois Open Source
+// License. See LICENSE.TXT for details.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+//
+// This file contains the declaration of the TypeFinder class. 
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+
+#ifndef LLVM_IR_TYPEFINDER_H
+#define LLVM_IR_TYPEFINDER_H
+
+#include "llvm/ADT/DenseSet.h"
+#include <vector>
+
+namespace llvm {
+
+class MDNode;
+class Module;
+class StructType;
+class Type;
+class Value;
+
+/// TypeFinder - Walk over a module, identifying all of the types that are
+/// used by the module.
+class TypeFinder {
+  // To avoid walking constant expressions multiple times and other IR
+  // objects, we keep several helper maps.
+  DenseSet<const Value*> VisitedConstants;
+  DenseSet<Type*> VisitedTypes;
+
+  std::vector<StructType*> StructTypes;
+  bool OnlyNamed;
+
+public:
+  TypeFinder() : OnlyNamed(false) {}
+
+  void run(const Module &M, bool onlyNamed);
+  void clear();
+
+  typedef std::vector<StructType*>::iterator iterator;
+  typedef std::vector<StructType*>::const_iterator const_iterator;
+
+  iterator begin() { return StructTypes.begin(); }
+  iterator end() { return StructTypes.end(); }
+
+  const_iterator begin() const { return StructTypes.begin(); }
+  const_iterator end() const { return StructTypes.end(); }
+
+  bool empty() const { return StructTypes.empty(); }
+  size_t size() const { return StructTypes.size(); }
+  iterator erase(iterator I, iterator E) { return StructTypes.erase(I, E); }
+
+  StructType *&operator[](unsigned Idx) { return StructTypes[Idx]; }
+
+private:
+  /// incorporateType - This method adds the type to the list of used
+  /// structures if it's not in there already.
+  void incorporateType(Type *Ty);
+
+  /// incorporateValue - This method is used to walk operand lists finding types
+  /// hiding in constant expressions and other operands that won't be walked in
+  /// other ways.  GlobalValues, basic blocks, instructions, and inst operands
+  /// are all explicitly enumerated.
+  void incorporateValue(const Value *V);
+
+  /// incorporateMDNode - This method is used to walk the operands of an MDNode
+  /// to find types hiding within.
+  void incorporateMDNode(const MDNode *V);
+};
+
+} // end llvm namespace
+
+#endif

thirdparty/clang/include/llvm/IR/Use.h

@@ -0,0 +1,219 @@
+//===-- llvm/Use.h - Definition of the Use class ----------------*- C++ -*-===//
+//
+//                     The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure
+//
+// This file is distributed under the University of Illinois Open Source
+// License. See LICENSE.TXT for details.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+//
+// This defines the Use class.  The Use class represents the operand of an
+// instruction or some other User instance which refers to a Value.  The Use
+// class keeps the "use list" of the referenced value up to date.
+//
+// Pointer tagging is used to efficiently find the User corresponding
+// to a Use without having to store a User pointer in every Use. A
+// User is preceded in memory by all the Uses corresponding to its
+// operands, and the low bits of one of the fields (Prev) of the Use
+// class are used to encode offsets to be able to find that User given
+// a pointer to any Use. For details, see:
+//
+//   http://www.llvm.org/docs/ProgrammersManual.html#UserLayout
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+
+#ifndef LLVM_IR_USE_H
+#define LLVM_IR_USE_H
+
+#include "llvm/ADT/PointerIntPair.h"
+#include "llvm/Support/Compiler.h"
+#include <cstddef>
+#include <iterator>
+
+namespace llvm {
+
+class Value;
+class User;
+class Use;
+template<typename>
+struct simplify_type;
+
+// Use** is only 4-byte aligned.
+template<>
+class PointerLikeTypeTraits<Use**> {
+public:
+  static inline void *getAsVoidPointer(Use** P) { return P; }
+  static inline Use **getFromVoidPointer(void *P) {
+    return static_cast<Use**>(P);
+  }
+  enum { NumLowBitsAvailable = 2 };
+};
+
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+//                                  Use Class
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+
+/// Use is here to make keeping the "use" list of a Value up-to-date really
+/// easy.
+class Use {
+public:
+  /// swap - provide a fast substitute to std::swap<Use>
+  /// that also works with less standard-compliant compilers
+  void swap(Use &RHS);
+
+  // A type for the word following an array of hung-off Uses in memory, which is
+  // a pointer back to their User with the bottom bit set.
+  typedef PointerIntPair<User*, 1, unsigned> UserRef;
+
+private:
+  Use(const Use &U) LLVM_DELETED_FUNCTION;
+
+  /// Destructor - Only for zap()
+  ~Use() {
+    if (Val) removeFromList();
+  }
+
+  enum PrevPtrTag { zeroDigitTag
+                  , oneDigitTag
+                  , stopTag
+                  , fullStopTag };
+
+  /// Constructor
+  Use(PrevPtrTag tag) : Val(0) {
+    Prev.setInt(tag);
+  }
+
+public:
+  /// Normally Use will just implicitly convert to a Value* that it holds.
+  operator Value*() const { return Val; }
+  
+  /// If implicit conversion to Value* doesn't work, the get() method returns
+  /// the Value*.
+  Value *get() const { return Val; }
+  
+  /// getUser - This returns the User that contains this Use.  For an
+  /// instruction operand, for example, this will return the instruction.
+  User *getUser() const;
+
+  inline void set(Value *Val);
+
+  Value *operator=(Value *RHS) {
+    set(RHS);
+    return RHS;
+  }
+  const Use &operator=(const Use &RHS) {
+    set(RHS.Val);
+    return *this;
+  }
+
+        Value *operator->()       { return Val; }
+  const Value *operator->() const { return Val; }
+
+  Use *getNext() const { return Next; }
+
+  
+  /// initTags - initialize the waymarking tags on an array of Uses, so that
+  /// getUser() can find the User from any of those Uses.
+  static Use *initTags(Use *Start, Use *Stop);
+
+  /// zap - This is used to destroy Use operands when the number of operands of
+  /// a User changes.
+  static void zap(Use *Start, const Use *Stop, bool del = false);
+
+private:
+  const Use* getImpliedUser() const;
+  
+  Value *Val;
+  Use *Next;
+  PointerIntPair<Use**, 2, PrevPtrTag> Prev;
+
+  void setPrev(Use **NewPrev) {
+    Prev.setPointer(NewPrev);
+  }
+  void addToList(Use **List) {
+    Next = *List;
+    if (Next) Next->setPrev(&Next);
+    setPrev(List);
+    *List = this;
+  }
+  void removeFromList() {
+    Use **StrippedPrev = Prev.getPointer();
+    *StrippedPrev = Next;
+    if (Next) Next->setPrev(StrippedPrev);
+  }
+
+  friend class Value;
+};
+
+// simplify_type - Allow clients to treat uses just like values when using
+// casting operators.
+template<> struct simplify_type<Use> {
+  typedef Value* SimpleType;
+  static SimpleType getSimplifiedValue(Use &Val) {
+    return Val.get();
+  }
+};
+template<> struct simplify_type<const Use> {
+  typedef /*const*/ Value* SimpleType;
+  static SimpleType getSimplifiedValue(const Use &Val) {
+    return Val.get();
+  }
+};
+
+
+
+template<typename UserTy>  // UserTy == 'User' or 'const User'
+class value_use_iterator : public std::iterator<std::forward_iterator_tag,
+                                                UserTy*, ptrdiff_t> {
+  typedef std::iterator<std::forward_iterator_tag, UserTy*, ptrdiff_t> super;
+  typedef value_use_iterator<UserTy> _Self;
+
+  Use *U;
+  explicit value_use_iterator(Use *u) : U(u) {}
+  friend class Value;
+public:
+  typedef typename super::reference reference;
+  typedef typename super::pointer pointer;
+
+  value_use_iterator(const _Self &I) : U(I.U) {}
+  value_use_iterator() {}
+
+  bool operator==(const _Self &x) const {
+    return U == x.U;
+  }
+  bool operator!=(const _Self &x) const {
+    return !operator==(x);
+  }
+
+  /// atEnd - return true if this iterator is equal to use_end() on the value.
+  bool atEnd() const { return U == 0; }
+
+  // Iterator traversal: forward iteration only
+  _Self &operator++() {          // Preincrement
+    assert(U && "Cannot increment end iterator!");
+    U = U->getNext();
+    return *this;
+  }
+  _Self operator++(int) {        // Postincrement
+    _Self tmp = *this; ++*this; return tmp;
+  }
+
+  // Retrieve a pointer to the current User.
+  UserTy *operator*() const {
+    assert(U && "Cannot dereference end iterator!");
+    return U->getUser();
+  }
+
+  UserTy *operator->() const { return operator*(); }
+
+  Use &getUse() const { return *U; }
+  
+  /// getOperandNo - Return the operand # of this use in its User.  Defined in
+  /// User.h
+  ///
+  unsigned getOperandNo() const;
+};
+
+} // End llvm namespace
+
+#endif

thirdparty/clang/include/llvm/IR/User.h

@@ -0,0 +1,205 @@
+//===-- llvm/User.h - User class definition ---------------------*- C++ -*-===//
+//
+//                     The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure
+//
+// This file is distributed under the University of Illinois Open Source
+// License. See LICENSE.TXT for details.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+//
+// This class defines the interface that one who uses a Value must implement.
+// Each instance of the Value class keeps track of what User's have handles
+// to it.
+//
+//  * Instructions are the largest class of Users.
+//  * Constants may be users of other constants (think arrays and stuff)
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+
+#ifndef LLVM_IR_USER_H
+#define LLVM_IR_USER_H
+
+#include "llvm/IR/Value.h"
+#include "llvm/Support/ErrorHandling.h"
+
+namespace llvm {
+
+/// OperandTraits - Compile-time customization of
+/// operand-related allocators and accessors
+/// for use of the User class
+template <class>
+struct OperandTraits;
+
+class User : public Value {
+  User(const User &) LLVM_DELETED_FUNCTION;
+  void *operator new(size_t) LLVM_DELETED_FUNCTION;
+  template <unsigned>
+  friend struct HungoffOperandTraits;
+  virtual void anchor();
+protected:
+  /// OperandList - This is a pointer to the array of Uses for this User.
+  /// For nodes of fixed arity (e.g. a binary operator) this array will live
+  /// prefixed to some derived class instance.  For nodes of resizable variable
+  /// arity (e.g. PHINodes, SwitchInst etc.), this memory will be dynamically
+  /// allocated and should be destroyed by the classes' virtual dtor.
+  Use *OperandList;
+
+  /// NumOperands - The number of values used by this User.
+  ///
+  unsigned NumOperands;
+
+  void *operator new(size_t s, unsigned Us);
+  User(Type *ty, unsigned vty, Use *OpList, unsigned NumOps)
+    : Value(ty, vty), OperandList(OpList), NumOperands(NumOps) {}
+  Use *allocHungoffUses(unsigned) const;
+  void dropHungoffUses() {
+    Use::zap(OperandList, OperandList + NumOperands, true);
+    OperandList = 0;
+    // Reset NumOperands so User::operator delete() does the right thing.
+    NumOperands = 0;
+  }
+public:
+  ~User() {
+    Use::zap(OperandList, OperandList + NumOperands);
+  }
+  /// operator delete - free memory allocated for User and Use objects
+  void operator delete(void *Usr);
+  /// placement delete - required by std, but never called.
+  void operator delete(void*, unsigned) {
+    llvm_unreachable("Constructor throws?");
+  }
+  /// placement delete - required by std, but never called.
+  void operator delete(void*, unsigned, bool) {
+    llvm_unreachable("Constructor throws?");
+  }
+protected:
+  template <int Idx, typename U> static Use &OpFrom(const U *that) {
+    return Idx < 0
+      ? OperandTraits<U>::op_end(const_cast<U*>(that))[Idx]
+      : OperandTraits<U>::op_begin(const_cast<U*>(that))[Idx];
+  }
+  template <int Idx> Use &Op() {
+    return OpFrom<Idx>(this);
+  }
+  template <int Idx> const Use &Op() const {
+    return OpFrom<Idx>(this);
+  }
+public:
+  Value *getOperand(unsigned i) const {
+    assert(i < NumOperands && "getOperand() out of range!");
+    return OperandList[i];
+  }
+  void setOperand(unsigned i, Value *Val) {
+    assert(i < NumOperands && "setOperand() out of range!");
+    assert((!isa<Constant>((const Value*)this) ||
+            isa<GlobalValue>((const Value*)this)) &&
+           "Cannot mutate a constant with setOperand!");
+    OperandList[i] = Val;
+  }
+  const Use &getOperandUse(unsigned i) const {
+    assert(i < NumOperands && "getOperandUse() out of range!");
+    return OperandList[i];
+  }
+  Use &getOperandUse(unsigned i) {
+    assert(i < NumOperands && "getOperandUse() out of range!");
+    return OperandList[i];
+  }
+
+  unsigned getNumOperands() const { return NumOperands; }
+
+  // ---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+  // Operand Iterator interface...
+  //
+  typedef Use*       op_iterator;
+  typedef const Use* const_op_iterator;
+
+  inline op_iterator       op_begin()       { return OperandList; }
+  inline const_op_iterator op_begin() const { return OperandList; }
+  inline op_iterator       op_end()         { return OperandList+NumOperands; }
+  inline const_op_iterator op_end()   const { return OperandList+NumOperands; }
+
+  /// Convenience iterator for directly iterating over the Values in the
+  /// OperandList
+  class value_op_iterator : public std::iterator<std::forward_iterator_tag,
+                                                 Value*> {
+    op_iterator OI;
+  public:
+    explicit value_op_iterator(Use *U) : OI(U) {}
+
+    bool operator==(const value_op_iterator &x) const {
+      return OI == x.OI;
+    }
+    bool operator!=(const value_op_iterator &x) const {
+      return !operator==(x);
+    }
+
+    /// Iterator traversal: forward iteration only
+    value_op_iterator &operator++() {          // Preincrement
+      ++OI;
+      return *this;
+    }
+    value_op_iterator operator++(int) {        // Postincrement
+      value_op_iterator tmp = *this; ++*this; return tmp;
+    }
+
+    /// Retrieve a pointer to the current Value.
+    Value *operator*() const {
+      return *OI;
+    }
+
+    Value *operator->() const { return operator*(); }
+  };
+
+  inline value_op_iterator value_op_begin() {
+    return value_op_iterator(op_begin());
+  }
+  inline value_op_iterator value_op_end() {
+    return value_op_iterator(op_end());
+  }
+
+  // dropAllReferences() - This function is in charge of "letting go" of all
+  // objects that this User refers to.  This allows one to
+  // 'delete' a whole class at a time, even though there may be circular
+  // references...  First all references are dropped, and all use counts go to
+  // zero.  Then everything is deleted for real.  Note that no operations are
+  // valid on an object that has "dropped all references", except operator
+  // delete.
+  //
+  void dropAllReferences() {
+    for (op_iterator i = op_begin(), e = op_end(); i != e; ++i)
+      i->set(0);
+  }
+
+  /// replaceUsesOfWith - Replaces all references to the "From" definition with
+  /// references to the "To" definition.
+  ///
+  void replaceUsesOfWith(Value *From, Value *To);
+
+  // Methods for support type inquiry through isa, cast, and dyn_cast:
+  static inline bool classof(const Value *V) {
+    return isa<Instruction>(V) || isa<Constant>(V);
+  }
+};
+
+template<> struct simplify_type<User::op_iterator> {
+  typedef Value* SimpleType;
+  static SimpleType getSimplifiedValue(User::op_iterator &Val) {
+    return Val->get();
+  }
+};
+template<> struct simplify_type<User::const_op_iterator> {
+  typedef /*const*/ Value* SimpleType;
+  static SimpleType getSimplifiedValue(User::const_op_iterator &Val) {
+    return Val->get();
+  }
+};
+
+// value_use_iterator::getOperandNo - Requires the definition of the User class.
+template<typename UserTy>
+unsigned value_use_iterator<UserTy>::getOperandNo() const {
+  return U - U->getUser()->op_begin();
+}
+
+} // End llvm namespace
+
+#endif

thirdparty/clang/include/llvm/IR/Value.h

@@ -0,0 +1,411 @@
+//===-- llvm/Value.h - Definition of the Value class ------------*- C++ -*-===//
+//
+//                     The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure
+//
+// This file is distributed under the University of Illinois Open Source
+// License. See LICENSE.TXT for details.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+//
+// This file declares the Value class. 
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+
+#ifndef LLVM_IR_VALUE_H
+#define LLVM_IR_VALUE_H
+
+#include "llvm/IR/Use.h"
+#include "llvm/Support/Casting.h"
+#include "llvm/Support/Compiler.h"
+
+namespace llvm {
+
+class Constant;
+class Argument;
+class Instruction;
+class BasicBlock;
+class GlobalValue;
+class Function;
+class GlobalVariable;
+class GlobalAlias;
+class InlineAsm;
+class ValueSymbolTable;
+template<typename ValueTy> class StringMapEntry;
+typedef StringMapEntry<Value*> ValueName;
+class raw_ostream;
+class AssemblyAnnotationWriter;
+class ValueHandleBase;
+class LLVMContext;
+class Twine;
+class MDNode;
+class Type;
+class StringRef;
+
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+//                                 Value Class
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+
+/// This is a very important LLVM class. It is the base class of all values 
+/// computed by a program that may be used as operands to other values. Value is
+/// the super class of other important classes such as Instruction and Function.
+/// All Values have a Type. Type is not a subclass of Value. Some values can
+/// have a name and they belong to some Module.  Setting the name on the Value
+/// automatically updates the module's symbol table.
+///
+/// Every value has a "use list" that keeps track of which other Values are
+/// using this Value.  A Value can also have an arbitrary number of ValueHandle
+/// objects that watch it and listen to RAUW and Destroy events.  See
+/// llvm/Support/ValueHandle.h for details.
+///
+/// @brief LLVM Value Representation
+class Value {
+  const unsigned char SubclassID;   // Subclass identifier (for isa/dyn_cast)
+  unsigned char HasValueHandle : 1; // Has a ValueHandle pointing to this?
+protected:
+  /// SubclassOptionalData - This member is similar to SubclassData, however it
+  /// is for holding information which may be used to aid optimization, but
+  /// which may be cleared to zero without affecting conservative
+  /// interpretation.
+  unsigned char SubclassOptionalData : 7;
+
+private:
+  /// SubclassData - This member is defined by this class, but is not used for
+  /// anything.  Subclasses can use it to hold whatever state they find useful.
+  /// This field is initialized to zero by the ctor.
+  unsigned short SubclassData;
+
+  Type *VTy;
+  Use *UseList;
+
+  friend class ValueSymbolTable; // Allow ValueSymbolTable to directly mod Name.
+  friend class ValueHandleBase;
+  ValueName *Name;
+
+  void operator=(const Value &) LLVM_DELETED_FUNCTION;
+  Value(const Value &) LLVM_DELETED_FUNCTION;
+
+protected:
+  /// printCustom - Value subclasses can override this to implement custom
+  /// printing behavior.
+  virtual void printCustom(raw_ostream &O) const;
+
+  Value(Type *Ty, unsigned scid);
+public:
+  virtual ~Value();
+
+  /// dump - Support for debugging, callable in GDB: V->dump()
+  //
+  void dump() const;
+
+  /// print - Implement operator<< on Value.
+  ///
+  void print(raw_ostream &O, AssemblyAnnotationWriter *AAW = 0) const;
+
+  /// All values are typed, get the type of this value.
+  ///
+  Type *getType() const { return VTy; }
+
+  /// All values hold a context through their type.
+  LLVMContext &getContext() const;
+
+  // All values can potentially be named.
+  bool hasName() const { return Name != 0 && SubclassID != MDStringVal; }
+  ValueName *getValueName() const { return Name; }
+  void setValueName(ValueName *VN) { Name = VN; }
+  
+  /// getName() - Return a constant reference to the value's name. This is cheap
+  /// and guaranteed to return the same reference as long as the value is not
+  /// modified.
+  StringRef getName() const;
+
+  /// setName() - Change the name of the value, choosing a new unique name if
+  /// the provided name is taken.
+  ///
+  /// \param Name The new name; or "" if the value's name should be removed.
+  void setName(const Twine &Name);
+
+  
+  /// takeName - transfer the name from V to this value, setting V's name to
+  /// empty.  It is an error to call V->takeName(V). 
+  void takeName(Value *V);
+
+  /// replaceAllUsesWith - Go through the uses list for this definition and make
+  /// each use point to "V" instead of "this".  After this completes, 'this's
+  /// use list is guaranteed to be empty.
+  ///
+  void replaceAllUsesWith(Value *V);
+
+  //----------------------------------------------------------------------
+  // Methods for handling the chain of uses of this Value.
+  //
+  typedef value_use_iterator<User>       use_iterator;
+  typedef value_use_iterator<const User> const_use_iterator;
+
+  bool               use_empty() const { return UseList == 0; }
+  use_iterator       use_begin()       { return use_iterator(UseList); }
+  const_use_iterator use_begin() const { return const_use_iterator(UseList); }
+  use_iterator       use_end()         { return use_iterator(0);   }
+  const_use_iterator use_end()   const { return const_use_iterator(0);   }
+  User              *use_back()        { return *use_begin(); }
+  const User        *use_back()  const { return *use_begin(); }
+
+  /// hasOneUse - Return true if there is exactly one user of this value.  This
+  /// is specialized because it is a common request and does not require
+  /// traversing the whole use list.
+  ///
+  bool hasOneUse() const {
+    const_use_iterator I = use_begin(), E = use_end();
+    if (I == E) return false;
+    return ++I == E;
+  }
+
+  /// hasNUses - Return true if this Value has exactly N users.
+  ///
+  bool hasNUses(unsigned N) const;
+
+  /// hasNUsesOrMore - Return true if this value has N users or more.  This is
+  /// logically equivalent to getNumUses() >= N.
+  ///
+  bool hasNUsesOrMore(unsigned N) const;
+
+  bool isUsedInBasicBlock(const BasicBlock *BB) const;
+
+  /// getNumUses - This method computes the number of uses of this Value.  This
+  /// is a linear time operation.  Use hasOneUse, hasNUses, or hasNUsesOrMore
+  /// to check for specific values.
+  unsigned getNumUses() const;
+
+  /// addUse - This method should only be used by the Use class.
+  ///
+  void addUse(Use &U) { U.addToList(&UseList); }
+
+  /// An enumeration for keeping track of the concrete subclass of Value that
+  /// is actually instantiated. Values of this enumeration are kept in the 
+  /// Value classes SubclassID field. They are used for concrete type
+  /// identification.
+  enum ValueTy {
+    ArgumentVal,              // This is an instance of Argument
+    BasicBlockVal,            // This is an instance of BasicBlock
+    FunctionVal,              // This is an instance of Function
+    GlobalAliasVal,           // This is an instance of GlobalAlias
+    GlobalVariableVal,        // This is an instance of GlobalVariable
+    UndefValueVal,            // This is an instance of UndefValue
+    BlockAddressVal,          // This is an instance of BlockAddress
+    ConstantExprVal,          // This is an instance of ConstantExpr
+    ConstantAggregateZeroVal, // This is an instance of ConstantAggregateZero
+    ConstantDataArrayVal,     // This is an instance of ConstantDataArray
+    ConstantDataVectorVal,    // This is an instance of ConstantDataVector
+    ConstantIntVal,           // This is an instance of ConstantInt
+    ConstantFPVal,            // This is an instance of ConstantFP
+    ConstantArrayVal,         // This is an instance of ConstantArray
+    ConstantStructVal,        // This is an instance of ConstantStruct
+    ConstantVectorVal,        // This is an instance of ConstantVector
+    ConstantPointerNullVal,   // This is an instance of ConstantPointerNull
+    MDNodeVal,                // This is an instance of MDNode
+    MDStringVal,              // This is an instance of MDString
+    InlineAsmVal,             // This is an instance of InlineAsm
+    PseudoSourceValueVal,     // This is an instance of PseudoSourceValue
+    FixedStackPseudoSourceValueVal, // This is an instance of 
+                                    // FixedStackPseudoSourceValue
+    InstructionVal,           // This is an instance of Instruction
+    // Enum values starting at InstructionVal are used for Instructions;
+    // don't add new values here!
+
+    // Markers:
+    ConstantFirstVal = FunctionVal,
+    ConstantLastVal  = ConstantPointerNullVal
+  };
+
+  /// getValueID - Return an ID for the concrete type of this object.  This is
+  /// used to implement the classof checks.  This should not be used for any
+  /// other purpose, as the values may change as LLVM evolves.  Also, note that
+  /// for instructions, the Instruction's opcode is added to InstructionVal. So
+  /// this means three things:
+  /// # there is no value with code InstructionVal (no opcode==0).
+  /// # there are more possible values for the value type than in ValueTy enum.
+  /// # the InstructionVal enumerator must be the highest valued enumerator in
+  ///   the ValueTy enum.
+  unsigned getValueID() const {
+    return SubclassID;
+  }
+
+  /// getRawSubclassOptionalData - Return the raw optional flags value
+  /// contained in this value. This should only be used when testing two
+  /// Values for equivalence.
+  unsigned getRawSubclassOptionalData() const {
+    return SubclassOptionalData;
+  }
+
+  /// clearSubclassOptionalData - Clear the optional flags contained in
+  /// this value.
+  void clearSubclassOptionalData() {
+    SubclassOptionalData = 0;
+  }
+
+  /// hasSameSubclassOptionalData - Test whether the optional flags contained
+  /// in this value are equal to the optional flags in the given value.
+  bool hasSameSubclassOptionalData(const Value *V) const {
+    return SubclassOptionalData == V->SubclassOptionalData;
+  }
+
+  /// intersectOptionalDataWith - Clear any optional flags in this value
+  /// that are not also set in the given value.
+  void intersectOptionalDataWith(const Value *V) {
+    SubclassOptionalData &= V->SubclassOptionalData;
+  }
+
+  /// hasValueHandle - Return true if there is a value handle associated with
+  /// this value.
+  bool hasValueHandle() const { return HasValueHandle; }
+
+  /// stripPointerCasts - This method strips off any unneeded pointer casts and
+  /// all-zero GEPs from the specified value, returning the original uncasted
+  /// value. If this is called on a non-pointer value, it returns 'this'.
+  Value *stripPointerCasts();
+  const Value *stripPointerCasts() const {
+    return const_cast<Value*>(this)->stripPointerCasts();
+  }
+
+  /// stripInBoundsConstantOffsets - This method strips off unneeded pointer casts and
+  /// all-constant GEPs from the specified value, returning the original
+  /// pointer value. If this is called on a non-pointer value, it returns
+  /// 'this'.
+  Value *stripInBoundsConstantOffsets();
+  const Value *stripInBoundsConstantOffsets() const {
+    return const_cast<Value*>(this)->stripInBoundsConstantOffsets();
+  }
+
+  /// stripInBoundsOffsets - This method strips off unneeded pointer casts and
+  /// any in-bounds Offsets from the specified value, returning the original
+  /// pointer value. If this is called on a non-pointer value, it returns
+  /// 'this'.
+  Value *stripInBoundsOffsets();
+  const Value *stripInBoundsOffsets() const {
+    return const_cast<Value*>(this)->stripInBoundsOffsets();
+  }
+
+  /// isDereferenceablePointer - Test if this value is always a pointer to
+  /// allocated and suitably aligned memory for a simple load or store.
+  bool isDereferenceablePointer() const;
+  
+  /// DoPHITranslation - If this value is a PHI node with CurBB as its parent,
+  /// return the value in the PHI node corresponding to PredBB.  If not, return
+  /// ourself.  This is useful if you want to know the value something has in a
+  /// predecessor block.
+  Value *DoPHITranslation(const BasicBlock *CurBB, const BasicBlock *PredBB);
+
+  const Value *DoPHITranslation(const BasicBlock *CurBB,
+                                const BasicBlock *PredBB) const{
+    return const_cast<Value*>(this)->DoPHITranslation(CurBB, PredBB);
+  }
+  
+  /// MaximumAlignment - This is the greatest alignment value supported by
+  /// load, store, and alloca instructions, and global values.
+  static const unsigned MaximumAlignment = 1u << 29;
+  
+  /// mutateType - Mutate the type of this Value to be of the specified type.
+  /// Note that this is an extremely dangerous operation which can create
+  /// completely invalid IR very easily.  It is strongly recommended that you
+  /// recreate IR objects with the right types instead of mutating them in
+  /// place.
+  void mutateType(Type *Ty) {
+    VTy = Ty;
+  }
+  
+protected:
+  unsigned short getSubclassDataFromValue() const { return SubclassData; }
+  void setValueSubclassData(unsigned short D) { SubclassData = D; }
+};
+
+inline raw_ostream &operator<<(raw_ostream &OS, const Value &V) {
+  V.print(OS);
+  return OS;
+}
+  
+void Use::set(Value *V) {
+  if (Val) removeFromList();
+  Val = V;
+  if (V) V->addUse(*this);
+}
+
+
+// isa - Provide some specializations of isa so that we don't have to include
+// the subtype header files to test to see if the value is a subclass...
+//
+template <> struct isa_impl<Constant, Value> {
+  static inline bool doit(const Value &Val) {
+    return Val.getValueID() >= Value::ConstantFirstVal &&
+      Val.getValueID() <= Value::ConstantLastVal;
+  }
+};
+
+template <> struct isa_impl<Argument, Value> {
+  static inline bool doit (const Value &Val) {
+    return Val.getValueID() == Value::ArgumentVal;
+  }
+};
+
+template <> struct isa_impl<InlineAsm, Value> { 
+  static inline bool doit(const Value &Val) {
+    return Val.getValueID() == Value::InlineAsmVal;
+  }
+};
+
+template <> struct isa_impl<Instruction, Value> { 
+  static inline bool doit(const Value &Val) {
+    return Val.getValueID() >= Value::InstructionVal;
+  }
+};
+
+template <> struct isa_impl<BasicBlock, Value> { 
+  static inline bool doit(const Value &Val) {
+    return Val.getValueID() == Value::BasicBlockVal;
+  }
+};
+
+template <> struct isa_impl<Function, Value> { 
+  static inline bool doit(const Value &Val) {
+    return Val.getValueID() == Value::FunctionVal;
+  }
+};
+
+template <> struct isa_impl<GlobalVariable, Value> { 
+  static inline bool doit(const Value &Val) {
+    return Val.getValueID() == Value::GlobalVariableVal;
+  }
+};
+
+template <> struct isa_impl<GlobalAlias, Value> { 
+  static inline bool doit(const Value &Val) {
+    return Val.getValueID() == Value::GlobalAliasVal;
+  }
+};
+
+template <> struct isa_impl<GlobalValue, Value> { 
+  static inline bool doit(const Value &Val) {
+    return isa<GlobalVariable>(Val) || isa<Function>(Val) ||
+      isa<GlobalAlias>(Val);
+  }
+};
+
+template <> struct isa_impl<MDNode, Value> { 
+  static inline bool doit(const Value &Val) {
+    return Val.getValueID() == Value::MDNodeVal;
+  }
+};
+  
+// Value* is only 4-byte aligned.
+template<>
+class PointerLikeTypeTraits<Value*> {
+  typedef Value* PT;
+public:
+  static inline void *getAsVoidPointer(PT P) { return P; }
+  static inline PT getFromVoidPointer(void *P) {
+    return static_cast<PT>(P);
+  }
+  enum { NumLowBitsAvailable = 2 };
+};
+
+} // End llvm namespace
+
+#endif

thirdparty/clang/include/llvm/IR/ValueSymbolTable.h

@@ -0,0 +1,133 @@
+//===-- llvm/ValueSymbolTable.h - Implement a Value Symtab ------*- C++ -*-===//
+//
+//                     The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure
+//
+// This file is distributed under the University of Illinois Open Source
+// License. See LICENSE.TXT for details.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+//
+// This file implements the name/Value symbol table for LLVM.
+//
+//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
+
+#ifndef LLVM_IR_VALUESYMBOLTABLE_H
+#define LLVM_IR_VALUESYMBOLTABLE_H
+
+#include "llvm/ADT/StringMap.h"
+#include "llvm/IR/Value.h"
+#include "llvm/Support/DataTypes.h"
+
+namespace llvm {
+  template<typename ValueSubClass, typename ItemParentClass>
+        class SymbolTableListTraits;
+  class BasicBlock;
+  class Function;
+  class NamedMDNode;
+  class Module;
+  class StringRef;
+
+/// This class provides a symbol table of name/value pairs. It is essentially
+/// a std::map<std::string,Value*> but has a controlled interface provided by
+/// LLVM as well as ensuring uniqueness of names.
+///
+class ValueSymbolTable {
+  friend class Value;
+  friend class SymbolTableListTraits<Argument, Function>;
+  friend class SymbolTableListTraits<BasicBlock, Function>;
+  friend class SymbolTableListTraits<Instruction, BasicBlock>;
+  friend class SymbolTableListTraits<Function, Module>;
+  friend class SymbolTableListTraits<GlobalVariable, Module>;
+  friend class SymbolTableListTraits<GlobalAlias, Module>;
+/// @name Types
+/// @{
+public:
+  /// @brief A mapping of names to values.
+  typedef StringMap<Value*> ValueMap;
+
+  /// @brief An iterator over a ValueMap.
+  typedef ValueMap::iterator iterator;
+
+  /// @brief A const_iterator over a ValueMap.
+  typedef ValueMap::const_iterator const_iterator;
+
+/// @}
+/// @name Constructors
+/// @{
+public:
+
+  ValueSymbolTable() : vmap(0), LastUnique(0) {}
+  ~ValueSymbolTable();
+
+/// @}
+/// @name Accessors
+/// @{
+public:
+
+  /// This method finds the value with the given \p Name in the
+  /// the symbol table. 
+  /// @returns the value associated with the \p Name
+  /// @brief Lookup a named Value.
+  Value *lookup(StringRef Name) const { return vmap.lookup(Name); }
+
+  /// @returns true iff the symbol table is empty
+  /// @brief Determine if the symbol table is empty
+  inline bool empty() const { return vmap.empty(); }
+
+  /// @brief The number of name/type pairs is returned.
+  inline unsigned size() const { return unsigned(vmap.size()); }
+
+  /// This function can be used from the debugger to display the
+  /// content of the symbol table while debugging.
+  /// @brief Print out symbol table on stderr
+  void dump() const;
+
+/// @}
+/// @name Iteration
+/// @{
+public:
+  /// @brief Get an iterator that from the beginning of the symbol table.
+  inline iterator begin() { return vmap.begin(); }
+
+  /// @brief Get a const_iterator that from the beginning of the symbol table.
+  inline const_iterator begin() const { return vmap.begin(); }
+
+  /// @brief Get an iterator to the end of the symbol table.
+  inline iterator end() { return vmap.end(); }
+
+  /// @brief Get a const_iterator to the end of the symbol table.
+  inline const_iterator end() const { return vmap.end(); }
+  
+/// @}
+/// @name Mutators
+/// @{
+private:
+  /// This method adds the provided value \p N to the symbol table.  The Value
+  /// must have a name which is used to place the value in the symbol table. 
+  /// If the inserted name conflicts, this renames the value.
+  /// @brief Add a named value to the symbol table
+  void reinsertValue(Value *V);
+    
+  /// createValueName - This method attempts to create a value name and insert
+  /// it into the symbol table with the specified name.  If it conflicts, it
+  /// auto-renames the name and returns that instead.
+  ValueName *createValueName(StringRef Name, Value *V);
+  
+  /// This method removes a value from the symbol table.  It leaves the
+  /// ValueName attached to the value, but it is no longer inserted in the
+  /// symtab.
+  void removeValueName(ValueName *V);
+  
+/// @}
+/// @name Internal Data
+/// @{
+private:
+  ValueMap vmap;                    ///< The map that holds the symbol table.
+  mutable uint32_t LastUnique; ///< Counter for tracking unique names
+
+/// @}
+};
+
+} // End llvm namespace
+
+#endif